Manual Del Usuario Chevrolet Cruze 2012 Owners PDF

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)
2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15
Keys, Doors, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-28
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-33 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-36
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-41
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-54
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Trademarks and License
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Special Application
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Additional Maintenance Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Recommended Fluids, Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for P.O. Box 07130
CRUZE are trademarks and/or Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
service marks of General Motors Detroit, MI 48207
appears in this manual.
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, 1-800-551-4123
or licensors. Keep this manual in the vehicle for Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
quick reference. française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20935335 B Second Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control }: Power

Here are some additional symbols B : Engine Coolant Temperature /: Remote Vehicle Start
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more O : Exterior Lamps >: Safety Belt Reminders
information on the symbol, refer to # : Fog Lamps 7: Tire Pressure Monitor
the Index.
. : Fuel Gauge d: Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
9 : Airbag Readiness Light + : Fuses M: Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Air Conditioning 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls j : LATCH System Child
or OnStar Restraints
$ : Brake System Warning Light *: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
" : Charging System :: Oil Pressure
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2
Tire Sealant and
Vehicle Features Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Initial Drive Information Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Driving for Better Fuel
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roadside Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Driver Information
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19
Passenger Sensing Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
In Brief 1-3
A. Exterior Lamp Controls on I. Infotainment on page 7‑1. T. Ignition Switch or Keyless

page 6‑1. Satellite Radio on page 7‑13 (If Ignition Button (If Equipped).
Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5 Equipped). See Ignition Positions (Key
(If Equipped). Access) on page 9‑15 or
J. Infotainment Display Screen. Ignition Positions (Keyless
Instrument Panel Illumination K. Instrument Panel Storage on Access) on page 9‑18.
Control on page 6‑5. page 4‑1. U. Driver Knee Airbag. See Where
B. Air Vents on page 8‑6. L. Light Sensor. See Automatic Are the Airbags? on page 3‑20.
C. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Headlamp System on page 6‑4. V. Power Door Locks on
Changer on page 6‑2. M. Passenger Airbag. See Where page 2‑12.
Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Are the Airbags? on page 3‑20. W. Hazard Warning Flashers on
See Turn and Lane-Change N. Hood Release. See Hood on page 6‑4.
Signals on page 6‑4. page 10‑4. X. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Driver Information Center (DIC) O. Data Link Connector (DLC) Transmission on page 9‑28 or
Buttons. See Driver Information (Out of View). See Malfunction Manual Transmission on
Center (DIC) on page 5‑22. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑13. page 9‑32.
D. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8. P. Instrument Panel Fuse Block on Y. Traction Control System (TCS)
E. Horn on page 5‑3. page 10‑38. on page 9‑36.
F. Driver Information Center (DIC) Q. Cruise Control on page 9‑39. StabiliTrak® System on
on page 5‑22. page 9‑37.
R. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
G. Steering Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
page 5‑2. S. Driver Airbag. See Where Are
H. Windshield Wiper/Washer on the Airbags? on page 3‑20.
page 5‑3.
1-4 In Brief
Z. Climate Control Systems on Initial Drive

page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
Automatic Climate Control
Information
System on page 8‑3 This section provides a brief
(If Equipped). overview about some of the
Heated Front Seats on page 3‑6 important features that may or may
(If Equipped). not be on your specific vehicle.
AA. Passenger Airbag Status For more detailed information, refer

Indicator on page 5‑12. to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
AB. Passenger Knee Airbag. See
Where Are the Airbags? on Remote Keyless Entry
page 3‑20. RKE Transmitter with Remote
(RKE) System Start Shown
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press the key release button to
transmitter will work up to 20 m extend the key blade. The key can
(65 ft) away from the vehicle. be used for the ignition and all
locks.
Press K to unlock the driver door or
all doors.
Press Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can
be personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑33.
In Brief 1-5
Press and hold V briefly to open Starting the Vehicle Canceling a Remote Start
the trunk. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the To cancel a remote start, do one of
Press and hold 7 briefly to locate vehicle. the following:
the vehicle. 2. Press and release Q. . Aim the RKE transmitter
at the vehicle and press and
Press and hold 7 for at least 3. Immediately after completing
hold / until the parking lamps
two seconds to sound the panic Step 2, press and hold / until turn off.
alarm. the turn signal lamps flash, or for
about two seconds if the vehicle
. Turn on the hazard warning
Press 7 again to cancel the panic flashers.
is not in view.
alarm.
When the engine starts, the parking
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
lamps will turn on and remain on as See Remote Vehicle Start on
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
long as the engine is running. The page 2‑9.
Operation on page 2‑4.
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on. Door Locks
Remote Vehicle Start
The engine will continue to run for To lock or unlock the vehicle from
For vehicles with this feature, the 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
engine can be started from outside outside, use the Remote Keyless
10-minute time extension. Remote Entry (RKE) transmitter or the key.
the vehicle. start can be extended only once. From inside the vehicle, use the
power door lock switch.
See Door Locks on page 2‑11.
1-6 In Brief
Power Door Locks Seat Adjustment

Manual Front Seats
Press o { to activate the safety

locks on the rear doors. The
The power door lock switch is on indicator light comes on when
the instrument panel. activated.
To adjust a manual seat:
K: Press to unlock the doors. The rear door power windows are
also disabled. 1. Pull the handle at the front of
Q: Press to lock the doors. the seat.
See Power Door Locks on Press o { again to deactivate the
2. Slide the seat to the desired
page 2‑12. lockout switch. position and release the handle.
Safety Locks If the indicator light flashes, the 3. Try to move the seat back and
feature may not be working properly. forth to be sure it is locked in
The rear door safety locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear See Safety Locks on page 2‑12. place.
doors from inside the vehicle.
In Brief 1-7
Seat Height Adjuster Seat Cushion Tilt Feature Reclining Seatbacks
Six-Way Manual Seat Shown,

If available, move the lever up or Four-Way Similar To recline the seatback:
down to manually raise or lower 1. Lift the lever.
the seat. If available, move the lever up or
down to raise or lower the front of 2. Move the seatback to the
the seat cushion. desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback in
place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
1-8 In Brief
To return the seatback to an upright Power Driver Seat

. Raise or lower the front part of
position: the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
seatback, and the seatback moving the rear of the control up
returns to the upright position. or down.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to See Power Seat Adjustment on
make sure it is locked. page 3‑4.
See Reclining Seatbacks on Rear Seats
page 3‑5. The rear seatbacks can be folded.
For detailed instructions, see Rear
Seats on page 3‑7.
To adjust a power driver seat,
if equipped:
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
In Brief 1-9
Heated Seats Press the control once for the Safety Belts
highest setting. With each press of
the control, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
and then the off setting. Three lights
indicate the highest setting and one
light the lowest.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑6 for more information.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
On vehicles with heated front seats, Refer to the following sections for
adjusted properly.
the controls are on the center important information on how to use
console. The engine must be To achieve a comfortable seating safety belts properly:
running to operate the heated seats. position, change the seatback . Safety Belts on page 3‑9.
recline angle as little as necessary
Press L or M to heat the driver or while keeping the seat and the . How to Wear Safety Belts
passenger seat cushion and head restraint height in the proper Properly on page 3‑10.
seatback. position. . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑11.
For more information see Head . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat Children (LATCH System) on
Adjustment on page 3‑3. page 3‑39.
1-10 In Brief
Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status 2. Move the control to adjust the
indicator will be visible on the mirror.
System instrument panel when the vehicle 3. Turn the selector switch to the
is started. See Passenger Airbag O position to deselect the mirror.
Status Indicator on page 5‑12.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑17.
Mirror Adjustment If the vehicle has heated mirrors,
see Heated Mirrors on page 2‑17.
Exterior
United States
Canada
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions. No Vehicles with a manual mirror
other airbag is affected by the Controls for the outside power adjustment have controls next to
passenger sensing system. See mirrors are on the driver door. each mirror.
Passenger Sensing System on 1. Turn the selector switch to
page 3‑25 for important information. See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑16.
L (Left) or R (Right) to choose
the driver or passenger mirror.
In Brief 1-11
Interior Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Adjust the inside rearview mirror by Adjustment Dome Lamps
moving it up and down or side to
side. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare
from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑17.
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of lights from behind the
vehicle. The dimming feature and
indicator light come on each time
the vehicle is started. To adjust the steering wheel: The dome lamp controls are located
See Automatic Dimming Rearview 1. Pull the lever (A) down. in the headliner.
Mirror on page 2‑17. 2. Move the steering wheel up (: Press to turn the lamps off,
or down. even when a door is open.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel H : Press to turn the lamps on
closer or away from you. automatically when a door is
opened.
4. Push the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place. ' : Press to turn on the dome
lamps.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
1-12 In Brief
Reading Lamps Instrument Panel Illumination Exterior Lighting

Control
The reading lamps are located in The exterior lamp control is located
the overhead console. This feature controls the brightness to the left of the steering column on
# or $ : Press the button near of the instrument panel controls and the instrument panel.
each lamp to turn it on or off. infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is located to the left O : Briefly turn to this position to
of the steering column on the turn the automatic lamp control off
instrument panel. or on again.
D: Turn the thumbwheel up or AUTO: Turns the headlamps on
down and hold, to brighten or dim automatically at normal brightness,
the instrument panel controls and together with the parking lamps,
infotainment display screen. taillamps, license plate lamps,
sidemarker lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
; : Turns on the parking lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps,
sidemarker lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
In Brief 1-13
5 : Turns on the headlamps, Windshield Wiper/Washer

parking lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, sidemarker lamps, and
instrument panel lights. A warning
chime sounds if the driver door is
opened when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
# : For vehicles with fog lamps, 3: Move the lever to 3 , then
press to turn the lamps on or off. turn the band up for more frequent
The windshield wiper lever is wipes or down for less frequent
For more information, see: on the right side of the steering wipes.
column. With the ignition in ACC/
. Exterior Lamp Controls on ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move 9 : Use to turn the windshield
page 6‑1. the windshield wiper lever to select wipers off.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) the wiper speed. 3 : Briefly move the wiper lever
on page 6‑3. 2: Use for fast wipes. down for a single wipe or hold down
. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. for several wipes.
1: Use for slow wipes.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you to spray windshield
washer fluid and activate the wipers.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
1-14 In Brief
Climate Controls G. Rear Window Defogger G. Rear Window Defogger

The heating, cooling, defrosting, and H. Defog H. Recirculation
ventilation for the vehicle can be I. Defrost I. Defog
controlled with these systems.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning J. Air Conditioning
Vehicles without Air Conditioning K. Defrost
Automatic Climate Control System
A. Temperature Control
B. Bi-level Air Mode
C. Floor Air Mode A. Temperature Control
C. Floor Air Mode
D. Vent Air Mode B. Rear Window Defogger
D. Vent Air Mode
E. Fan Control C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
E. Fan Control
F. Driver and Passenger Heated D. Defrost
F. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped)
Seats (If Equipped) E. Fan Control
In Brief 1-15
F. Driver and Passenger Heated Electronic Range Select (ERS) Vehicle Features
Seats (If Equipped) allows for the selection of a range of
gears.
G. Power Radio(s)
H. Recirculation See Manual Mode on page 9‑30.
O : Press to turn the system
I. MODE (Air Delivery Mode) Up‐Shift Light on and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
J. AQS (Air Quality Sensor)
BAND: Press to choose between
K. Air Conditioning FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
See Climate Control Systems on MENU: Turn to select radio
page 8‑1 or Automatic Climate
stations. Press to select a menu.
Control System on page 8‑3
(If Equipped). g: Press to seek the previous
If the vehicle has a manual station or track.
Transmission transmission, it will have an up-shift l : Press to seek the next station
light that indicates when to shift to or track.
Manual Mode the next higher gear for the best fuel
economy. Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save and
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows select favorite stations.
the automatic transmission to be See Manual Transmission on
shifted similar to a manual page 9‑32. INFO: Press to show available
transmission. information about the current station
or track.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
1-16 In Brief
Storing a Favorite Station 3. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL Satellite Radio

knob to adjust the highlighted
Stations from all bands can be Vehicles with an XM™ satellite
number.
stored in the favorite lists in any radio tuner and a valid XM satellite
order. Up to six stations can be 4. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL radio subscription can receive XM
stored in each favorite page and the knob to select the next number. programming.
number of available favorite pages 5. To save the time and return to
can be set. the Time Settings menu, press
XM Satellite Radio Service
To store the station to a position in the BACK button at any time or XM is a satellite radio service based
the list, press the corresponding press the MENU or MENU/SEL in the 48 contiguous United States
numeric button 1 to 6 until a beep is knob after adjusting the minutes. and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
heard. satellite radio has a wide variety of
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format programming and commercial-free
For more information, see “Storing a music, coast to coast, and in
1. Press the CONFIG button and
Station as a Favorite” in AM-FM digital-quality sound. A fee is
select Time Settings.
Radio on page 7‑11. required to receive the XM service.
2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
Setting the Clock For more information refer to:
3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
Adjusting the Time knob to select the 12 hour or . www.xmradio.com or call
The clock menu can be only be 24 hour display format. 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
used with the radio on while in See Clock on page 5‑5. . www.xmradio.ca or call
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
1. Press the CONFIG button and For more information, see Satellite
select Time Settings. Radio on page 7‑13.
2. Select Set Time.
In Brief 1-17
Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Overview) on systems. See Bluetooth (Overview)
page 7‑23 or Bluetooth on page 7‑23 or Bluetooth
Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm (Infotainment Controls) on (Infotainment Controls) on
(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Voice page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Voice
port located in the center console. Recognition) on page 7‑28. Recognition) on page 7‑28, the
External devices such as iPods®, OnStar Owner’s Guide, or the
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD Steering Wheel Controls separate navigation manual for
changers, and USB drives may be more information.
connected, depending on the audio
system. $ / i : Press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again
For more information, see Auxiliary to turn the sound on. For vehicles
Devices on page 7‑20. with OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
press to reject an incoming call,
Bluetooth® or to end a current call.
The Bluetooth system allows users _ SRC ^ : Turn to select an audio
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone source.
to make and receive hands-free
calls using the vehicle audio system Turn _ or ^ to select the next or
and controls. previous favorite radio station, CD,
or MP3 track.
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle For vehicles with audio steering + x −: Press + to increase the
Bluetooth system before it can be wheel controls, some audio controls
volume. Press − to decrease the
used in the vehicle. Not all phones can be adjusted at the steering
volume.
will support all functions. wheel.
For more information, see Steering
b/g: For vehicles with a
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
Bluetooth, OnStar, or navigation
system, press to interact with those
1-18 In Brief
Cruise Control *: Press to disengage cruise Driver Information

control without erasing the set Center (DIC)
speed from memory.
The DIC display is located in the
See Cruise Control on page 9‑39. center of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of many
Navigation System vehicle systems. The controls for
If the vehicle has a navigation the DIC are located on the turn
system, there is a separate signal lever.
navigation system manual that
includes information on the radio,
audio players, and navigation
system.
The navigation system provides
For vehicles with cruise control: detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
1 : Press to turn the cruise control destination has been set, the A. SET/CLR: Press to set or
system on and off. system provides turn-by-turn clear the menu item when it is
RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up to instructions for reaching the displayed.
resume a previously set speed or to destination. In addition, the system B. w / x : Use the thumbwheel
accelerate. can help locate a variety of points to scroll through the items in
of interest (POIs), such as banks, each menu.
SET/−: Move the thumbwheel down
airports, restaurants, and more.
to set a speed or to make the
vehicle decelerate. See the navigation system manual
for more information.
In Brief 1-19
C. MENU: Press to display the Keep the sensors on the vehicle's Performance and
Trip/Fuel menu and the Vehicle rear bumper clean to ensure proper
Information menu. This button is operation. Maintenance
also used to return to or exit the See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
last screen displayed on page 9‑41 for more information. Traction Control
the DIC.
System (TCS)
For more information, see Driver Power Outlets The traction control system limits
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑22. The accessory power outlets can be wheel spin. The system is on when
used to plug in electrical equipment, the vehicle is started.
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . To turn off traction control, press
If available, Ultrasonic Rear Parking
There is one accessory power outlet and release g located on the
located on the center floor console
Assist (URPA) system uses sensors console. i illuminates and the
and one on the rear of the center
on the rear bumper to assist with appropriate DIC message
floor console. These outlets are
parking and avoiding objects while displays. See Vehicle Messages
powered when the key is in ON/
in R (Reverse). It operates at (Canada Uplevel and United
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). States) on page 5‑27 or Vehicle
the driver door is opened within
URPA uses audible beeps to Messages (Canada Base Level)
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
provide distance and system on page 5‑27.
See Retained Accessory Power
information. (RAP) on page 9‑23. . Press and release g again to
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. turn traction control back on.
For more information, see Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑36.
1-20 In Brief
StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
The StabiliTrak system assists with This vehicle may have a Tire inflated to the proper pressure.
directional control of the vehicle in Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
difficult driving conditions. The The TPMS does not replace normal
system is on when the vehicle is monthly tire maintenance. It is the
started. driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
. To turn off both Traction Control
and StabiliTrak, press and See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑48.
hold g until g and i illuminate
and the appropriate DIC
message displays. See Vehicle The TPMS warning light alerts you Tire Sealant and
Messages (Canada Uplevel and to a significant loss in pressure of Compressor Kit
United States) on page 5‑27 or one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as This vehicle may come with a spare
Vehicle Messages (Canada tire and tire changing equipment or
Base Level) on page 5‑27. soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure a tire sealant and compressor kit.
. Press g again to turn on both shown on the Tire and Loading The kit can be used to temporarily
systems. Information label. See Vehicle Load seal small punctures in the tread
Limits on page 9‑10. The warning area of the tire.
For more information, see
light will remain on until the tire See Tire Sealant and Compressor
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.
pressure is corrected. Kit on page 10‑62 for complete
During cooler conditions, the low tire operating information.
pressure warning light may appear If the vehicle came with a spare tire
when the vehicle is first started and and tire changing equipment, see If
then turn off. This may be an early a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑60.
In Brief 1-21
. Avoid idling the engine for long
Engine Oil Life System 2. Press the SET button to reset
periods of time.
the oil life at 100%. When
The engine oil life system calculates prompted, use the thumbwheel . When road and weather
engine oil life based on vehicle use to highlight YES or NO. Press conditions are appropriate, use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE the SET/CLEAR button to cruise control.
OIL SOON DIC message or Code confirm.
82 DIC message when it is . Always follow posted speed
necessary to change the engine oil Be careful not to reset the oil life limits or drive more slowly when
and filter. display accidentally at any time conditions require.
other than after the oil is changed.
Remember, the Oil Life display It cannot be reset accurately.
. Keep vehicle tires properly
must be reset after each oil change. inflated.
It will not reset itself. Also, be See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑11.
. Combine several trips into a
careful not to reset the Oil Life single trip.
display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just Driving for Better Fuel . Replace the vehicle's tires with
been changed. It cannot be reset Economy the same TPC Spec number
accurately until the next oil change. molded into the tire's sidewall
To reset the engine oil life system Driving habits can affect fuel near the size.
press the SET button while the Oil mileage. Here are some driving . Follow recommended scheduled
Life display is active. tips to get the best fuel economy
maintenance.
possible.
Resetting the Oil Life System . Avoid fast starts and accelerate
1. Using the DIC MENU button and smoothly.
thumbwheel, scroll until you . Brake gradually and avoid
reach REMAINING OIL LIFE on
abrupt stops.
the DIC (: % for Canada).
1-22 In Brief
Roadside Assistance Online Owner Center Advisors to provide a wide range

of safety, security, navigation,
Program The Online Owner Center is a
diagnostics, and calling services.
complimentary service that includes
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 online service reminders, vehicle Automatic Crash Response
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges, In a crash, built‐in sensors
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 automatically alert an OnStar
and more.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, Advisor who is immediately
Sign up today at: connected to the vehicle to see if
you are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program. U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on you need help.
“Owners,” then “Manage My How OnStar Service Works
See Roadside Assistance Program
Chevrolet/Owners Login”)
on page 13‑5 for more information. Q : Push this blue button to
Canada: chevroletowner.ca connect to a specially trained
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
OnStar Advisor to verify your
If you have an active OnStar OnStar® account information and to answer
subscription, press the Q button questions.
and the current GPS location will be
sent to an OnStar advisor who will
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
assess your problem, contact
specially trained OnStar Emergency
Roadside Assistance, and relay
Advisors.
your exact location to get the help
you need. X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
For vehicles with an active OnStar voice commands for Hands‐Free
subscription, OnStar uses several Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
innovative technologies and live Navigation.
In Brief 1-23
Automatic Crash Response, OnStar service requires wireless OnStar service may not work if the
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, communication networks and the OnStar equipment is not properly
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Global Positioning System (GPS) installed or you have not maintained
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, satellite network. Not all OnStar it even if the vehicle is in good
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn services are available everywhere working order and in compliance
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling or on all vehicles at all times. with all government regulations.
are available on most vehicles. Not OnStar service cannot work unless If you try to add, connect, or modify
all OnStar services are available on the vehicle is in a place where any equipment or software in the
all vehicles. For more information, OnStar has an agreement with a vehicle, OnStar service may not
see the OnStar Owner's Guide; wireless service provider for service work. Other problems beyond
visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or in that area, and the wireless OnStar's control may prevent
www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact service provider has coverage, service to you, such as hills, tall
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR network capacity, reception, and buildings, tunnels, weather,
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY technology compatible with OnStar's electrical system design and
1‐877‐248‐2080; or push service. Service involving location architecture of the vehicle, damage
the Q button to speak with an information about the vehicle cannot to important parts of the vehicle in a
OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day, work unless GPS signals are crash, or wireless phone network
seven days a week. available, unobstructed, and congestion or jamming.
For a full description of OnStar compatible with the OnStar See Radio Frequency Statement on
services and system limitations, see hardware. The vehicle must have page 13‑15 for information
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the a working electrical system and regarding Part 15 of the Federal
glove box. adequate battery power for the Communications Commission (FCC)
OnStar equipment to operate. rules and Industry Canada
OnStar service is subject to the Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.
1-24 In Brief
OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility

Controls Increase the volume of the radio
This vehicle may have Talk/Mute if the OnStar Advisor cannot be
buttons that can be used to interact heard.
with OnStar Hands-Free calling. If the light next to the OnStar
See Steering Wheel Controls on buttons is red, the system may not
be functioning properly. Push Q
On some vehicles, the Talk/Mute and request a vehicle diagnostic.
buttons can be used to dial phone If the light appears clear (no light
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's appears), your OnStar subscription
Guide for more information. has expired and all services have
been deactivated. Push Q to
confirm that the OnStar equipment
is active.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Doors

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17
Windows Vehicle Security
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-14 Windows
Keys and Locks Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-12
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks { WARNING

Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
{ WARNING transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons; children or others could
Leaving children in a vehicle with be badly injured or even killed.
the ignition key is dangerous for They could operate the power
many reasons. Children or others windows or other controls or even
could be badly injured or even make the vehicle move. The
killed. They could operate the windows will function with the
power windows or other controls RKE transmitter in the vehicle
The key that is part of the Remote
or even make the vehicle move. and they could be seriously
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
The windows will function with the injured or killed if caught in the can be used for the ignition and all
keys in the ignition and children path of a closing window. Do not locks if the vehicle is a key access
could be seriously injured or killed leave the RKE transmitter in a vehicle. If the vehicle has the
if caught in the path of a closing vehicle with children. keyless ignition, the key can be
window. Do not leave the keys in used for the locks.
a vehicle with children.
If the vehicle has an ignition and it Remote Keyless Entry

becomes difficult to turn the key,
inspect the key blade for debris.
(RKE) System
Periodically clean with a brush See Radio Frequency Statement on
or pick. page 13‑15 for information
See your dealer if a new key is regarding Part 15 of the Federal
needed. Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
If locked out of the vehicle, see Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13‑5. If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
With an active OnStar subscription,
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
. Check the distance. The
Press the button on the RKE transmitter may be too far from
transmitter to extend the key. Press unlock the vehicle. See OnStar® on
page 1‑22. the vehicle.
the button and the key blade to
retract the key.
. Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.

. If the transmitter is still not If the passenger door is open
working correctly, see your
when Q is pressed, all doors lock.
dealer or a qualified technician
for service. Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Remote Keyless Entry Alarm System on page 2‑14.
(RKE) System Operation K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
The transmitter functions will work driver door or all doors. See “Door
up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the Unlock Options” under Vehicle
vehicle. On vehicles with remote Personalization on page 5‑33.
start the distance will be greater. The turn signal indicators may flash
Keep in mind that other conditions, and/or the horn may sound to
such as those previously stated, Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. indicate unlocking. See “Unlock
can impact the performance of the Feedback” under Vehicle
transmitter. The turn signal indicators may flash Personalization on page 5‑33.
and/or the horn may sound to
indicate locking. See “Locking Pressing K will disarm the
Feedback” under Vehicle theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑33. Alarm System on page 2‑14.
If the driver door is open when Q is V (Remote Trunk Release):
pressed, all doors lock except the Press and hold briefly to open the
driver door, if enabled through the trunk.
vehicle personalization.
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic Keyless Access Operation To customize which doors unlock

Alarm): Press and hold briefly to when the driver door is opened,
Some vehicles have a keyless
locate the vehicle. The exterior see “Door Unlock Options” under
access system that lets you lock
lamps flash and the horn chirps. Vehicle Personalization on
and unlock the doors and access
page 5‑33.
Press and hold 7 for at least the trunk without removing the RKE
two seconds to sound the panic transmitter from your pocket, purse, Keyless Locking
alarm. The horn sounds and the briefcase, etc. The RKE transmitter
If the vehicle has the keyless
turn signals flash for 30 seconds, should be within 1 m (3 ft) of the
access system, this feature allows
door or trunk being opened. If the
or until 7 is pressed again or the vehicle has this feature, there will be
you to select whether the doors
vehicle is started. automatically lock during normal
a body colored touch pad on the
vehicle exit. When the vehicle is
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): outside front door handles.
turned off and all doors become
For vehicles with this feature, Keyless Unlocking closed, the vehicle will determine
press Q and then press and how many keyless access
With the RKE transmitter within
hold / within five seconds to 1 m (3 ft), approach the front door
transmitters remain in the vehicles
start the engine from outside the interior. If at least one keyless
and pull the handle to unlock and
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. access transmitter has been
open the door. If the transmitter is
See Remote Vehicle Start on removed from the interior of the
recognized, the door will unlock
page 2‑9 for additional information. vehicle, the doors will lock after
and open.
eight seconds.
The buttons on the keys are Entering any door other than the
disabled when there is a key in the driver door will always cause all of
ignition, if equipped. the doors to unlock. This is not
customizable.
If there are two keyless access door handle. This feature will be Programming with a Recognized
transmitters in the vehicle and available for several minutes after Transmitter (Keyless Access
one is removed, the other will be the vehicle has been turned off. Vehicles Only)
locked in. A person approaching A new transmitter can be
the outside of the locked vehicle Keyless Trunk Opening
programmed to the vehicle when
without an authorized keyless Lift up on the touch pad located there is one recognized transmitter.
access transmitter will not be able above the license plate to open the To program, the vehicle must be
to open the door, even with the trunk if the RKE transmitter is within off and all of the transmitters, both
transmitter in the vehicle. range. currently recognized and new, must
Lock Sensor Programming Transmitters to be with you.
the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
The vehicle can be reprogrammed
so that lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work. Any remaining
transmitters will need to be
reprogrammed. Each vehicle can
have up to five transmitters matched
to it.
When all doors are closed and the 1. Remove the plastic trim piece
ignition is off, the vehicle can be from the small storage area next
locked by pressing this area on the to the accessory power outlet
towards the front of the console,
to access the transmitter slot.
Push the button on the When all additional transmitters The Driver Information Center
recognized transmitter to extend are programmed, press and (DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN
the key blade. Insert the key hold the ignition for 10 seconds PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
blade into the transmitter slot. to exit programming mode. 2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC
2. Insert the vehicle key of the Replace the plastic trim piece displays PRESS ENGINE
new transmitter into the key lock from the small storage area. START BUTTON TO LEARN
cylinder located on the outside Programming without a and then press the ignition.
of the driver door and turn the Recognized Transmitter (Keyless The DIC displays will again
key to the unlock position five Access Vehicles Only) show REMOTE LEARN
times within 10 seconds. PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
If there are no currently recognized
The Driver Information Center transmitters available, follow this 3. Repeat Step 2 two additional
(DIC) displays READY FOR procedure to program up to five times. After the third time all
REMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5. transmitters. This feature is not previously known transmitters
3. Remove the recognized key and available in Canada. This procedure will no longer work with the
place the new transmitter into will take approximately 30 minutes vehicle. Remaining transmitters
the transmitter slot. to complete. The vehicle must be off can be relearned during the next
and all of the transmitters you wish steps.
4. Press the ignition. When the to program must be with you.
transmitter is learned, the DIC The DIC display should
will show that it is ready to 1. Insert the vehicle key of the now show READY FOR
program the next transmitter. transmitter into the key lock REMOTE # 1.
cylinder located on the outside
5. Remove the transmitter from the of the driver door and turn the
transmitter pocket and press K. key to the unlock position five
times within 10 seconds.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 3
through 5.
5. Press the ignition. When the

transmitter is learned the DIC
will show that it is ready to
program the next transmitter.
6. Remove the transmitter from the
transmitter slot and press K.
To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4
through 6.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and
4. Remove the plastic trim piece hold the ignition for 10 seconds To start the vehicle:
from the small storage area to exit programming mode. 1. Remove the plastic trim piece
next to the accessory power Replace the plastic trim piece from the small storage area next
outlet towards the front of the from the small storage area. to the accessory power outlet
console, to access the towards the front of the console,
transmitter slot. Push the Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery to access the transmitter slot.
button on the recognized
transmitter to extend the key If the transmitter battery is weak, 2. Push the button on the
blade. Insert the key blade into the DIC may display NO REMOTE recognized transmitter to extend
the transmitter slot. DETECTED when you try to start the key blade. Insert the key
the vehicle. The REPLACE blade into the transmitter slot.
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message may also be displayed at
this time.
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or Remote Vehicle Start

N (Neutral), press the brake
pedal and the ignition button. The vehicle may have this feature
See Starting the Engine on that allows you to start the engine
page 9‑20 for additional from outside the vehicle.
information about the vehicle's / (Remote Vehicle Start):
keyless ignition with pushbutton This button will be on the RKE
start. transmitter if the vehicle has remote
Replace the transmitter battery start.
as soon as possible. Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system will default to a
Battery Replacement
heating or cooling mode depending
Replace the battery if the REPLACE 2. Remove the battery cover by on the outside temperature during
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY prying it with a finger. a remote start. A vehicle without
message displays in the DIC. See automatic climate control will default
3. Remove the battery by pushing
“Replace Battery in Remote Key” to the last used heating or cooling
on the battery and sliding it
under Key and Lock Messages on mode. Once the key is turned to
toward the key blade.
page 5‑30. ON/RUN, the climate control system
4. Insert the new battery, positive will turn on at the setting the vehicle
The battery is not rechargeable. To
side facing up. Push the battery was last set to. If the vehicle has
replace the battery:
down until it is held in place. heated seats, they may come on
1. Push the button on the Replace with a CR2032 or during a remote start. See Heated
transmitter to extend the key equivalent battery. Front Seats on page 3‑6 for more
blade. information.
5. Snap the battery cover back on
to the transmitter.
Laws in some local communities When the engine starts, the parking The vehicle's ignition must be
may restrict the use of remote lamps will turn on and remain on as turned on and then back off before
starters. For example, some laws long as the engine is running. The the remote start procedure can be
require a person using remote doors will be locked and the climate used again.
start to have the vehicle in view. control system may come on.
Check local regulations for any Canceling a Remote Start
The engine will continue to run for
requirements. 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a To cancel a remote start, do one of
Other conditions can affect the 10-minute time extension. Remote the following:
performance of the transmitter. start can be extended only once. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Start the vehicle before driving. vehicle and press and hold /
System on page 2‑3 for additional until the parking lamps turn off.
information. Extending Engine Run Time
. Turn on the hazard warning
Starting the Vehicle For a 10-minute extension, repeat flashers.
Steps 1– 3 while the engine is still
To start the engine using the remote running. The remote start can be
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
start feature: extended once. Conditions in Which Remote Start
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the When the remote start is extended, Will Not Work
vehicle. the second 10 minutes will start The remote vehicle start feature will
2. Press and release Q. immediately. not operate if:
3. Immediately after completing For example, if the engine has been . The key is in the ignition (key
running for five minutes, and access) or if the key is in the
Step 2, press and hold / until
10 minutes are added, the engine vehicle (keyless access).
the turn signal lamps flash, or for will run for a total of 15 minutes.
about two seconds if the vehicle . The hood is not closed.
is not in view. A maximum of two remote starts,
or a single start with an extension,
. The hazard warning flashers
is allowed between ignition cycles. are on.

. The malfunction indicator lamp To lock or unlock a door from
is on. WARNING (Continued) outside the vehicle, use the Remote
. The engine coolant temperature Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
should wear safety belts From inside the vehicle, use the
is too high. properly and the doors power door lock switch or the
. The oil pressure is low. should be locked whenever manual lock knob. Pushing down
the vehicle is driven. the manual lock knob on the driver
. Two remote vehicle starts, or a
single remote start with an . Young children who get into door will lock all doors.
extension, have already unlocked vehicles may be The doors can also be unlocked
been used. unable to get out. A child can from the inside by pulling the door
be overcome by extreme heat handle. Pulling the door handle
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
and can suffer permanent again unlatches the door.
injuries or even death from
Door Locks heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
{ WARNING . Outsiders can easily enter
Unlocked doors can be through an unlocked door
dangerous. when slowing or stopping the
vehicle. Lock the doors to
. Passengers, especially help prevent this from
children, can easily open happening.
the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. The chance
of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash is
increased if the doors are not
locked. So, all passengers
(Continued)
Power Door Locks Automatic Door Locks

Automatic Door Lock
The doors are programmed to
automatically lock when the shift
lever is moved out of P (Park).
The automatic door lock feature
cannot be disabled.
Automatic Door Unlock
The doors will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into
P (Park). Press o { to activate the safety
locks on the rear doors. The
See Vehicle Personalization on
The power door lock switch is on indicator light comes on when
page 5‑33.
the instrument panel. activated.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. Safety Locks The rear door power windows are
also disabled.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the The rear door safety locks prevent
doors. passengers from opening the rear Press o { again to deactivate the
doors from inside the vehicle. lockout switch.
If the indicator light flashes, the
feature may not be working properly.
Doors Remote Trunk Release

WARNING (Continued)
Trunk . Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
{ WARNING brings in only outside air
and set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See “Climate
vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems” in the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Index.
any objects that pass through the . If the vehicle has a power
seal between the body and the liftgate, disable the power
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine liftgate function.
exhaust contains carbon For more information about
monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine To open the trunk from outside the
seen or smelled. It can cause Exhaust on page 9‑26.
unconsciousness and even death. vehicle, press the V button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
If the vehicle must be driven with transmitter, or by pressing the touch
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: pad above the license plate when
. Close all of the windows. the doors are unlocked.
. Fully open the air outlets on If the engine is running, the doors
or under the instrument must be unlocked. Vehicles with an
panel. automatic transmission must be in
P (Park), vehicles with a manual
(Continued)
transmission must have the park
brake applied.
Emergency Trunk Release Vehicle Security

Handle
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
Notice: Do not use the features; however, they do not make
emergency trunk release handle it impossible to steal.
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk Vehicle Alarm System
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release This vehicle has a theft alarm
handle is only intended to aid a system.
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk Arming the System
from the inside. To arm the system, use the power
There is an emergency trunk door lock switch or the RKE
release handle located inside the transmitter to lock the vehicle while
trunk on the trunk lid. The release exiting with the vehicle turned off.
handle can be accessed by folding
The alarm arms after about
the rear seatback. See Rear Seats
30 seconds after all the doors
on page 3‑7. Pull the release handle
have been closed.
to open the trunk from the inside.
Press Q again and the system arms
immediately.
The security light, located in the
center of the instrument panel, will
flash slowly.
Disarming the System Immobilizer Operation

To disarm the system press K on This vehicle has a passive
the RKE transmitter. theft-deterrent system.
Turning off the System Alarm The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
If there is an attempt to open the The security light, located in the
doors, trunk, or hood without first The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is instrument panel cluster, comes on
pressing K on the transmitter, the removed from the ignition. if there is a problem with arming or
system alarm will be activated. disarming the theft-deterrent
The exterior lamps will flash and The system is automatically system.
the horn will sound for about disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key. The When trying to start the vehicle, the
30 seconds.
key uses a transponder that security light comes on briefly when
To turn off the system alarm matches an immobilizer control unit the ignition is turned on.
press K on the RKE transmitter. in the vehicle and automatically If the engine does not start and the
disarms the system. Only an security light stays on, there is a
Immobilizer authorized key starts the vehicle. problem with the system. Turn the
The vehicle may not start if the key ignition off and try again.
See Radio Frequency Statement on is damaged.
page 13‑15 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If the engine still does not start, and Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors
the key appears to be undamaged
or the light continues to stay on, try
another ignition key. If the engine Convex Mirrors
does not start with the other key, the
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle { WARNING
does start, the first key may be
damaged. See your dealer who can A convex mirror can make things,
service the theft-deterrent system like other vehicles, look farther
and have a new key made. away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
Do not leave the key or device
that disarms or deactivates the you could hit a vehicle on the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Vehicles with a manual mirror
adjustment have controls next to
The passenger side mirror is convex each mirror.
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from Adjust the inside rearview mirror by
the driver seat. moving it up and down or side to
side. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare
from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use.
Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors Interior Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded Hold the mirror in the center to
inward to prevent damage when move it for a clearer view of behind
going through an automatic car your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward avoid glare from the headlamps
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward behind you. Push the tab at the
to return it to the original position. bottom of the mirror forward for
daytime use and pull it for
Heated Mirrors nighttime use.
The vehicle may have heated Automatic Dimming

mirrors.
Controls for the outside power Rearview Mirror
mirrors are located on the
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the outside rearview The vehicle may have an automatic
driver door. dimming inside rearview mirror.
mirrors. See “Rear Window
To adjust the mirror: Defogger” under Automatic Climate Automatic dimming reduces the
Control System on page 8‑3 for glare from the headlamps of the
1. Turn the selector switch to vehicle behind you. The dimming
L (Left) or R (Right) to choose more information.
feature and the indicator light come
the driver or passenger mirror. on each time the vehicle is started.
2. Move the control to adjust the
mirror.
3. Turn the selector switch to the
O position to deselect the mirror.
Vehicles with OnStar have three Windows

control buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about { WARNING
OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
See the OnStar Owner's Guide for Leaving children, helpless adults,
more information about the services or pets in a vehicle with the
OnStar provides. windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
Cleaning the Mirror the extreme heat and suffer
Do not spray glass cleaner directly permanent injuries or even death
on the mirror. Use a soft towel from heat stroke. Never leave a
dampened with water. child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a
hot weather.
pulsing sound when a window is
partially open. To reduce the sound,
open another window or the sunroof
(if equipped).
Power Windows Express Window Operation

This vehicle may have windows with
{ WARNING an express-up or down feature. This
feature allows the window to be
Leaving children in a vehicle with lowered or raised without holding
the keys is dangerous for many the switch. Passenger side and rear
reasons. Children or others could windows only have express-down.
be badly injured or even killed. Pull a window switch up or push
They could operate the power it down all the way, release it,
windows or other controls or even and the window goes down or up
make the vehicle move. The automatically. Stop the window by
windows will function and they pushing or pulling the switch.
could be seriously injured or killed Push the switch down to open the
window. Pull the front of the switch Obstacle Detection Feature
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a up to close it. If equipped with express-up, and an
vehicle with children. The switches work when the ignition object is in the path of the window
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, when closing, the window will stop
When there are children in the at the obstruction and auto-reverse
or in Retained Accessory Power
rear seat use the window lockout to a preset factory position. Weather
(RAP). See Retained Accessory
button to prevent unintentional conditions such as severe cold and/
Power (RAP) on page 9‑23.
operation of the windows. or ice may also cause the window
to auto-reverse. The window will
return to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.
If conditions prevent the window To program each front window, Window Lockout
from closing and the window follow these steps:
continues to auto-reverse, it is 1. With the ignition in ACC/
possible to close the window with ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
the ignition in ON/RUN by holding or when Retained Accessory
the window switch in the partially or Power (RAP) is active, close all
fully pulled up position. Release of doors.
the switch from the partially pulled
up position will cause the window to 2. Press and hold the power
stop. Release of the switch from the window switch until the window
fully pulled up position will activate is fully open.
the express-up and related obstacle 3. Pull the power window switch up
detection features. until the window is fully closed.
Programming the Power 4. Continue holding the switch up
Windows for approximately two seconds This feature prevents the rear
after the window is completely passenger windows from operating,
If the battery on the vehicle has
closed. except from the driver position.
been recharged or disconnected,
or is not working, the windows will The window is now reprogrammed. Press o { to activate the rear
need to be reprogrammed for the Repeat the process for the other window lockout. The LED light (A)
express-up feature to work. Before windows. comes on when activated.
reprogramming, replace or recharge
the vehicle's battery. The rear door locks are also
disabled.
Press o { again to deactivate the
lockout.
If the LED light flashes, the feature
may not be working properly.
Overload Feature Roof To open or close the sunroof, press

the open or close sunroof switch (A)
If the windows are operated
to the first detent position.
repeatedly in short intervals, the Sunroof
window operation is disabled for a To express open or close the
short time. sunroof with the safety function
enabled, press the open or close
Sun Visors sunroof switch (A) to the second
detent position and release. To stop
the movement, press the switch
again.
To automatically tilt or close the
sunroof, press the tilt open or close
sunroof switch (B).
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
On vehicles with a sunroof, the object and stop the sunroof.
Pull the sun visor down to block switches are on the overhead
glare. Detach the sun visor from the The sunroof glass panel cannot be
console. opened or closed if the vehicle has
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod, The sunroof only operates when an electrical failure.
if available. the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑23 for more information.
Periodically open the sunroof and Safety Function

remove any obstacles or loose If the sunroof has any resistance
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and during automatic closing, it will
roof sealing area using a clean immediately stop and reverse.
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof. To override the safety function,
press and hold the close sunroof
Sunshade switch. The sunroof closes without
The sunshade is manually operated. the safety function. To stop the
Dirt and debris may collect on the Close or open the sunshade by movement, release the switch.
sunroof seal or in the track. This sliding. When the sunroof is
could cause an issue with sunroof opened, the sunshade is
operation, noise, or plugging within always open.
the water drainage system.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-36
Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-38
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-20 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Securing Child Restraints
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats What Will You See after an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-49
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Passenger Sensing
Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
How to Wear Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Adding Equipment to the
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-30
Safety Belt Use During Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-31
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints in
the outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of
the seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head Front Seats

restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Seat Adjustment
If you are installing a child restraint
in the rear seat, see “Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the { WARNING
LATCH System” under Lower You can lose control of the
Anchors and Tethers for Children vehicle if you try to adjust a
(LATCH System) on page 3‑39.
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
To adjust a manual seat:
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Pull the handle at the front of
the vehicle is not moving. the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
Seat Height Adjuster Seat Cushion Tilt Feature Power Seat Adjustment
Six-Way Manual Seat Shown,

If available, move the lever up or Four-Way Similar To adjust the power driver seat,
down to manually raise or lower if equipped:
the seat. If available, move the lever up or
down to raise or lower the front of . Move the seat forward or
the seat cushion. rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
To adjust the seatback, see

Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5 for { WARNING
more information.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
Reclining Seatbacks stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
{ WARNING Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
You can lose control of the
locked.
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and To recline the seatback:
confuse you, or make you push a
1. Lift the lever.
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when If necessary, move the safety
the vehicle is not moving. belt out of the way to access the
lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback in
place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright Heated Front Seats

position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
{ WARNING
seatback, and the seatback If you cannot feel temperature
returns to the upright position. change or pain to the skin, the
2. Push and pull on the seatback to seat heater may cause burns
make sure it is locked. even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
{ WARNING care when using the seat heater,
Sitting in a reclined position when especially for long periods of
the vehicle is in motion can be Do not have a seatback reclined if time. Do not place anything on
the vehicle is moving. the seat that insulates against
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
their job when reclined like this. cover, or similar item. This
may cause the seat heater to
The safety belt cannot properly overheat. An overheated seat
restrain you, and you could be heater may cause a burn or may
injured or killed. damage the seat.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
The passenger seat may take Rear Seats

longer to heat up.
Either side of the rear seatback can
Remote Start Heated Seats be folded.
When it is cold outside, the To fold the rear seatbacks:
heated seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote 1. Place the front seatbacks in the
vehicle start. The heated seats will upright position. See Reclining
be canceled when the ignition is Seatbacks on page 3‑5.
turned on. Press the control to use Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the heated seats after the vehicle is the safety belts still fastened may
started. cause damage to the seat or the
On vehicles with heated front seats, The heated seat indicator lights on safety belts. Always unbuckle the
the controls are on the center the control do not turn on during a safety belts and return them to
console. The engine must be remote start. their normal stowed position
running to operate the heated seats. before folding a rear seat.
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced. 2. Unbuckle the rear safety belts
Press L or M to heat the driver and make sure the safety belt
This is normal.
or passenger seat cushion and buckles are stowed in the
seatback. The heated seats will not turn pockets in the seat cushion.
on during a remote start unless
Press the control once for the
the heated seat feature is enabled
highest setting. With each press of
in the vehicle personalization
the control, the heated seat will
menu. See Remote Vehicle
change to the next lower setting,
Start on page 2‑9 and Vehicle
and then the off setting. Three lights
Personalization on page 5‑33 for
indicate the highest setting and one
more information.
light the lowest.
To raise the seatback:
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are
3. Make sure the safety belt is in A tab near the seatback lever properly routed and attached, and
the guide on top of the seatback. raises when the seatback is are not twisted.
4. Reach under the safety belt and unlocked.
pull the lever to unlock the 5. Fold the seatback forward. 1. Make sure the safety belt is in
seatback. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the the guide on the top of the
other seatback, if desired. seatback.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it
rearward until it clicks into place.
Keep the safety belts clear of the
seatback and untwisted.
A tab near the seatback lever
retracts when the seatback is
locked in place.
The center rear safety belt Safety Belts

may lock when you raise the WARNING (Continued)
seatback. If this happens, let the This section of the manual
belt go back all the way and describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
start again. properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
If the seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden Do not let anyone ride where passengers to ride in any area of
stop or crash. That could cause a safety belt cannot be worn the vehicle that is not equipped
injury to the person sitting there. properly. In a crash, if you or your with seats and safety belts.
Always pull forward on the top of passenger(s) are not wearing Always wear a safety belt, and
the seatback at the area of the safety belts, injuries can be much check that all passenger(s) are
latch to be sure it is locked. worse than if you are wearing restrained properly too.
safety belts. You can be seriously
injured or killed by hitting things
3. Push and pull on the seatback This vehicle has indicators as a
inside the vehicle harder or by
to make sure it is locked into reminder to buckle the safety belts.
position. being ejected from the vehicle.
In addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the page 5‑10 for additional information.
buckled up can strike other
other seatback, if necessary. passengers in the vehicle.
Keep the seat in the upright locked (Continued)
position when not in use.
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be— whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will
can unbuckle and get out, is be riding in the vehicle, see Older
When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3‑32 or Infants
as fast as the vehicle does. If the and Young Children on page 3‑34.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. protection.
belts?
It could be the windshield, the It is very important for all occupants
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with unbelted people are hurt more often
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts— not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag wearing safety belts.
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
There are important things to know would apply force on your Lap-Shoulder Belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest. The following instructions explain
These parts of the body are how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
best able to take belt restraining properly.
forces. The shoulder belt locks if 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
there is a sudden stop or crash. adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
{ WARNING in the Index.
You can be seriously injured,

or even killed, by not wearing
your safety belt properly.
. Sit up straight and always keep
. Never allow the lap or
your feet on the floor in front
of you. shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.
. Always use the correct buckle
for your seating position.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash,
. Never route the lap or
this applies force to the strong shoulder belt over an
pelvic bones and you would be armrest. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
less likely to slide under the lap the belt across you. Do not let it
belt. If you slid under it, the belt get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if If equipped with a shoulder belt

you pull the belt across you very height adjuster, move it to the
quickly. If this happens, let the height that is right for you. See
belt go back slightly to unlock it. “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
Then pull the belt across you later in this section for
more slowly. instructions on use and
If the shoulder portion of a important safety information.
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑16.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt 4. To make the lap part tight, pull
could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt.
necessary.
Adjust the guide so the shoulder desired position, try to move it down
portion of the belt is on the shoulder without pushing the release button
and not falling off of it. The belt to make sure it has locked into
should be close to, but not position.
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment Safety Belt Pretensioners
could reduce the effectiveness of This vehicle has safety belt
the safety belt in a crash. See How pretensioners for front outboard
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on occupants. Although the safety belt
page 3‑10. pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
To unlatch the belt, push the button
moderate to severe frontal and
on the buckle. The belt should
near frontal crash if the threshold
return to its stowed position.
conditions for pretensioner
Before a door is closed, be sure the activation are met.
safety belt is out of the way. If a
Pretensioners work only once. If the
door is slammed against a safety
pretensioners activate in a crash,
belt, damage can occur to both the
the pretensioners and probably
safety belt and the vehicle.
other parts of the vehicle's safety
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster belt system will need to replaced.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
The vehicle has a shoulder belt Parts after a Crash on page 3‑17.
Press the release button and move
height adjuster for the driver and
the height adjuster to the desired
right front passenger seating
position. The adjuster can be moved
positions.
up by pushing the slide/trim up.
After the adjuster is set to the
Rear Safety Belt Comfort There is one guide, if equipped, for

Guides each outboard passenger position in
the rear seat. To install a comfort
This vehicle may have rear safety guide to the safety belt:
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through the dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Remove the guide from its

storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release
twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
5. To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt
can be removed from the guide.
Store the guide in its storage
pocket on the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors,
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety and anchorages are all working
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them properly. Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in
around you, you should use it. a crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑10 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑17.
seat it is made to fit. The extender
A pregnant woman should wear has been designed for adults. Never
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding, belt. For more information, see the
throughout the pregnancy. instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety replaced.
a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑11.
possible.

. A roof-rail airbag for the front the risk of injury from the force of an
Airbag System outboard passenger and the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
The vehicle has the following passenger seated directly very quickly to do their job.
airbags: behind the front outboard
passenger. Here are the most important things
. A frontal airbag for the driver. to know about the airbag system:
All vehicle airbags have the word
. A frontal airbag for the front AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
outboard passenger. near the deployment opening. { WARNING
. A knee airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word You can be severely injured or
. A knee airbag for the front AIRBAG is on the center of the killed in a crash if you are not
outboard passenger. steering wheel for the driver and on wearing your safety belt, even
the instrument panel for the front with airbags. Airbags are
. A seat-mounted side impact
outboard passenger. designed to work with safety
airbag for the driver.
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG belts, not replace them. Also,
. A seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate
is on the lower part of the
airbag for the front outboard in every crash. In some crashes
instrument panel.
passenger. safety belts are the only restraint.
For seat-mounted side impact
. Seat-mounted side impact See When Should an Airbag
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on
airbags for the second row Inflate? on page 3‑21.
the side of the seatback closest to
outboard passengers.
the door. Wearing your safety belt during a
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver crash helps reduce the chance of
For roof-rail airbags, the word
and the passenger seated hitting things inside the vehicle or
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
directly behind the driver. being ejected from it. Airbags are
Airbags are designed to supplement “supplemental restraints” to the
the protection provided by safety safety belts. Everyone in the
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce (Continued)
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

vehicle should wear a safety belt Occupants should not lean on or vehicle. To read how, see Older
properly, whether or not there is sleep against the door or side Children on page 3‑32 or Infants
an airbag for that person. windows in seating positions with and Young Children on
seat-mounted side impact airbags page 3‑34.
and/or roof-rail airbags.
{ WARNING
Because airbags inflate with
great force and faster than the
{ WARNING
blink of an eye, anyone who is Children who are up against,
up against, or very close to any or very close to, any airbag
airbag when it inflates can be when it inflates can be seriously
seriously injured or killed. Do not injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light
sit unnecessarily close to any lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
airbag, as you would be if sitting for adults and older children, but
system checks the airbag electrical
on the edge of the seat or leaning not for young children and infants.
system for malfunctions. The light
forward. Safety belts help keep Neither the vehicle's safety belt tells you if there is an electrical
you in position before and during system nor its airbag system is problem. See Airbag Readiness
a crash. Always wear a safety designed for them. Young Light on page 5‑11 for more
belt, even with airbags. The driver children and infants need the information.
should sit as far back as possible protection that a child restraint
while still maintaining control of system can provide. Always
the vehicle. secure children properly in the
(Continued) (Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver knee airbag is below the Driver Side Shown, Passenger
steering column. The front outboard Side Similar
passenger knee airbag is below the
The driver frontal airbag is in the glove box. The seat-mounted side impact
center of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and front
outboard passenger are in the side
The front outboard passenger
of the seatbacks closest to the door.
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel. The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
or even death. The path of an Frontal airbags are designed to
inflating airbag must be kept inflate in moderate to severe frontal
clear. Do not put anything or near frontal crashes to help
between an occupant and an reduce the potential for severe
airbag, and do not attach or put injuries, mainly to the driver's or
anything on the steering wheel front outboard passenger's head
hub or on or near any other and chest. However, they are
airbag covering. only designed to inflate if the
Do not use seat accessories impact exceeds a predetermined
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, that block the inflation path of a deployment threshold. Deployment
Passenger Side Similar thresholds are used to predict how
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
severe a crash is likely to be in time
On vehicles with second row Never secure anything to the roof for the airbags to inflate and help
seat‐mounted side impact airbags, of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags restrain the occupants.
they are in the sides of the rear by routing a rope or tie‐down
seatback closest to the door. Whether the frontal airbags will or
through any door or window should inflate is not based primarily
opening. If you do, the path of an on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
{ WARNING inflating roof-rail airbag will be It depends on what is hit, the
blocked. direction of the impact, and how
If something is between an
quickly the vehicle slows down.
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
Frontal airbags may inflate at severe frontal impact. For moderate if the sensing system predicts that
different crash speeds depending on frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags the vehicle is about to roll over on
whether the vehicle hits an object inflate at a level less than full its side, or in a severe frontal
straight on or at an angle, and deployment. For more severe frontal impact.
whether the object is fixed or impacts, full deployment occurs. In any particular crash, no one can
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow The vehicle has seat-mounted side say whether an airbag should have
or wide. impact airbags and roof-rail airbags. inflated simply because of the
Thresholds can also vary with See Airbag System on page 3‑18. vehicle damage or repair costs.
specific vehicle design. Seat-mounted side impact and
Frontal airbags are not intended to roof-rail airbags are intended to What Makes an Airbag
inflate in moderate to severe side
inflate during vehicle rollovers, in
crashes depending on the location
Inflate?
rear impacts, or in many side
of the impact. In addition, these In a deployment event, the sensing
impacts.
roof‐rail airbags are intended to system sends an electrical signal
In addition, the vehicle has inflate during a rollover or in a triggering a release of gas from the
dual-stage frontal airbags. severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
Dual-stage airbags adjust the side impact and roof-rail airbags will airbag causing the bag to break out
restraint according to crash severity. inflate if the crash severity is above of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
Frontal knee airbags are designed the system's designed threshold and related hardware are all part of
to inflate in moderate to severe level. The threshold level can vary the airbag module.
frontal or near frontal impacts that with specific vehicle design. For airbag location, see Where Are
exceed a predetermined Roof‐rail airbags are not intended the Airbags? on page 3‑20.
deployment threshold. to inflate in rear impacts.
The vehicle has electronic frontal A seat-mounted side impact airbag
sensors, which help the sensing is intended to inflate on the side
system distinguish between a of the vehicle that is struck. Both
moderate frontal impact and a more roof‐rail airbags will inflate when
either side of the vehicle is struck or
How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof‐rail airbags What Will You See after
are designed to help contain the
Restrain? head and chest of occupants in the
an Airbag Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or outboard seating positions in the After the frontal airbags and
near frontal collisions, even belted first and second rows. The rollover seat-mounted side impact airbags
occupants can contact the steering capable roof‐rail airbags are inflate, they quickly deflate, so
wheel or the instrument panel. In designed to help reduce the risk of quickly that some people may not
moderate to severe side collisions, full or partial ejection in rollover even realize an airbag inflated.
even belted occupants can contact events, although no system can Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
the inside of the vehicle. prevent all such ejections. partially inflated for some time after
Airbags supplement the But airbags would not help in they inflate. Some components of
protection provided by safety many types of collisions, primarily the airbag module may be hot for
belts by distributing the force of because the occupant's motion is several minutes. For location of
the impact more evenly over the not toward those airbags. See When the airbags, see Where Are the
occupant's body. Should an Airbag Inflate? on Airbags? on page 3‑20.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming If you experience breathing A crash severe enough to inflate
from the vents in the deflated problems following an airbag the airbags may have also
airbags. Airbag inflation does not deployment, you should seek damaged important functions in
prevent the driver from seeing out of medical attention. the vehicle, such as the fuel
the windshield or being able to steer system, brake and steering
the vehicle, nor does it prevent systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
people from leaving the vehicle. The vehicle has a feature that may appears to be drivable after a
automatically unlock the doors, turn moderate crash, there may be
on the interior lamps, turn on the
{ WARNING hazard warning flashers, and shut
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
off the fuel system after the airbags
When an airbag inflates, there the vehicle.
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
may be dust in the air. This dust off the interior lamps, and turn off Use caution if you should attempt
could cause breathing problems the hazard warning flashers by to restart the engine after a crash
for people with a history of using the controls for those has occurred.
asthma or other breathing trouble. features.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
(Continued)
In many crashes severe enough to

. The vehicle has a crash sensing
inflate the airbag, windshields are and diagnostic module which
broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a
Additional windshield breakage may crash. See Vehicle Data
also occur from the front outboard Recording and Privacy on
passenger airbag. page 13‑14 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑14.
. Airbags are designed to inflate United States
only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians
inflates, you will need some work on the airbag systems.
new parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that
If you do not get them, the an airbag system will not work
airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer for
to help protect you in another service.
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly Passenger Sensing Canada
other parts. The service manual System The words ON and OFF, or the
for the vehicle covers the need symbol for on and off, will be visible
to replace other parts. The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. If you use
sensing system for the front remote start, if equipped, to start the
outboard passenger position. The vehicle, you may not see the system
passenger airbag status indicator check. When the system check is
will light on the instrument panel complete, either the word ON or
when the vehicle is started. OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑12.
The passenger sensing system an older child riding in a booster

turns off the front outboard seat; and children, who are large WARNING (Continued)
passenger frontal airbag and knee enough, using safety belts.
airbag under certain conditions. system is fail-safe. No one can
Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will
No other airbag is affected by the the front. This is because the risk to
passenger sensing system. not inflate under some unusual
the rear-facing child is so great, circumstance, even though the
The passenger sensing system if the airbag inflates. airbag(s) are off.
works with sensors that are part of
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
the presence of a properly seated A child in a rear-facing child airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
occupant and determine if the front restraint can be seriously injured forward-facing child restraint in
outboard passenger frontal airbag or killed if the passenger frontal the front outboard passenger
and knee airbag should be allowed airbag inflates. This is because seat, always move the seat as far
to inflate or not. the back of the rear-facing child back as it will go. It is better to
According to accident statistics, restraint would be very close to secure the child restraint in a
children are safer when properly the inflating airbag. A child in a rear seat.
secured in a rear seat in the correct forward-facing child restraint can
child restraint for their weight be seriously injured or killed if the The passenger sensing system
and size. passenger frontal airbag inflates is designed to turn off the front
We recommend that children be and the passenger seat is in a outboard passenger frontal airbag
secured in a rear seat, including: forward position. and knee airbag if:
an infant or a child riding in a Even if the passenger sensing . The front outboard passenger
rear-facing child restraint; a child system has turned off the front seat is unoccupied.
riding in a forward-facing child seat; outboard passenger airbag(s), no . The system determines that an
(Continued) infant is present in a child
restraint.

. A front outboard passenger For some children, including If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
takes his/her weight off of the children in child restraints, Child Restraint
seat for a period of time. and for very small adults, the
passenger sensing system may If a child restraint has been installed
. There is a critical problem and the on indicator is lit:
with the airbag system or the or may not turn off the front
passenger sensing system. outboard passenger frontal airbag 1. Turn the vehicle off.
and knee airbag, depending
When the passenger sensing 2. Remove the child restraint from
upon the person's seating posture
system has turned off the front the vehicle.
and body build. Everyone in the
outboard passenger frontal airbag vehicle who has outgrown child 3. Remove any additional items
and knee airbag, the off indicator restraints should wear a safety belt from the seat such as blankets,
will light and stay lit as a reminder properly — whether or not there is cushions, seat covers, seat
that the airbag(s) are off. See an airbag for that person. heaters, or seat massagers.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑12. 4. Reinstall the child restraint
The passenger sensing system
{ WARNING following the directions
provided by the child restraint
is designed to turn on the front If the airbag readiness light ever manufacturer and refer to
outboard passenger frontal airbag comes on and stays on, it means Securing Child Restraints (Front
and knee airbag anytime the system that something may be wrong Passenger Seat) on page 3‑49
senses that a person of adult size is with the airbag system. To help or Securing Child Restraints
sitting properly in the front outboard avoid injury to yourself or others, (Rear Seat) on page 3‑47.
passenger seat. When the have the vehicle serviced right
passenger sensing system has away. See Airbag Readiness
allowed the airbag(s) to be enabled, Light on page 5‑11 for more
the on indicator will light and stay lit
information, including important
as a reminder that the airbag(s) are
safety information.
active.
5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an to detect that person and enable the
restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant front outboard passenger frontal
vehicle, the on indicator is airbag and knee airbag:
still lit, turn the vehicle off. 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat 2. Remove any additional material
cushion, if adjustable, to make from the seat, such as blankets,
sure that the vehicle seatback is cushions, seat covers, seat
not pushing the child restraint heaters, or seat massagers.
into the seat cushion. Also make 3. Place the seatback in the fully
sure the child restraint is not upright position.
trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust 4. Have the person sit upright in
the head restraint. See Head the seat, centered on the seat
Restraints on page 3‑2. cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
6. Restart the vehicle. If a person of adult size is sitting in 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
The passenger sensing system may the front outboard passenger seat, person remain in this position for
or may not turn off the airbag(s) for but the off indicator is lit, it could be one minute after the on indicator
a child in a child restraint depending because that person is not sitting is lit.
upon the child's seating posture and properly in the seat. Use the
body build. It is better to secure the following steps to allow the system
child restraint in a rear seat.
Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
System Operation performance of the passenger the seat immediately. If the airbag
sensing system. Here is how: readiness light is lit, do not install a
Safety belts help keep the child restraint or allow anyone to
passenger in position on the . The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger occupy the seat. See Airbag
seat during vehicle maneuvers Readiness Light on page 5‑11 for
and braking, which helps the airbag when liquid is soaked
into the seat. If this happens, the important safety information.
passenger sensing system
maintain the passenger airbag off indicator will be lit, and the
status. See “Safety Belts” and airbag readiness light on the { WARNING
“Child Restraints” in the Index for instrument panel will also be lit.
Stowing of articles under the
additional information about the . Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the
importance of proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and
A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the
such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will turn on the proper operation of the passenger
or aftermarket equipment such passenger airbag while a child
sensing system.
as seat covers, seat heaters, and restraint or child occupant is on
seat massagers can affect how the seat. If the passenger airbag
well the passenger sensing system is turned on, the on indicator will
operates. We recommend that be lit.
you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑30 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
Servicing the WARNING (Continued)

Your dealer and the service manual
have information about the location
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle of the airbag sensors, sensing and
Airbags affect how the vehicle proper service procedures, and diagnostic module, and airbag
should be serviced. There are parts make sure the person performing wiring.
of the airbag system in several work for you is qualified to do so.
In addition, the vehicle has a
places around the vehicle. Your passenger sensing system for the
dealer and the service manual have Adding Equipment to the front outboard passenger position,
information about servicing the which includes sensors that are
vehicle and the airbag system. To Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
part of the passenger seat. The
purchase a service manual, see Adding accessories that change the passenger sensing system may
Service Publications Ordering vehicle's frame, bumper system, not operate properly if the original
Information on page 13‑11. height, front end or side sheet seat trim is replaced with non-GM
metal, may keep the airbag system covers, upholstery or trim, or with
{ WARNING from working properly. The GM covers, upholstery or trim
operation of the airbag system can designed for a different vehicle.
For up to 10 seconds after the also be affected by changing or Any object, such as an aftermarket
vehicle is turned off and the moving any parts of the front seats, seat heater or a comfort enhancing
battery is disconnected, an airbag safety belts, the airbag sensing and pad or device, installed under or on
can still inflate during improper diagnostic module, steering wheel, top of the seat fabric, could also
service. You can be injured if you instrument panel, roof-rail airbag interfere with the operation of the
are close to an airbag when it modules, ceiling headliner or pillar passenger sensing system. This
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. garnish trim, front sensors, side could either prevent proper
They are probably part of the impact sensors, or airbag wiring. deployment of the passenger
airbag system. Be sure to follow airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
(Continued) sensing system from properly
turning off the passenger airbag(s). Notice: If an airbag covering is

See Passenger Sensing System on damaged, opened, or broken, the WARNING (Continued)
page 3‑25. airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag systems are working properly
If the vehicle has rollover roof‐rail after a crash, have them
airbags, see Different Size Tires coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, inspected and any necessary
and Wheels on page 10‑57 for replacements made as soon as
additional important information. have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the possible.
If you have to modify your vehicle location of the airbags, see
because you have a disability and Where Are the Airbags? on If an airbag inflates, you will need to
have questions about whether the page 3‑20. See your dealer for replace airbag system parts. See
modifications will affect the vehicle's service. your dealer for service.
airbag system, or if you have
questions about whether the airbag Replacing Airbag System If the airbag readiness light stays on
system will be affected if the vehicle after the vehicle is started or comes
is modified for any other reason, Parts after a Crash on when you are driving, the airbag
call Customer Assistance. See system may not work properly. Have
Customer Assistance Offices on { WARNING the vehicle serviced right away.
page 13‑3. See Airbag Readiness Light on
A crash can damage the page 5‑11 for more information.
Airbag System Check airbag systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
The airbag system does not need may not work properly and
regularly scheduled maintenance may not protect you and your
or replacement. Make sure the passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
airbag readiness light is working. in serious injury or even death.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
To help make sure the airbag
(Continued)

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
If the shoulder belt still does not
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑11.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer WARNING (Continued)
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint might also slide under the lap
system secured in a rear seating belt. The belt force would then be
position. applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
In a crash, children who are not injuries. The shoulder belt should
buckled up can strike other people go over the shoulder and across
who are buckled up, or can be
the chest.
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow two children to wear
safety belt with the shoulder belt
the same safety belt. The safety
behind their back. A child can be
belt cannot properly spread the
seriously injured by not wearing
impact forces. In a crash, the two
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In
children can be crushed together
a crash, the child would not be
and seriously injured. A safety
restrained by the shoulder belt.
belt must be used by only one
The child could move too far
person at a time.
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag arms. An infant should be
and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every secured in an appropriate
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride restraint.
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only
safety belts. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)
weight, height, and age but also

{ WARNING whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
Never do this. vehicle in which it will be used.
Children who are up against, For most basic types of child
or very close to, any airbag when restraints, there are many
it inflates can be seriously injured different models available. When
or killed. Never put a rear-facing purchasing a child restraint, be
child restraint in the right front sure it is designed to be used
seat. Secure a rear-facing child in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint in a rear seat. It is also restraint will have a label saying
better to secure a forward-facing that it meets federal motor
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of vehicle safety standards.
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints? The restraint manufacturer's
child restraint in the right front A: Add-on child restraints, which instructions that come with
seat, always move the front are purchased by the vehicle the restraint state the weight
passenger seat as far back as it owner, are available in four basic and height limitations for a
will go. types. Selection of a particular particular child restraint.
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
In addition, there are many Child Restraint Systems

kinds of restraints available for { WARNING
children with special needs.
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
{ WARNING safety belt may not remain low
To reduce the risk of neck and on the hip bones, as it should.
head injury during a crash, infants Instead, it may settle up around
need complete support. This is the child's abdomen. In a crash,
because an infant's neck is not the belt would apply force on a
fully developed and its head body area that is unprotected by
weighs so much compared with any bony structure. This alone
the rest of its body. In a crash, could cause serious or fatal
an infant in a rear-facing child injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
distributed across the strongest always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
part of an infant's body, the back child restraints. surface against the back of the
and shoulders. Infants should infant.
always be secured in rear-facing The harness system holds the infant
child restraints. in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of
to see out the window. injury, the child restraint must be
secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
Children can be endangered in a to locate the nearest child safety We recommend that children and
crash if the child restraint is not seat inspection station. For CPST child restraints be secured in a rear
properly secured in the vehicle. availability in Canada, check with seat, including: an infant or a child
When securing an add-on child Transport Canada or the Provincial riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
restraint, refer to the instructions Ministry of Transportation office. a child riding in a forward-facing
that come with the restraint which child seat; an older child riding in a
Securing the Child within the booster seat; and children, who are
may be on the restraint itself or in a Child Restraint
booklet, or both, and to this manual. large enough, using safety belts.
The child restraint instructions A label on the sun visor says,
are important, so if they are not { WARNING “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
available, obtain a replacement A child can be seriously injured the front.” This is because the risk to
copy from the manufacturer. the rear-facing child is so great if the
or killed in a crash if the child
Keep in mind that an unsecured airbag deploys.
is not properly secured in the
child restraint can move around in a child restraint. Secure the child
collision or sudden stop and injure properly following the instructions { WARNING
people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that child restraint.
properly secure any child restraint in A child in a rear-facing child
the vehicle— even when no child is restraint can be seriously
in it. Where to Put the injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
In some areas, Certified Child Restraint This is because the back of the
Passenger Safety Technicians According to accident statistics, rear-facing child restraint would
(CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer be very close to the inflating
and demonstrate how to correctly when properly restrained in a child
use and install child restraints. airbag. A child in a forward-facing
restraint system or infant restraint child restraint can be seriously
In the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating
Highway Traffic Safety injured or killed if the right front
position.
Administration (NHTSA) website (Continued)
When securing a child restraint in Keep in mind that an unsecured

WARNING (Continued) a rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a
instructions that came with the collision or sudden stop and injure
passenger airbag inflates and the child restraint to make sure it is people in the vehicle. Be sure to
passenger seat is in a forward compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in
position. the vehicle — even when no child is
Child restraints and booster seats
Even if the passenger sensing vary considerably in size, and some in it.
system has turned off the right may fit in certain seating positions
front passenger frontal airbag, no better than others. Always make Lower Anchors and
system is fail-safe. No one can sure the child restraint is properly Tethers for Children
guarantee that an airbag will not secured. (LATCH System)
deploy under some unusual Depending on where you place the
circumstance, even though it is The LATCH system holds a child
child restraint and the size of the restraint during driving or in a crash.
turned off. child restraint, you may not be able This system is designed to make
Secure rear-facing child restraints to access adjacent safety belt installation of a child restraint easier.
in a rear seat, even if the assemblies or LATCH anchors for The LATCH system uses anchors in
airbag is off. If you secure a additional passengers or child the vehicle and attachments on the
forward-facing child restraint in restraints. Adjacent seating child restraint that are made for use
the right front seat, always move positions should not be used if the with the LATCH system.
the front passenger seat as far child restraint prevents access to
or interferes with the routing of the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
back as it will go. It is better to child restraint is properly installed
safety belt.
secure the child restraint in a using the anchors, or use the
rear seat. Wherever a child restraint is vehicle's safety belts to secure the
installed, be sure to secure the restraint, following the instructions
See Passenger Sensing System child restraint properly.
on page 3‑25 for additional that came with that restraint, and
information. also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
in the vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A top tether (A, C) anchors the
instructions on how to use the built into the vehicle. There are top of the child restraint to the
child restraint and its attachments. two lower anchors for each vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
The following explains how to LATCH seating position that will into the vehicle. The top tether
attach a child restraint with these accommodate a child restraint with attachment (B) on the child restraint
attachments in the vehicle. lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
Not all vehicle seating positions or
forward movement and rotation of
child restraints have lower anchors the child restraint during driving or in
and attachments or top tether
a crash.
anchors and attachments.
The child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
top tether are designed for use with Anchor Locations
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have To assist in locating the lower
a top tether, and that the tether be anchors, each rear anchor position
attached. Be sure to read and follow has a label, near the crease
the instructions for the child between the seatback and the seat
restraint. cushion.
Rear Seat
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating To assist in locating the top tether
positions with two lower anchors. anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is on the cover.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer { WARNING
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint Do not attach more than one child
system secured in a rear seating restraint to a single anchor.
position. See Where to Put the Attaching more than one child
Restraint on page 3‑38 for restraint to a single anchor could
additional information. cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
Securing a Child Restraint during a crash. A child or others
Designed for the LATCH could be injured. To reduce the
System risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
The top tether anchors are under
the covers, behind the rear seat, on { WARNING child restraint per anchor.
the filler panel. Be sure to use an If a LATCH-type child restraint is
anchor on the same side of the not attached to anchors, the child
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
restraint will not be able to protect { WARNING
the child correctly. In a crash, the
placed. Children can be seriously injured
child could be seriously injured
Do not secure a child restraint in a or strangled if a shoulder belt is
or killed. Install a LATCH-type
position without a top tether anchor wrapped around their neck and
child restraint properly using the
if a national or local law requires the safety belt continues to
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
that the top tether be attached, or if tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts to secure the restraint,
the instructions that come with the belts behind the child restraint so
following the instructions that
child restraint say that the top tether children cannot reach them. Pull
came with the child restraint and
must be attached. the shoulder belt all the way out
the instructions in this manual.
(Continued)
This system is designed to make 1.2. Put the child restraint on

WARNING (Continued) installation of child restraints easier. the seat.
When using lower anchors, do not For outboard rear seating
of the retractor to set the lock, use the vehicle's safety belts.
if the vehicle has one, after the positions, if the head
Instead use the vehicle's anchors restraint interferes with
child restraint has been installed. and child restraint attachments the proper installation
to secure the restraints. Some of the child restraint, the
Notice: Do not let the LATCH restraints also use another vehicle head restraint may be
attachments rub against the anchor to secure a top tether. removed. See “Head
vehicle’s safety belts. This may 1. Attach and tighten the lower Restraint Removal and
damage these parts. If necessary, attachments to the lower Reinstallation” at the end
move buckled safety belts to anchors. If the child restraint of this section.
avoid rubbing the LATCH does not have lower
attachments. 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments or the desired attachments on the child
Do not fold the empty rear seat seating position does not have restraint to the lower
with a safety belt buckled. This lower anchors, secure the child anchors.
could damage the safety belt or restraint with the top tether and
the seat. Unbuckle and return the the safety belts. Refer to the 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
safety belt to its stowed position, child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether
before folding the seat. instructions and the instructions be attached, attach and tighten
in this manual. the top tether to the top tether
If you need to secure more than one anchor. Refer to the child
child restraint in the rear seat, see 1.1. Find the lower anchors for restraint instructions and the
Where to Put the Restraint on the desired rear outboard following steps:
page 3‑38 for additional information. seating position.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor Open the cover to expose
location. the anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten

the top tether according
to the child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
. If you are using a dual . If you are using a single

tether in a rear outboard tether in the center seating
seating position with an position, or the rear
adjustable head restraint, outboard head restraint has
raise the head restraint and been removed, route the
route the tether under the single tether over the
. If you are using a single head restraint and around seatback.
tether in a rear outboard the head restraint posts.
seating position with an
adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint and
route the tether under the
head restraint and in
between the head restraint
posts.
Head Restraint Removal and

Reinstallation
The rear outboard head restraints
can be removed if they interfere with
the proper installation of the child
restraint.
To remove the head restraint:
1. Partially fold the seatback
. If you are using a dual forward. See Rear Seats on
tether in the center seating page 3‑7 for additional
position, or the rear information.
outboard head restraint has 2. Press both buttons on the head
been removed, route the restraint posts at the same
dual tether over the time, and pull up on the head
seatback. restraint.
3. Before placing a child in the 3. Store the head restraint in the
child restraint, make sure it is trunk of the vehicle.
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. There should
be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)
of movement, for proper
installation.
4. When the child restraint is To reinstall the head restraint: 3. Try to move the head restraint to
removed, reinstall the head make sure that it is locked in
restraint before the seating place.
position is used.
Replacing LATCH System
{ WARNING Parts After a Crash
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly, { WARNING
there is a greater chance that A crash can damage the
occupants will suffer a neck/ LATCH system in the vehicle.
spinal injury in a crash. Do not A damaged LATCH system may
drive until the head restraints for not properly secure the child
all occupants are installed and restraint, resulting in serious
adjusted properly. 1. Insert the head restraint posts injury or even death in a crash.
into the holes in the top of the To help make sure the LATCH
seatback. The notches (A) on system is working properly after a
the posts must face the driver crash, see your dealer to have
side of the vehicle.
the system inspected and any
2. Push the head restraint down. necessary replacements made as
If necessary, press the height soon as possible.
adjustment release button to
further lower the head restraint. If the vehicle has the LATCH system
See Head Restraints on and it was being used during a
page 3‑2. crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be Do not secure a child seat in a If more than one child restraint
necessary even if the LATCH position without a top tether anchor needs to be installed in the rear
system was not being used at the if a national or local law requires seat, be sure to read Where to Put
time of the crash. that the top tether be anchored, or if the Restraint on page 3‑38.
the instructions that come with the 1. Put the child restraint on
Securing Child Restraints child restraint say that the top strap the seat.
must be anchored.
(Rear Seat) If the head restraint interferes
In Canada, the law requires that with the proper installation of the
When securing a child restraint in
forward-facing child restraints have child restraint, the head restraint
a rear seating position, study the
a top tether, and that the tether be may be removed. See “Head
instructions that came with the
attached. Restraint Removal and
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle. If the child restraint does not have Reinstallation” under Lower
the LATCH system, you will be Anchors and Tethers for
If the child restraint has the LATCH
using the safety belt to secure the Children (LATCH System) on
system, see Lower Anchors and
child restraint in this position. Be page 3‑39.
Tethers for Children (LATCH
sure to follow the instructions that 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
System) on page 3‑39 for how and
came with the child restraint. Secure the lap and shoulder portions of
where to install the child restraint
the child in the child restraint when the vehicle's safety belt through
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
and as the instructions say. or around the restraint. The child
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, restraint instructions will show
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for you how.
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑39 for top tether anchor
locations.
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. If the latch out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
plate will not go fully into the lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
buckle, check if the correct set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
buckle is being used. not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
Position the release button on into the retractor. When installing
the buckle so that the safety belt a forward-facing child restraint,
could be quickly unbuckled if it may be helpful to use your
necessary. knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the To remove the child restraint, Securing Child Restraints
retractor to make sure the unbuckle the vehicle safety belt
retractor is locked. If the and let it return to the stowed
(Front Passenger Seat)
retractor is not locked, repeat position. If the top tether is This vehicle has airbags. A rear
Steps 4 and 5. attached to a top tether anchor, seat is a safer place to secure a
6. If the child restraint has a top disconnect it. If the head restraint forward-facing child restraint. See
tether, follow the child restraint was removed, reinstall it before Where to Put the Restraint on
manufacturer's instructions the seating position is used. See page 3‑38.
regarding the use of the top “Head Restraint Removal and
In addition, the vehicle has a
tether. See Lower Anchors and Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors
passenger sensing system which is
Tethers for Children (LATCH and Tethers for Children (LATCH
designed to turn off the right front
System) on page 3‑39 for more System) on page 3‑39 for additional
passenger frontal airbag and
information. information on installing the head
passenger knee airbag under
restraint properly.
7. Before placing a child in the certain conditions. See Passenger
child restraint, make sure it is Sensing System on page 3‑25 and
securely held in place. To check, Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
grasp the child restraint at the on page 5‑12 for more information,
safety belt path and attempt to including important safety
move it side to side and back information.
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
the front.” This is because the risk to Tethers for Children (LATCH
the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing System) on page 3‑39 for how and
if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the right where to install the child restraint
front passenger frontal airbag, no using LATCH. If a child restraint is
system is fail-safe. No one can
{ WARNING guarantee that an airbag will not
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
A child in a rear-facing child deploy under some unusual Anchors and Tethers for Children
restraint can be seriously circumstance, even though it is (LATCH System) on page 3‑39 for
injured or killed if the right front turned off. top tether anchor locations.
passenger airbag inflates. Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not secure a child seat in a
This is because the back of the in a rear seat, even if the position without a top tether anchor
rear-facing child restraint would airbag is off. If you secure a if a national or local law requires
be very close to the inflating forward-facing child restraint in that the top tether be anchored, or if
airbag. A child in a forward-facing the right front seat, always move the instructions that come with the
child restraint can be seriously the front passenger seat as far child restraint say that the top strap
injured or killed if the right front back as it will go. It is better to must be anchored.
passenger airbag inflates and the secure the child restraint in a In Canada, the law requires that
passenger seat is in a forward rear seat. forward-facing child restraints have
position. a top tether, and that the tether be
See Passenger Sensing System
(Continued) attached.
on page 3‑25 for additional
information.
You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and passenger knee airbag, the
off indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
light and stay lit when you start buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
the vehicle. See Passenger Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
Airbag Status Indicator on the buckle, so that the safety set, the belt can be tightened but
page 5‑12. belt could be quickly unbuckled not pulled out of the retractor.
2. Put the child restraint on if necessary.
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the airbags are off, the off
retractor to make sure the indicator in the passenger airbag
retractor is locked. If the status indicator will come on and
retractor is not locked, repeat stay on when the vehicle is started.
Steps 5 and 6. If a child restraint has been installed
7. Before placing a child in the and the on indicator is lit, see
child restraint, make sure it is “If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
securely held in place. To check, Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
grasp the child restraint at the System on page 3‑25 for more
safety belt path and attempt to information.
move it side‐to‐side and To remove the child restraint,
back‐and‐forth. When the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
6. To tighten the belt, push down restraint is properly installed, let it return to the stowed position.
on the child restraint, pull the there should be no more than
shoulder portion of the belt to 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Cupholders

Compartments Cupholders are in the center
console.
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cupholders may be located in the

second row seat armrest. To
There may be a storage
access, pull the armrest down.
compartment on the instrument
panel. Pull the handle to open.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on
the lever.
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage Additional Storage

Features
Cargo Tie-Downs
Pull up on the latch (A) and slide

the center console armrest to adjust
The center console storage has a the position. Return the armrest to
storage area under the armrest. Pull the rear position to access the
up on the latch (A) to access. storage area.
There may be an auxiliary jack
outlet and a USB port located in the On the driver side in the rear
center console. compartment is a retainer to hang
light items on.
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑20.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Reduced Engine Power
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Controls Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-21
Passenger Airbag Status Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Controls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Information Displays
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Driver Information
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Service Vehicle Soon
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Brake System Warning Vehicle Messages
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages (Canada
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Base Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Messages (Canada
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Uplevel and United
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Power Steering Warning States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Indicators Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Battery Voltage and Charging
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-28
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Traction Control System Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-19 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-28
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20 Engine Cooling System
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-30 Controls 3. Pull or push the steering wheel
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-30 closer or away from you.
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-30
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Steering Wheel 4. Push the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Object Detection System Adjustment
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Do not adjust the steering wheel
Ride Control System while driving.
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-31 Steering Wheel Controls
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-31
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-33
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-33 To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever (A) down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down. For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b / g (Push to Talk): For Horn

vehicles with a Bluetooth, OnStar,
or navigation system, press to Pressa on the steering wheel pad
interact with those systems. See to sound the horn.
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑23
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) Windshield Wiper/Washer
on page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7‑28, the 3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
OnStar Owner’s Guide, or the Move the lever to 3 , then turn the
separate navigation manual for band up for more frequent wipes or
more information. down for less frequent wipes.
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to 9 (Off): Use to turn the windshield
silence the vehicle speakers only. wipers off.
Press again to turn the sound The windshield wiper lever is
on. For vehicles with OnStar or on the right side of the steering 3 (Mist): Briefly move the wiper
Bluetooth systems, press to column. With the ignition in ACC/ lever down for a single wipe or hold
reject an incoming call, or end a ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move down for several wipes.
current call. the windshield wiper lever to select Clear ice and snow from the wiper
_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Turn the wiper speed. blades before using them. If they
to select an audio source. 2: Use for fast wipes. are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
Turn _ or ^ to select the next or 1: Use for slow wipes. Damaged wiper blades should be
previous favorite radio station, CD, replaced. See Wiper Blade
or MP3 track. Replacement on page 10‑26.
+ x − (Volume): Press + to Heavy snow or ice can overload the
increase the volume. Press − to wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
decrease the volume. until the motor cools.
Wipe Parking When the windshield wiper lever is Avoid covering the GPS antenna,
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ released, additional wipes may located on the roof, for long
OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2, occur depending on how long periods of time with objects that
the windshield washer had been may interfere with the antenna's
or 3 , they will immediately stop. activated. See Washer Fluid on ability to receive a satellite signal.
If the windshield wiper lever is then page 10‑20 for information on filling The compass system is designed
moved to 9 before the driver door the windshield washer fluid to operate for a certain number of
is opened, or within 10 minutes, the reservoir. miles or degrees of turn before
needing a signal from the GPS
wipers will restart and move to the
base of the windshield. { WARNING satellites. When the compass
display shows CAL, drive the
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ In freezing weather, do not use vehicle for a short distance in an
OFF during a windshield wash, the the washer until the windshield open area where it can receive a
wipers will stop when they reach the is warmed. Otherwise the GPS signal. The compass system
base of the windshield. washer fluid can form ice on the will automatically determine when
windshield, blocking your vision. the GPS signal is restored and
Windshield Washer provide a heading again. See
Pull the windshield wiper lever Compass Messages on page 5‑28
toward you to spray windshield Compass for more information on the
washer fluid and activate the wipers. messages that may be displayed for
The vehicle may have a compass
The washer and wipers will continue the compass.
display in the Driver Information
until the lever is released or the Center (DIC). The compass receives
maximum wash time is reached. its heading and other information
from the Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
and vehicle speed information.
Clock 4. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL Power Outlets

knob to select the next number.
The infotainment system controls The accessory power outlets can be
are used to access the time and 5. To save the time and return to used to plug in electrical equipment,
date settings through the menu the Time Settings menu, press such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
system. The clock menu can be the BACK button at any time or
press the MENU or MENU/SEL There is one accessory power outlet
only be used with the radio on while located on the center floor console
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. knob after adjusting the minutes.
and one on the rear of the center
See Operation on page 7‑6 for Setting the 12/24 Hour Format floor console. These outlets are
information about how to use the powered when the key is in ON/
menu system. For vehicles with a 1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings. RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until
navigation system, see the separate the driver door is opened within
navigation manual. 2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. 10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
Setting the Time 3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL See Retained Accessory Power
knob to select the 12 hour or (RAP) on page 9‑23.
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings. 24 hour display format.
2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL
number.
Open the cover to access. When adding electrical equipment, Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Leaving electrical be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the For vehicles with a cigarette lighter,
equipment plugged in for an it is located on the instrument panel
extended period of time while the equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9‑54. below the climate control system.
vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical Notice: Hanging heavy To activate the cigarette lighter,
equipment when not in use and equipment from the power push it into the heating element and
do not plug in equipment that outlet can cause damage not let go. When the lighter is ready it
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere covered by the vehicle warranty. will pop back out.
rating. The power outlets are designed Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
Certain electrical accessories for accessory power plugs only, in while it is heating does not let
may not be compatible with the such as cell phone charge cords. the lighter back away from the
accessory power outlet and could heating element when it is hot.
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. Damage from overheating can
If a problem is experienced, see occur to the lighter or heating
your dealer. element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
For vehicles with a removable Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
ashtray, the ashtray can be placed lights work together to indicate a
into the front console cupholders. Indicators problem with the vehicle.
To open the ashtray, lift the lid of the Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
ashtray. After using, close the lid. signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
To empty the ashtray for cleaning, to cause an expensive repair or
slightly turn the upper part of the shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
ashtray counterclockwise and warning lights and gauges could
remove it. to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Notice: If papers, pins, or other Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
flammable items are put in the could be a problem with a vehicle
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other function. Some warning lights come
smoking materials could ignite on briefly when the engine is started
them and possibly damage the to indicate they are working.
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
Instrument Cluster
English Automatic Transmission Cluster Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer Trip Odometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the The trip odometer can show how far
vehicle's speed in either kilometers the vehicle has been driven since
per hour (km/h) or miles per the trip odometer was last reset.
hour (mph). The trip odometer is accessed and
reset through the Driver Information
Odometer Center (DIC). See Driver
The odometer shows how far the Information Center (DIC) on
vehicle has been driven, in either page 5‑22 for more information.
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper‐resistant
Tachometer
odometer. The digital odometer will The tachometer displays the
read 999,999 if it is turned back. engine speed in revolutions per
If the vehicle needs a new odometer minute (rpm). When the ignition is on, the fuel
installed, it must be set to the Notice: If the engine is operated gauge indicates about how much
mileage total of the old odometer. with the tachometer in the shaded fuel is left in the tank.
If that is not possible, then it must warning area, the vehicle could An arrow on the fuel gauge
be set at zero and a label must be be damaged, and the damages indicates the side of the vehicle
put on the driver door to show the would not be covered by the the fuel door is on.
old mileage reading when the new vehicle warranty. Do not operate
odometer was installed. A FUEL LEVEL LOW message may
the engine with the tachometer in
appear in the Driver Information
the shaded warning area.
Center (DIC) and a single chime
sounds. See Fuel System
Messages on page 5‑30 for more
information.
Here are four things that some Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Temperature Gauge Driver Safety Belt Reminder
. At the service station, the fuel Light
pump shuts off before the gauge There is a driver safety belt
reads full. reminder light on the instrument
. It takes a little more or less panel cluster.
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while When the vehicle is started, this
turning a corner or speeding up. This gauge shows the engine light flashes and a chime may come
coolant temperature. on to remind the driver to fasten
. The gauge takes a few seconds their safety belt. Then the light stays
to stabilize after the ignition is If the indicator needle moves to on solid until the belt is buckled.
turned on, and will go back to the hot side of the gauge toward
empty when the ignition is the H or shaded area, the engine is This cycle may continue several
turned off. too hot. times if the driver remains or
becomes unbuckled while the
If the vehicle has been operated vehicle is moving.
under normal driving conditions, pull
off the road, stop the vehicle, and If the driver safety belt is buckled,
turn off the engine as soon as neither the light nor the chime
possible. comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt

Reminder Light reminder light and chime may turn
on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
grocery bag, laptop, or other
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove The airbag readiness light comes on
the object from the seat or buckle and stays on for several seconds
the safety belt. when the vehicle is started. Then
When the vehicle is started, this the light goes out.
light flashes and a chime may come Airbag Readiness Light
on to remind front passengers to This light shows if there is an { WARNING
fasten their safety belt. Then the electrical problem. The system
light stays on solid until the belt is check includes the airbag sensor(s), If the airbag readiness light stays
buckled. passenger sensing system, the on after the vehicle is started or
pretensioners, the airbag modules, comes on while driving, it means
For more information see
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator the wiring, and the crash sensing the airbag system might not be
on page 5‑12. and diagnostic module. For more working properly. The airbags in
information on the airbag system, the vehicle might not inflate in a
This cycle continues several times see Airbag System on page 3‑18. crash, or they could even inflate
if the front passenger remains or without a crash. To help avoid
becomes unbuckled while the injury, have the vehicle serviced
vehicle is moving.
right away.
If the front passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Passenger Airbag Status for on and off, for several seconds If, after several seconds, both status
as a system check. If you use indicator lights remain on, or if there
Indicator remote start, if equipped, to start the are no lights at all, there may be
The vehicle has a passenger vehicle, you may not see the system a problem with the lights or the
sensing system. See Passenger check. Then, after several seconds, passenger sensing system. See
Sensing System on page 3‑25 for the status indicator will light either your dealer for service.
important safety information. The ON or OFF, or the on or off symbol
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
to let you know the status of the
front outboard passenger frontal
{ WARNING
airbag and knee airbag. If the airbag readiness light ever
If the word ON or the on symbol is comes on and stays on, it means
lit on the passenger airbag status that something may be wrong
indicator, it means that the front with the airbag system. To help
outboard passenger frontal airbag avoid injury to yourself or others,
and knee airbag are allowed to have the vehicle serviced right
United States inflate. away. See Airbag Readiness
If the word OFF or the off symbol is Light on page 5‑11 for more
lit on the passenger airbag status information, including important
indicator, it means that the safety information.
passenger sensing system has
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
Charging System Light If a short distance must be driven See Ignition Positions (Key Access)
with the light on, be sure to turn off on page 9‑15 or Ignition Positions
all accessories, such as the radio (Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for
and air conditioner. more information.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
The charging system light comes on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
briefly when the ignition is turned Generation) monitors the operation
on, but the engine is not running, as of the vehicle to ensure emissions
a check to show the light is working. If the malfunction indicator lamp
are at acceptable levels, to produce comes on and stays on while the
The light turns off when the engine a cleaner environment.
is started. If it does not, have the engine is running, this indicates that
vehicle serviced by your dealer. This light comes on when the there is an OBD II problem and
vehicle is placed in ON/RUN for key service is required.
If the light stays on, or comes on access or Service Only Mode for
while driving, there could be a keyless access, as a check to show
problem with the electrical charging it is working. If it does not, have
system. Have it checked by your the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
Malfunctions often are indicated by vehicle warranty. This could If the light continues to flash, when
the system before any problem is also result in a failure to pass a it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
apparent. Being aware of the light required Emission Inspection/ Find a safe place to park. Turn the
can prevent more serious damage Maintenance test. See vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,
to the vehicle. This system assists Accessories and Modifications on and restart the engine. If the light is
the dealer technician in correctly page 10‑3. still flashing, follow the previous
diagnosing any malfunction. This light comes on during a steps and see your dealer for
Notice: If the vehicle is malfunction in one of two ways: service as soon as possible.
continually driven with this light Light Flashing: A misfire condition Light On Steady: An emission
on, the emission controls might has been detected. A misfire control system malfunction has
not work as well, the vehicle fuel increases vehicle emissions and been detected on the vehicle.
economy might not be as good, could damage the emission control Diagnosis and service might be
and the engine might not run as system on the vehicle. Diagnosis required.
smoothly. This could lead to and service might be required. The following may correct an
costly repairs that might not be emissions system malfunction:
covered by the vehicle warranty. To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle: . Check that the fuel cap is fully
Notice: Modifications made installed. See Filling the Tank on
to the engine, transmission, . Reduce vehicle speed.
page 9‑45. The diagnostic
exhaust, intake, or fuel system . Avoid hard accelerations. system can determine if the
of the vehicle or the replacement fuel cap has been left off or
of the original tires with other
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
improperly installed. A loose or
than those of the same Tire . If the vehicle is towing a trailer, missing fuel cap allows fuel to
Performance Criteria (TPC) can reduce the amount of cargo evaporate into the atmosphere.
affect the vehicle's emission being hauled as soon as it is A few driving trips with the cap
controls and can cause this light possible. properly installed should turn the
to come on. Modifications to light off.
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and mode for keyless access and the
used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs malfunction indicator lamp does
the engine not to run as not come on. See your dealer for
efficiently as designed and may Some local governments may have assistance in verifying proper
cause stalling after start-up, programs to inspect the on-vehicle operation of the malfunction
stalling when the vehicle is emission control equipment. For the indicator lamp.
changed into gear, misfiring, inspection, the emission system
hesitation on acceleration, test equipment is connected . The OBD II (On-Board
or stumbling on acceleration. to the vehicle’s Data Link Diagnostics) system determines
These conditions might go away Connector (DLC). that critical emission control
once the engine is warmed up. systems have not been
completely diagnosed. The
If one or more of these conditions vehicle would be considered not
occurs, change the fuel brand used. ready for inspection. This can
It will require at least one full tank of happen if the 12-volt battery has
the proper fuel to turn the light off. recently been replaced or run
See Recommended Fuel on down. The diagnostic system is
page 9‑43. designed to evaluate critical
The DLC is under the instrument emission control systems during
If none of the above have made panel next to the steering wheel. normal driving. This can take
the light turn off, your dealer can See your dealer if assistance is several days of routine driving.
check the vehicle. The dealer has needed. If this has been done and the
the proper test equipment and vehicle still does not pass the
diagnostic tools to fix any The vehicle may not pass
inspection if: inspection for lack of OBD II
mechanical or electrical problems system readiness, your dealer
that might have developed. . The malfunction indicator lamp is can prepare the vehicle for
on while the vehicle is running. inspection.
The vehicle is in ON/RUN for
keyed access, or service only
Service Vehicle Soon Brake System Warning

Light Light
{ WARNING
The vehicle brake system consists The brake system might not be
of two hydraulic circuits. If one working properly if the brake
circuit is not working, the remaining system warning light is on.
circuit can still work to stop the Driving with the brake system
vehicle. For normal braking warning light on can lead to a
performance, both circuits need to crash. If the light is still on after
be working. the vehicle has been pulled off
For vehicles with this light, it comes the road and carefully stopped,
If the warning light comes on, there
on if a condition exists that may have the vehicle towed for
is a brake problem. Have the brake
require the vehicle to be taken in for service.
system inspected right away.
service.
See Service Vehicle Messages on If the light comes on while driving, a
page 5‑31 for more information. chime sounds. Pull off the road and
If the light comes on, take the stop. The pedal might be harder to
vehicle to your dealer for service as push or go closer to the floor.
soon as possible. It might also take longer to stop.
Metric English If the light is still on, have the
For vehicles with an uplevel cluster, vehicle towed for service. See
this light comes on in the Driver The brake indicator light should Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑81.
Information Center (DIC). come on briefly as the engine is
started. If it does not come on have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Antilock Brake System Start the engine again to reset the Up-Shift Light
system. If the light stays on after
(ABS) Warning Light driving at a speed above 20 km/h
(13 mph), see your dealer for
service. A chime may also sound
when the light comes on steady.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes. For manual transmission vehicles,
If the regular brake system warning there is an up-shift light that comes
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) light is also on, the vehicle does not
light comes on briefly when the on in the lower DIC area. It shows
have antilock brakes and there is a when to shift to the next higher gear
engine is started. problem with the regular brakes. for best fuel economy.
If the light does not come on, have it See Brake System Warning Light on
fixed so it will be ready to warn if page 5‑16. See Manual Transmission on
there is a problem. page 9‑32 for more information.
See Brake System Messages on
If the ABS light comes on and stays page 5‑28 for all brake‐related DIC
on while driving, stop as soon as messages.
possible and turn the ignition off.
Power Steering Warning Traction Off Light See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36 and StabiliTrak®
Light System on page 9‑37 for more
information.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
This light comes on briefly while

This light comes on briefly when the starting the engine. If it does not,
ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a have the vehicle serviced by your
check to show it is working. dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
If it does not come on have the turns off. This light comes on briefly while
vehicle serviced by your dealer. starting the engine. If it does not,
The traction off light comes on when
If this light stays on, or comes on have the vehicle serviced by your
the Traction Control System (TCS)
while driving, the system may not be dealer.
has been turned off by pressing
working. If this happens, see your and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak This light comes on when the
dealer for service. button. StabiliTrak system is turned off.
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF
Control System (TCS) is also off.
light come on when StabiliTrak is
turned off. If the TCS is off, the system does
not assist in controlling the vehicle.
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
systems and the warning light
turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) feature(s) is no longer functioning When the Light Is On Steady
on page 9‑36 and StabiliTrak® and whether the vehicle requires This indicates that one or more of
System on page 9‑37 for more service. the tires are significantly
information If the indicator/warning light is on underinflated.
and flashing, the TCS and/or the A Driver Information Center (DIC)
Traction Control System StabiliTrak system is actively tire pressure message may also
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light working. display. See Vehicle Messages
See StabiliTrak® System on (Canada Uplevel and United States)
page 9‑37 and Traction Control on page 5‑27 or Vehicle Messages
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for (Canada Base Level) on page 5‑27
more information. for more information. Stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the tires to
Tire Pressure Light the pressure value shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
The StabiliTrak or Traction Control See Tire Pressure on page 10‑47
System (TCS) indicator/warning for more information.
light comes on briefly when the
When the Light Flashes First and
engine is started.
Then Is On Steady
If the light does not come on, have
If the light flashes for about a
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
minute and then stays on, there
If the system is working normally, For vehicles with the Tire Pressure may be a problem with the TPMS.
the indicator light turns off. Monitor System (TPMS), this light If the problem is not corrected, the
If the light is on and not flashing, the comes on briefly when the engine light will come on at every ignition
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak is started. It provides information cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor
system have been disabled. A DIC about tire pressures and the TPMS. Operation on page 10‑50 for more
message may display. Check the information.
DIC messages to determine which
Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it The low fuel warning light comes
means that oil is not flowing through on and a chime sounds when the
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil the engine properly. The vehicle vehicle is low on fuel. The light
maintenance can damage the could be low on oil and might have turns off when fuel is added to the
engine. Driving with the engine some other system problem. See fuel tank.
oil low can also damage the your dealer.
engine. The repairs would not be For vehicles with a Driver
covered by the vehicle warranty. Information Center (DIC), see
Check the oil level as soon as
Low Fuel Warning Light Driver Information Center (DIC) on
possible. Add oil if required, page 5‑22 for more information.
but if the oil level is within the
operating range and the oil Security Light
pressure is still low, have the
vehicle serviced. Always follow
the maintenance schedule for
changing engine oil.
The immobilizer light should come

on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on, have the
This light comes on for a few vehicle serviced by your dealer.
seconds when the ignition is turned If the system is working normally,
The oil pressure light should come
on as a check to indicate it is the indicator light turns off.
on briefly as the engine is started.
working. If it does not come on,
If it does not come on, have the
have it fixed.
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light stays on and the engine Wait for 10 seconds and restart Front Fog Lamp Light
does not start, there could be a the vehicle. This might correct the
problem with the theft-deterrent condition.
system. See Immobilizer Operation The vehicle can be driven at a
on page 2‑15 for more information. reduced speed when the reduced
engine power light is on but
Reduced Engine Power acceleration and speed might be
Light reduced. The performance could be
reduced until the next time the For vehicles with front fog lamps,
vehicle is driven. If this light stays this light comes on when the front
on, see your dealer as soon as fog lamps are in use.
possible for diagnosis and repair.
The light goes out when the front
fog lamps are turned off. See Front
High-Beam On Light Fog Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
information.
The reduced engine power light
should come on briefly as the Lamps On Reminder
engine is started. If it does not come
on have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
This light, along with the service
engine soon light, displays when a The high‐beam on light comes on
noticeable reduction in the vehicle's when the high-beam headlamps are
performance occurs. Stop the in use.
vehicle and turn off the ignition. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam The lamps on reminder light comes
Changer on page 6‑2 for more on when the lights are in use.
information.
Cruise Control Light Door Ajar Light Information Displays

Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The vehicle may have a Driver
Information Center (DIC). The DIC
displays information about your
The cruise control light is white For vehicles equipped with this light, vehicle. It also displays warning
whenever the cruise control is set, it comes on when a door is open or messages if a system problem is
and turns green when the cruise not securely latched. Before driving, detected. See Vehicle Messages
control is active. check that all doors are properly (Canada Uplevel and United States)
closed. See Door Ajar Messages on on page 5‑27 or Vehicle Messages
The light turns off when the cruise (Canada Base Level) on page 5‑27
control is turned off. See Cruise page 5‑28 for more information.
for more information. All messages
Control on page 9‑39 for more For vehicles with an uplevel cluster, appear in the DIC display located in
information. this light comes on in the Driver the center of the instrument panel
Information Center (DIC). cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by using
the DIC buttons on the turn signal
lever located on the left side of the
steering wheel. The DIC displays
trip, fuel, and warning messages if a
system problem is detected.
DIC Buttons The following is a list of all possible The Average Fuel Economy display
menu items: shows the approximate average
. Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average Fuel liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
Economy, Average Vehicle or miles per gallon (mpg). This
Speed number is based on the number
of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since
. Speed, Fuel Range, Average the last time this menu item was
Fuel Economy reset. This display is shown
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear . Instantaneous Fuel Economy as . c L/100 km (mpg). Reset the
the menu item displayed. . Best Average Fuel Economy average consumption by pressing
SET/CLR when it is displayed.
B. w x (Thumbwheel): Use to . Fuel Used
scroll through the menus. This screen also displays the
. Timer average vehicle speed of the
C. MENU: Press to display the vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)
. Digital Speed
Trip/Fuel menu and the Vehicle or miles per hour (mph). This
Information menu. This button . Navigation average is based on the various
is also used to return to or exit vehicle speeds recorded since
Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average Fuel
the last screen displayed on the last reset. This display is
Economy, Average Vehicle Speed
the DIC. shown as c km/h (mph). Reset
This displays the current distance
Trip/Fuel Menu Items traveled, in either kilometers (km) or the average speed by pressing
miles (mi), from the last reset for the SET/CLR when it is displayed.
Press MENU on the turn signal
lever until Trip/Fuel Information trip odometer. The trip odometer can
menu displays. Use w x to scroll be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the SET/CLR button while
through the menu items. Not all
the trip odometer display is
items are available on every vehicle.
showing.
Speed, Fuel Range, Average Fuel reflects only the fuel economy that fuel economy. Quickly press the
Economy the vehicle has right now and SET/CLR button to display a page
The top of this display includes changes frequently as driving for selecting one of the distance
a digital speedometer. The conditions change. This display options. Move the up/down arrow to
speedometer shows how fast is shown as . L/100 km (mpg). choose the selection, and SET/CLR
the vehicle is moving in either This display cannot be reset. to change the setting.
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles Instantaneous Fuel Economy When viewing best AFE, a several
per hour (mph). The speedometer second press and hold of SET/CLR
cannot be reset. The instantaneous fuel economy will reset the best value. The best
display shows the current fuel value will show “- - -“ until the
In the center of the page is the economy in liters per 100 kilometers
fuel range display. This shows the selected distance has been
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon traveled.
approximate distance the vehicle (mpg). This number reflects only the
can be driven without refueling. fuel economy that the vehicle has The display provides feedback on
The fuel range estimate is based right now and changes frequently as how current driving behavior in the
on an average of the vehicle's fuel driving conditions change. Unlike bar graph affects the running
economy over recent driving history average economy, this display average in the left display and how
and the amount of fuel remaining in cannot be reset. well recent driving compares to the
the fuel tank. This display is shown best that has been achieved.
as l . km (mi). Fuel range cannot Best Average Fuel Economy
Fuel Used
be reset. The right hand side displays the
best average fuel economy (AFE) This display shows the approximate
Also included on this page is liters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel that
an instantaneous fuel economy that is achieved for a selected
distance. The left hand side displays have been used since last reset.
display. The instantaneous fuel The fuel used can be reset by
economy display shows the a running average of fuel economy
for the most recently traveled pressing the SET/CLR button while
current fuel economy in liters per the Fuel Used display is showing.
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles selected distance. The center bar
per gallon (mpg). This number graph displays the instantaneous
Timer Navigation Units

This display can be used as a timer. This display is used for the OnStar Move w x to change between
To start the timer, press SET/CLR or navigation system Turn-by-Turn Metric or US when the Unit display
while Timer is displayed. The guidance. See the OnStar Owner's is active. Press SET/CLR to confirm
display will show the amount of time Guide or the navigation manual, the setting. On some models, you
that has passed since the timer was if the vehicle has navigation, for will have to select 1, 2, or 3 for the
last reset, not including time the more information. Unit display. 1 is Imperial units, 2 is
ignition is off. Time will continue to US units, and 3 is metric units. This
be counted as long as the ignition is Vehicle Information Menu
Items will change the displays on the
on, even if another display is being cluster and DIC to the type of
shown on the DIC. The timer will Press MENU on the turn signal measurements you select.
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes, lever until Vehicle Information menu
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after Tire Pressure
is displayed. Use w x to scroll
which the display will return to zero. The display may show a vehicle
through the menu items. Not all
To stop the timer, press SET/CLR with the approximate pressures of
items are available on every vehicle.
briefly while Timer is displayed. To all four tires. Tire pressure is
The following is a list of all possible
reset the timer to zero, press and displayed in either kilopascal (kPa)
menu items:
hold SET/CLR. or in pounds per square inch (psi).
. Units On some models, this display only
Digital Speed
. Tire Pressure allows for matching of the TPMS
The speedometer shows how fast sensors. In this case, the display
the vehicle is moving in either . Remaining Oil Life
will show TIRE LEARN. See Tire
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles . Battery Voltage Pressure Monitor System on
per hour (mph). The speedometer page 10‑48 and Tire Pressure
cannot be reset.
. Blank Display
Monitor Operation on page 10‑50 for
more information.
Remaining Oil Life oil life, additional maintenance is Battery Voltage

This display shows an estimate of recommended in the Maintenance This display, available on some
the oil's remaining useful life. Schedule in this manual. See vehicles, shows the current battery
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is Maintenance Schedule on voltage. If the voltage is in the
displayed, that means 99% of the page 11‑3 for more information. normal range, the value will display.
current oil life remains. This display Remember, the Oil Life display For example, the display may read
may be shown as : %. must be reset after each oil change. Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts. The
It will not reset itself. Also, be vehicle's charging system regulates
When the remaining oil life is low, careful not to reset the Oil Life voltage based on the state of the
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON display accidentally at any time battery. The battery voltage can
message, or Code 82, will appear other than when the oil has just fluctuate while viewing this
on the display. See Engine Oil been changed. It cannot be reset information on the DIC. This is
Messages on page 5‑29 and accurately until the next oil change. normal. See Charging System Light
“Vehicle Messages (Canadian To reset the engine oil life system on page 5‑13 for more information.
Base Level)” following. The oil press the SET/CLR button while the If there is a problem with the battery
should be changed as soon as Oil Life display is active. See charging system, the DIC will
possible. See Engine Oil on Engine Oil Life System on display a message. See Battery
page 10‑9. In addition to the page 10‑11. Voltage and Charging Messages on
engine oil life system monitoring the page 5‑27.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Messages 28: Right rear turn indicator failure cleared from the DIC display.
35: Replace battery in radio remote All messages should be taken
seriously. Clearing messages will
Vehicle Messages control
not correct the problem.
(Canada Base Level) 53: Tighten gas cap
On the Canadian uplevel cluster
DIC messages display when the 65: Theft attempted and on vehicles sold in the United
status of the vehicle has changed 68: Service power steering States, vehicle messages are
and action may be needed to displayed as text. The messages
correct the condition. Multiple 75: Service air conditioner and information about them follow.
messages appear one after another. 82: Change engine oil soon
Press any of the DIC buttons on the 84: Engine power is reduced Battery Voltage and
turn signal lever to acknowledge
95: Service airbag
Charging Messages
and clear them from the display.
More urgent messages cannot be BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
cleared from the DIC display. Vehicle Messages This message displays when
All messages should be taken (Canada Uplevel and the vehicle has detected that the
seriously. Clearing messages will United States) battery voltage is dropping beyond
not correct the problem. a reasonable point. The battery
DIC messages display when the saver system starts reducing certain
On the Canadian base level cluster, status of the vehicle has changed
vehicle messages appear as code features of the vehicle that you may
and action may be needed to be able to notice. At the point that
numbers. correct the condition. Multiple features are disabled, this message
4: Air Conditioner off due to high messages appear one after another. is displayed. It means that the
engine temperature Press any of the DIC buttons on the vehicle is trying to save the charge
25: Left front turn indicator failure turn signal lever to acknowledge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
and clear them from the display. accessories to allow the battery to
26: Left rear turn indicator failure
More urgent messages cannot be recharge.
27: Right front turn indicator failure
LOW BATTERY Compass Messages Door Ajar Messages

This message is displayed when the CAL DOOR(S) OPEN
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 10‑24 for more information. This message is displayed when the A vehicle symbol will be displayed
compass needs to be calibrated. on the DIC showing which door is
SERVICE BATTERY See Compass on page 5‑4. open along with this message.
CHARGING SYSTEM Close the door completely.
––
This message is displayed when HOOD OPEN
there is a fault in the battery Two dashes will be displayed if the
charging system. Take the vehicle compass needs service. See your This message will display when
to your dealer for service. dealer for service. the hood is open. Close the hood
completely.
Brake System Messages Cruise Control Messages TRUNK OPEN
BRAKE FLUID LOW APPLY BRAKE BEFORE This message will display when
CRUISE the trunk is open. Close the trunk
This message is displayed when the
brake fluid level is low. See Brake If this message displays when completely.
Fluid on page 10‑22. attempting to activate cruise control,
apply the brake pedal and try again.
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message is displayed as a
reminder that the parking brake is This message displays when the
on. Release it before you attempt to cruise control is set and shows the
drive. speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑39 for more
information.
Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED— IDLE Engine Oil Messages

Messages ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH engine coolant temperature is too This message displays when the
ENGINE TEMP hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to engine oil needs to be changed.
This message displays when idle until it cools down. When you change the engine oil, be
the engine coolant becomes sure to reset the Oil Life System.
ENGINE See Engine Oil Life System on
hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added strain OVERHEATED— STOP page 10‑11 and Driver Information
on a hot engine, the air conditioning ENGINE Center (DIC) on page 5‑22 for
compressor automatically turns off. information on how to reset the
This message displays and a
When the coolant temperature system. See Engine Oil on
continuous chime sounds if the
returns to normal, the air page 10‑9 and Maintenance
engine cooling system reaches
conditioning compressor turns back Schedule on page 11‑3 for more
unsafe temperatures for operation.
on. You can continue to drive the information.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
vehicle. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid OIL PRESSURE LOW— STOP
If this message continues to appear, severe damage. This message ENGINE
have the system repaired by your clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature. This message displays if low oil
dealer as soon as possible to avoid pressure levels occur. Stop the
damage to the engine. HIGH COOLANT vehicle as soon as safely possible
TEMPERATURE and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
This message displays if the coolant
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
temperature is hot. See Engine
possible and have the vehicle
Overheating on page 10‑18.
serviced by your dealer.
Engine Power Messages TIGHTEN GAS CAP Lamp Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays when the AUTOMATIC LIGHT
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
This message displays when the fuel cap.
CONTROL ON
vehicle's engine power is reduced. This message is displayed when
Reduced engine power can affect Key and Lock Messages the automatic light control has been
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. turned on. See Automatic Headlamp
If this message is on, but there NO REMOTE DETECTED System on page 6‑4.
is no reduction in performance, This message displays when the
proceed to your destination. The AUTOMATIC LIGHT
transmitter battery is weak on CONTROL OFF
performance may be reduced the vehicles with keyless access. See
next time the vehicle is driven. The “Starting the Vehicle with a Low This message is displayed when the
vehicle may be driven at a reduced Transmitter Battery” under Remote automatic light control has been
speed while this message is on, but Keyless Entry (RKE) System turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
maximum acceleration and speed Operation on page 2‑4 for more System on page 6‑4.
may be reduced. Anytime this information.
message stays on, the vehicle XXX TURN INDICATOR
should be taken to your dealer for REPLACE BATTERY IN FAILURE
service as soon as possible. REMOTE KEY When one of the turn signals
This message displays when the is out, this message displays to
Fuel System Messages battery in the Remote Keyless Entry show which bulb needs to be
FUEL LEVEL LOW (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced. See Bulb Replacement on
replaced. page 10‑28 and Replacement Bulbs
This message displays when the on page 10‑33 for more information
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as on turn signal bulb replacement.
soon as possible.
TURN SIGNAL ON Ride Control System Security Messages

This message is displayed if the Messages THEFT ATTEMPTED
turn signal has been left on. Turn off
the turn signal. SERVICE TRACTION This message displays if the vehicle
CONTROL detects a tamper condition.
Object Detection System This message displays when
Messages there is a problem with the Service Vehicle Messages
Traction Control System (TCS). SERVICE AC SYSTEM
PARK ASSIST OFF See Traction Control System (TCS)
This message displays when the on page 9‑36. This message displays if there is a
park assist system has been turned problem with the air conditioning
SERVICE STABILITRAK system. Take the vehicle to your
off or when there is a temporary
condition causing the system to be This message displays if there dealer for service.
disabled. See Ultrasonic Parking is a problem with the StabiliTrak SERVICE POWER STEERING
Assist on page 9‑41. system. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑37. This message displays if there is a
SERVICE PARK ASSIST problem with the power steering
This message displays if there is a Airbag System Messages system. Take the vehicle to your
problem with the Ultrasonic Rear dealer for service.
Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do
SERVICE AIRBAG
SERVICE STEERING
not use this system to help you This message displays if there is a COLUMN LOCK
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist problem with the airbag system.
on page 9‑41 for more information. Take the vehicle to your dealer for This message displays if there is a
See your dealer for service. service. problem with the steering column
lock. Take the vehicle to your dealer
for service.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON Tire Messages The low tire pressure warning
light will also come on. See Tire
This message displays if there is a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR Pressure Light on page 5‑19.
problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
SYSTEM If a tire pressure message appears
This message displays if there is a on the DIC, stop as soon as you
Starting the Vehicle problem with the Tire Pressure can. Inflate the tires by adding air
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire until the tire pressure is equal to the
Messages Pressure Monitor Operation on values shown on the Tire and
TURN STEERING WHEEL page 10‑50 for more information. Loading Information label. See Tires
TURN KEY OFF THEN ON on page 10‑40, Vehicle Load Limits
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE on page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure on
This message displays when the This message displays when the page 10‑47.
steering column is locked. Try system is learning new tires. See
turning the steering wheel while You can receive more than one tire
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on pressure message at a time. To
turning the vehicle off and then back page 10‑50 for more information.
on to unlock the steering column. read the other messages that may
TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD have been sent at the same time,
TURN STEERING WHEEL AIR TO TIRE press the SET/CLR button. The DIC
START VEHICLE AGAIN also shows the tire pressure values.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure See Driver Information Center (DIC)
This message displays when you try Monitor System (TPMS), this on page 5‑22.
to start the vehicle, but the column message displays when the
remains locked. Try turning the pressure in one or more of the
steering wheel while starting the vehicle's tires is low.
vehicle to unlock the steering
column. If the vehicle still does not There is also an icon with the
start, turn the steering wheel the warning that will indicate the
other way, and try starting the location of the low tire.
vehicle again.
Transmission Messages Vehicle Reminder Vehicle

SERVICE TRANSMISSION Messages Personalization
This message displays if there is a ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE The audio system controls are
problem with the transmission. See WITH CARE used to access the personalization
your dealer. This message displays when ice menus for customizing vehicle
conditions are possible. features.
TRANSMISSION HOT— IDLE
ENGINE CONFIG (Configuration): Press
STEERING COLUMN IS to access the Configuration
This message displays and a chime LOCKED Settings menu.
sounds if the transmission fluid in This message displays when the
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the MENU or MENU/SEL: Press the
steering column is locked. center of this knob to enter the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle. menus and select menu items.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to Turn the knob to scroll through the
allow the transmission to cool. This menus.
message clears when the fluid BACK: Press to exit or move
temperature reaches a safe level. backward in a menu.
Entering the Personalization

. Power Door Locks Auto Fan Speed
Menus . Remote Locking, Unlocking, This will allow you to select the
1. Press CONFIG to access the Starting automatic fan speed. This feature
Configuration Settings menu. . Return to Factory Settings sets the climate control fan speed to
2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL maintain the interior temperature.
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
knob to highlight Vehicle to highlight the menu. Press the Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
Settings. Press the CONFIG knob to select it. Each of the knob when Auto Fan Speed is
button until Vehicle is highlighted menus is detailed in the following highlighted to open the menu. Turn
on vehicles with a navigation information. the knob to highlight High, Medium,
system only. or Low. Press the BACK button to
Vehicles with a navigation system confirm the selection and move
3. Press the center of the MENU or will display a checkmark to indicate
MENU/SEL knob to select the back to the last menu.
this feature is on.
Vehicle Settings menu. The key Air Quality Sensor
must be in the run position. Climate and Air Quality
This will allow you to select whether
The following list of menu items may If equipped, select the Climate and the system will operate at high or
be available: Air Quality menu and the following low sensitivity. Only vehicles with
will be displayed: the automatic climate control will
. Climate and Air Quality
. Auto Fan Speed have this option.
. Comfort and Convenience
. Air Quality Sensor Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
. Collision/Detection Systems knob when Air Quality Sensor is
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats highlighted to open the menu. Turn
. Languages
. Auto Defog the knob to highlight High Sensitivity
. Lighting or Low Sensitivity. Press the BACK
. Auto Rear Defog
button to confirm the selection and
move back to the last menu.
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Press the BACK button to confirm Chime Volume
On vehicles with remote start and the selection and move back to the This allows the selection of the
heated seats, the heated seats can last menu. chime volume level.
be set to on or off. Auto Rear Defog Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL When on, this feature turns on the knob when Chime Volume is
knob when Remote Start Auto Heat rear defogger at vehicle start when highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Seats is highlighted to open the the interior temperature is cold Normal or High. Press the BACK
menu. Turn the knob to highlight On and fog is likely. The auto rear button to confirm and go back to the
or Off. Press the BACK button to defog function can be disabled by last menu.
confirm the selection and move pressing 1. When off, the feature
back to the last menu. Collision/Detection Systems
can be turned on by pressing 1. If equipped, select the Collision/
Auto Defog See “Rear Window Defogger” under Detection Systems menu and Park
When turned on and high humidity Climate Control Systems on Assist will be displayed.
is detected, the climate control page 8‑1 for more information.
system may adjust to outside Park Assist
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
air supply and turn on the air knob when Auto Rear Defog is This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
conditioner or the heater. The fan highlighted to open the menu. Turn Assist feature, audible only, to be
speed may slightly increase to the knob to highlight On or Off. turned on or off.
help prevent fogging. When high Press the knob to confirm the Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
humidity is no longer detected, selection and move back to the knob when Park Assist is
the system will return to its prior last menu. highlighted. Turn the knob to select
operation.
Comfort and Convenience On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL and go back to the last menu.
knob when Auto Defog is Select the Comfort and
highlighted to open the menu. Turn Convenience menu and Chime
the knob to highlight On or Off. Volume will be displayed.
Languages or 2 Minutes. Press the BACK Auto Door Unlock

button to confirm and go back to This allows selection of which of the
Select the Language menu and the
the last menu. doors will automatically unlock when
following will be displayed:
Vehicle Locator Lights the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
. English
This allows the vehicle locator lights Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
. Francais
to be turned on or off. When on, the knob when Auto Door Unlock is
. Espanol headlamps and back‐up lamps will highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob flash when K is pressed. All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press
to select the language. Press BACK the knob to confirm and go back to
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL the last menu.
to return to the last menu.
knob when Vehicle Locator Lights is
highlighted to open the menu. Turn Delayed Door Lock
Lighting
the MENU or MENU/SEL knob to When on, this feature will delay
Select the Lighting menu and the highlight On or Off. Press MENU or the locking of the doors until
following will be displayed: MENU/SEL to select On or Off. five seconds after the last door is
. Exit Lighting Press the BACK button to confirm closed. You will hear three chimes
the selection and move back to the to signal delayed locking is in use.
. Vehicle Locator Lights
last menu. Press either the power lock button
Exit Lighting or Q on the RKE transmitter twice to
Power Door Locks
This allows the selection of how override the delayed locking feature
long the exterior lamps stay on Select Power Door Locks and the and immediately lock all of the
when leaving the vehicle when it is following will be displayed: doors.
dark outside. . Auto Door Unlock Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL . Delayed Door Lock knob when Delayed Door Lock is
knob when Exit Lighting is highlighted to select On or Off.
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
highlighted. Turn the knob to Press BACK to return to the
select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute, . Auto Door Lock last menu.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out Press the MENU or MENU/SEL Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
When on, all doors will lock. The knob when Auto Door Lock is knob when Remote Lock Feedback
driver door will then unlock if door highlighted. Turn the knob to select is highlighted. Turn the knob to
locking is requested while the driver On or Off. Press the knob to confirm select Lights and Horn, Lights Only,
door is open, and disable the and go back to the last menu. Horn Only, or Off. Press the knob
Delayed Door Lock feature. to confirm and go back to the
Remote Locking, Unlocking, last menu.
Even when this feature is off, the Starting
driver is protected from accidental Door Unlock or Remote Door
Select Remote Locking, Unlocking, Unlock
lockouts when the key is in the Starting and the following will be
ignition. displayed (depending on the This allows selection of which doors
If Off is selected, the Unlocked Door system): will unlock when pressing K on the
Anti Lock Out feature may be . Remote Lock Feedback RKE transmitter.
enabled through an additional menu Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
. Door Unlock or Remote Door
selection. knob when Door Unlock is
Unlock
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL highlighted. Turn the knob to
knob when Unlocked Door Anti Lock
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback select All Doors or Driver Door
Out is highlighted to select On or . Remote Start Only. When set to Driver Door
Off. Press BACK to return to the Only, the driver door will unlock the
Remote Lock Feedback
last menu. first time K is pressed and all doors
Auto Door Lock This allows selection of what type of will unlock when K is pressed a
feedback is given when locking the second time. When set to All Doors,
This allows selection of which of the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
doors will automatically lock when all of the doors will unlock at the
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). first press of K. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback Remote Start Return to Factory Settings

If equipped, this allows selection of If equipped, this allows selection to Select Return to Factory Settings to
what type of feedback is given when turn on or off Remote Start. return all vehicle personalization to
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE Press the MENU or MENU/SEL the default settings. Turn the knob
transmitter. knob when Remote Start is to select Yes or No. Press the knob
Press the MENU or MENU/SEL highlighted. Turn the knob to to confirm and go back to the
knob when Remote Unlock Light select On or Off. Press the knob last menu.
Feedback is highlighted. Turn the to confirm and go back to the
knob to select On or Off. Press the last menu.
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Daytime Running Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change
The exterior lamp control is located
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
to the left of the steering column on
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
the instrument panel.
It controls the following systems:
. Headlamps
. Taillamps
. Parking Lamps
. License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Fog Lamps
6-2 Lighting
The exterior lamp control has four 5 (Headlamps): Turns the Headlamp High/
positions: headlamps on together with the Low-Beam Changer
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position lamps listed below. A warning chime
to turn the automatic lamp control sounds if the driver door is opened
off or on again. when the ignition switch is off and
the headlamps are on.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
. Parking Lamps
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the . Taillamps
following: . License Plate Lamps
. Parking Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights 2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
. Taillamps Changer): Push the turn signal/
. Sidemarker Lamps
. License Plate Lamps lane change lever away from you
# (Front Fog Lamps): For and release, to turn the high
. Instrument Panel Lights vehicles with fog lamps, press to beams on.
. Sidemarker Lamps turn the lamps on or off.
To return to low beams, push the
; (Parking Lamps): Turns the See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. lever again or pull it toward you and
parking lamps on together with the release.
When the lights are on, ; will be
following:
lit. See Lamps On Reminder on
. Taillamps page 5‑21.
. License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Sidemarker Lamps
Lighting 6-3
A light sensor on top of the The headlamps automatically

instrument panel makes the DRL change from DRL to the regular
work, so be sure it is not covered. headlamps depending on the
The DRL system makes the darkness of the surroundings. The
low-beam headlamps come on other lamps that come on with the
at a reduced brightness when the headlamps will also come on.
This indicator light turns on in the following conditions are met: When it is bright enough outside,
instrument panel cluster when the the headlamps go off and the DRL
. The ignition is in the
high-beam headlamps are on. come on.
ON/RUN mode.
To turn the DRL off or on again,
Flash-to-Pass . The exterior lamps control is
turn the exterior lamps control to the
in AUTO.
To flash the high beams, pull the off position and then release. For
turn signal/lane change lever all the
. The engine is running. vehicles first sold in Canada, the
way toward you. Then release it. When the DRL are on, only the DRL cannot be turned off.
low-beam headlamps, at a reduced
Daytime Running level of brightness, will be on. The
Lamps (DRL) taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
panel, and other lamps will not
Daytime Running Lamps can make be on.
it easier for others to see the front of
your vehicle during the day. Fully
functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
6-4 Lighting
Automatic Headlamp Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change

System Signals
When it is dark enough outside and
the exterior lamps control is in the
automatic position, the headlamps
come on automatically. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
An arrow on the instrument panel

cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher):
Press and momentarily hold this Move the lever all the way up or
button located on the instrument down to signal a turn.
The vehicle has a light sensor panel above the climate control Raise or lower the lever until the
located on top of the instrument system, to make the front and rear arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
panel. Make sure it is not covered, turn signal lamps flash on and off. change. The turn signal flashes
or the headlamps will be on when This warns others that you are three times.
they are not needed. having trouble. Press and
The lever returns to its starting
The system may also turn on the momentarily hold again to turn
position when it is released.
headlamps when driving through a the flashers off.
parking garage or tunnel.
Lighting 6-5
If after signaling a turn or lane The ignition must be on to turn on Interior Lighting
change the arrow flashes rapidly or the fog lamps.
does not come on, a signal bulb # (Front Fog Lamps): Press to
may be burned out. Have the bulbs Instrument Panel
turn the fog lamps on or off. An
replaced. If the bulb is not burned indicator light on the instrument
Illumination Control
out, check the fuse. See Fuses and panel cluster comes on when the
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑34 for fog lamps are on.
more information.
The fog lamps come on together
Front Fog Lamps with the parking lamps.
If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
If the high‐beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
back on again.
This feature controls the brightness
Some localities have laws that
of the instrument panel controls and
require the headlamps to be on
infotainment display screen. The
along with the fog lamps.
thumbwheel is located to the left
of the steering column on the
For vehicles with front fog lamps, instrument panel.
the button is located on the D (Instrument Panel
outboard side of the instrument Brightness): Move the
panel. thumbwheel up or down and hold,
to brighten or dim the instrument
panel controls and infotainment
display screen.
6-6 Lighting
Courtesy Lamps H (Door): Press to turn the lamps Lighting Features

on automatically when a door is
The courtesy lamps come on
opened. Entry Lighting
automatically when any door is
opened and the dome lamp is in the ' (On): Press to turn on the
The headlamps, parking lamps,
door position. dome lamps.
taillamps, and most of the interior
Reading Lamps lamps turn on briefly when K is
Dome Lamps pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. After
about 30 seconds the exterior
lamps turn off, and then the
dome and remaining interior
lights will dim to off. Entry lighting
can be disabled manually by
changing the ignition out of the
OFF position, or by pressing the
RKE transmitter Q button.
The reading lamps are located in This feature can be changed.
the overhead console. See Vehicle Personalization on
# or $ : Press the button near page 5‑33.
The dome lamp controls are located each lamp to turn it on or off.
in the headliner.
( (Dome Lamp Override): Press
to turn the lamps off, even when a
door is open.
Lighting 6-7
Exit Lighting For vehicles with keyless access, Battery Power Protection
the exterior lamps and dome lamps
The headlamps, taillamps, parking automatically turn on when a door is The battery saver feature is
lamps, back-up lamps, and license opened after the ignition is turned designed to protect the vehicle's
plate lamps come on at night, or in off. See Ignition Positions (Key battery.
areas with limited lighting, when the Access) on page 9‑15 or Ignition If some interior lamps are left on
key is removed from the ignition. Positions (Keyless Access) on and the ignition is turned off, the
The dome lamps also come on page 9‑18. battery rundown protection system
when the key is removed from the automatically turns the lamp off after
ignition. The exterior lights and The exterior lamps turn off
immediately by turning the exterior some time.
dome lamps remain on after the
door is closed for a set amount of lamps control off.
time, then automatically turn off. This feature can be changed.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑33.
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Introduction
System Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Infotainment
Phone Read the following pages to
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-23 become familiar with the audio
Introduction Bluetooth (Infotainment
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 system's features.
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Bluetooth (Voice
Overview (Base Radio) . . . . . . .
Overview (Up-Level Radio) . . .
7-2
7-4
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 { WARNING
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Trademarks and License Taking your eyes off the road for
Agreements extended periods could cause a
Radio crash resulting in injury or death
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Trademarks and License
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 to you or others. Do not give
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 extended attention to infotainment
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-17 tasks while driving.
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
This system provides access to
many audio and non‐audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
Overview (Base Radio)
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑3.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑23 for more
information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate navigation
manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The theft-deterrent feature works by A. O C. g
learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to . Turns the system on or off . Radio: Seeks the previous
the infotainment system. The and adjusts the volume. station.
infotainment system does not B. Buttons 1 to 6 . CD: Selects the previous
operate if it is stolen or moved to a track or rewinds within a
different vehicle.
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations. track.
D. T I. INFO M. CD/AUX
. CD: Moves up one folder
. Radio: Shows available . Selects the CD player or
level while playing an MP3. information about the an external audio source.
current station. N. CD Slot
E. k . CD: Shows available . Insert a CD.
. CD: Pauses playback, and information about the
stops playback. current track. O. CONFIG
F. U J. TONE . Opens the settings menu.

. CD: Moves back one folder
. Opens the tone menu. P. 5\>
level while playing an MP3. K. AS . Opens the phone
G. l . Radio: Opens the main menu.
autostore stations list. . Mutes the audio system.
. Radio: Seeks the next
station. L. BAND Q. FAV
. CD: Selects the next track . Changes the band while . Radio: Opens the
or fast forwards within a listening to the radio. favorites list.
track. . Selects the radio when R. BACK
H. CLOCK listening to a different
audio source.
. Menu: Moves one
. Opens the clock menu. level back.
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
S. MENU or MENU/SEL Overview (Up-Level Radio)

. Turn to open menus,
highlight menu items,
or set numeric values while
in a menu.
. Press to select menu
items.
. Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
. CD: Selects tracks.
T. Y
. Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
A. O C. g
. Turns the system on or off . Radio: Seeks the previous
and adjusts the volume. station.
B. Buttons 1 to 6 . CD: Selects the previous
. Radio: Saves and selects track or rewinds within a
favorite stations. track.
D. k I. AS O. FAV
. CD: Pauses playback, and
. Radio: Opens the . Radio: Opens the
stops playback. autostore stations list. favorites list.
J. BAND P. BACK
E. l
. Changes the band while . Menu: Moves one
. Radio: Seeks the next listening to the radio. level back.
station.
. Selects the radio when . Character Input: Deletes
. CD: Selects the next track listening to a different the last character.
or fast forwards within a audio source.
track. Q. MENU or MENU/SEL
K. CD/AUX . Turn to open menus,
F. CLOCK
. Selects the CD player or highlight menu items,
. Opens the clock menu. an external audio source. or set numeric values while
G. INFO L. CD Slot in a menu.
. Radio: Shows available . Insert a CD.
. Press to select menu
information about the items.
current station. M. CONFIG . Radio: Manually selects
. Opens the settings menu.
. CD: Shows available radio stations.
information about the
current track.
N. 5\> . CD: Selects tracks.
H. TONE
. Opens the phone R. Y
main menu.
. Opens the tone menu.
. Removes a disc from the
. Mutes the audio system. CD slot.
Operation Volume Control Menu Icons
Controls O (Volume/Power): Turn to adjust The menu icons indicate the

the volume. following:
The infotainment system is
operated by using the pushbuttons, 5 / > (Phone/Mute): Press 5 / >
multifunction knobs, menus shown to mute the infotainment system.
on the display, and steering wheel Press 5 / > again, or turn
controls, if equipped. the O knob to cancel mute.
Turning the System On or Off MENU System (Base Level)
O (Volume/Power): Press to turn The menu system for the base level
the system on and off. infotainment system appears on the
Automatic Switch‐Off top half of the display screen.
If the infotainment system has

been turned on after the ignition is
turned off, the system will turn off A. The up and down arrows
automatically after 10 minutes. indicate that the main menu is
active.
B. The angled arrow indicates that
a submenu with more options is
available.
C. A single right arrow indicates BACK: Press to: Activating a Setting

that the first submenu level is . Exit a menu.
active. Two right arrows indicate
that the second submenu level . Return from a submenu screen
is active. to the previous menu screen.
. Delete the last character in a
D. The down arrow indicates that
that more options are available sequence.
in the current menu. Selecting a Menu Option
1. Press the MENU or
Controls 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL MENU/SEL knob to enter
The MENU or MENU/SEL knob and knob to scroll through available the displayed menu.
the BACK button are used to menu options.
navigate the menu system. 2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL knob to display the setting.
MENU or MENU/SEL Knob: knob to select the option.
3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
Press to: Submenus knob to activate the setting.
. Enter the menu system. A single right arrow indicates that Setting a Value
. Select or activate the menu a submenu with other options is
option. available.
. Confirm a set value. A double right arrow indicates that a
. Turn a system setting on or off. second submenu with other options
is available.
Turn to:
. Select a menu, or a menu
option. 1. Press the MENU or MENU/
SEL knob to enter the
. Select a value. displayed menu.
2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL Entering a Character Sequence Controls

knob to change the current value The MENU or MENU/SEL knob
of the setting. and the BACK button are used to
3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL navigate the menu system.
knob to confirm the setting. MENU or MENU/SEL Knob:
Turning a Function On or Off Press to:
. Enter the menu system.
1. Press the MENU or MENU/ . Select or activate the highlighted
SEL knob to enter the menu option.
displayed menu.
. Confirm a set value.
. Turn a system setting on or off.
character. Turn to:
1. Press the MENU or
MENU/SEL knob to enter 3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL . Highlight a menu option.
the displayed menu. knob to select the character. . Select a value.
2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL Press the BACK button to delete the
last character in the sequence or BACK: Press to:
knob to turn the function on
or off. press and hold to delete the entire . Exit a menu.
character sequence.
3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL . Return from a submenu screen
knob to confirm the setting. Menu System (Uplevel) to the previous menu screen.
The menu system for the uplevel . Delete the last character in a
infotainment system appears on the sequence.
display screen.
Selecting a Menu Option Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to move the knob to highlight the setting. knob to highlight the function.
highlighted bar. 2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL 2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL knob to activate the setting. knob to turn the function on
knob to select the highlighted or off.
option. Setting a Value
Entering a Character Sequence
Submenus
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.

knob to change the current value 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL
of the setting. knob to highlight the character.
2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL 2. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to confirm the setting. knob to select the character.
Press the BACK button to delete the Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, System Settings
last character in the sequence or and Bass
press and hold to delete the entire Configuring the Number of
1. Press the TONE button. Favorite Pages
character sequence.
2. Select Treble, Midrange, To configure the number of available
Audio Settings or Bass. favorite pages:
The audio settings can be set for 3. Select the value. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
each radio band and each audio
player source. Press the BACK button to go back 2. Select Radio Settings.
to the Tone Settings menu.
To quickly reset an audio setting 3. Select Radio Favorites.
value to 0: Adjusting the Fader and Balance
4. Select the number of available
1. Press the TONE button. 1. Press the TONE button. favorite pages.
2. Select the audio setting. 2. Select Fader or Balance. 5. Press the BACK button to go
3. Select the value. back to the System
3. Press and hold the MENU or Configuration menu.
MENU/SEL button until the value Press the BACK button to go back
changes to 0. to the Tone Settings menu. Auto Volume
Press the BACK button to go back Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) The auto volume feature
to the Tone Settings menu. automatically adjusts the radio
For vehicles that have an equalizer: volume to compensate for road and
1. Press the TONE button. wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
2. Select EQ presets. level is consistent.
3. Select the setting.
Press the BACK button to go back
to the Tone Settings menu.
The level of volume compensation Radio RDS (Radio Data System)

can be selected, or the auto volume
The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature can be turned off.
AM-FM Radio feature is available for use only on
1. Press the CONFIG button. FM stations that broadcast RDS
2. Select Radio Settings.
Control Buttons information. This feature only works
The buttons used to control the when the information from the radio
3. Select Auto Volume. station is available. In rare cases,
radio are:
4. Select the setting. a radio station could broadcast
BAND: Press to turn the radio on incorrect information that causes the
5. Press the BACK button to go and choose between AM, FM, and radio features to work improperly.
back to the System XM™, if equipped. If this happens, contact the radio
Configuration menu. station.
MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn to
Maximum Startup Volume navigate the available menus and to While the radio is tuned to an
The maximum volume played when search for stations. FM-RDS station, the station name
the radio is first turned on can INFO: Press to display additional or call letters display.
be set. information that may be available for
Radio Menus
1. Press the CONFIG button. the current song.
Radio menus are available for AM
2. Select Radio Settings. g or l : Press to search for
and FM.
stations.
3. Select Maximum Startup Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
Volume. FAV: Press to open the favorites
to open the main radio menu for
list and select the favorites page.
4. Select the setting. that band.
1 to 6: Press to select preset
5. Press the BACK button to stations.
go back to the System
Configuration menu. AS (Autostore): Press to open the
autostore list.
Selecting a Band Favorites List To search for a programming type

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ determined by station:
Press the BAND button to choose
AM, FM, or XM, if equipped. The SEL knob. 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
last station that was playing starts 2. Select Favorites List. SEL knob.
playing again. 2. Select FM category list. A list of
3. Select the station.
Selecting a Station all programming types available
Station Lists displays.
Seek Tuning
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ 3. Select the programming type.
If the radio station is not known: SEL knob. A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
Briefly press g or l to 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
type displays.
automatically search for the next receivable stations in the current
available station. If a station is not reception area are displayed. If a 4. Select the station.
found, the radio switches to a more station list has not been created, The category lists are updated when
sensitive search level. If a station an automatic station search the station lists are updated.
still is not found, the frequency that is done.
was last active begins to play. 3. Select the station. Updating Station & Category Lists
If the radio station is known: If stations stored in the station list
Category Lists can no longer be received:
Press and hold g or l until the Most stations that broadcast an 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
station on the display is reached, RDS program type code specify the SEL knob.
then release the button. type of programming transmitted.
Some stations change the program 2. Select Update AM or FM Station
Manual Tuning List, if the stations stored in
type code depending on the
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob content. The system stores the RDS the station list are no longer
to select the frequency on the stations sorted by program type in received. A station search will be
display. the FM category list. completed and the first station in
the updated list will play.
To cancel the station search, press Autostore Stations Satellite Radio

the MENU or MENU/SEL knob.
AS (Autostore): Autostore Vehicles with an XM Satellite Radio
Storing a Station as a Favorite searches and stores six FM and tuner and a valid XM Satellite Radio
six AM stations with the strongest subscription can receive XM
Stations from all bands can be signal. To use autostore:
stored in any order in the favorite programming.
pages. 1. Press BAND to select FM or AM. XM Satellite Radio Service
Up to six stations can be stored in 2. Press AS for at least XM is a satellite radio service based
each favorite page and the number two seconds until a beep
in the 48 contiguous United States
of available favorite pages can sounds. SEARCH displays on
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
be set. the radio, followed by the Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
number of stations found.
Storing Stations programming and commercial-free
3. The radio will automatically store music, coast to coast, and in
To store the station to a position in the six strongest stations found digital-quality sound. A service
the list, press the corresponding as autostore presets. fee is required to receive the XM
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. service. If XM Service needs to be
Press the AS button to alternate
Retrieving Stations between the autostore stations and reactivated, the radio will display
favorites. "No Subscription Please Renew" on
Press the FAV button to open a channel XM1. For more information,
favorite page or to switch to another AS displays on the radio when using contact XM at www.xmradio.com
favorite page. Briefly press one of autostore presets. or 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the and www.xmradio.ca or
station. Autostore does not delete
previously stored favorite stations. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Autostore does not function with XM
radio stations.
Control Buttons XM Categories Selecting a Channel

The buttons used to control the XM XM channels are organized in Using g or l
radio are: categories. . Press and release g or l to
BAND: Press to turn the radio on Removing or Adding Categories go to the previous or next
and choose between AM, FM, channel.
and XM. Channels in a category that have
been removed can still be accessed . Press and hold g or l to
g or l : Press to go to the by using g or l , or the MENU or scroll through the previous or
previous or next channel. MENU/SEL knob. next channel until the channel is
FAV: Press to open the reached.
To add or remove categories:
favorites list.
1. Press the CONFIG button. Selecting a Channel Using the
1 to 6: Press to select a favorite. MENU or MENU/SEL Knob
2. Select Radio Settings.
MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn to To select an XM channel using the
select a channel. 3. Select XM Categories. MENU or MENU/SEL knob:
INFO: Press to display additional 4. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
information that may be available knob to highlight the category. to highlight an XM channel. The
about the current song. 5. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL channel is selected after a short
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause knob to remove or add the delay.
time shifted content, if equipped. category. To select a channel using the MENU
Selecting an XM Channel or MENU/SEL knob:
Selecting the XM Band
Press the BAND button to choose XM channels can be selected by
knob and select Channel List.
between the AM, FM, and XM using g, l , the MENU or MENU/
bands. The last channel played in SEL knob, or the Menu system. 2. Select the desired channel.
that band begins to play when that
band is selected.
Selecting a Channel Using the Retrieving Channels Channel Unauth: This channel is
Menu System Press the FAV button to open a blocked or cannot be received with
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ favorite page or to change to your XM Subscription package.
SEL knob. another favorite page. Briefly press Channel Unavailable: This
2. Select XM Category List. one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve previously assigned channel is no
the channel. longer assigned. Tune to another
3. Select the category. station.
XM Messages
4. Select the channel. No Artist Info: The system
XL (Explicit Language is working properly. No artist
Storing an XM Channel as a Channels): These channels, or any information is available at this time
Favorite others, can be blocked by request, on this channel.
Channels from all bands can be by calling 1-800-929-2100 in the
U.S., and 1-877-438-9677 in No Title Info: The system is
stored in any order in the favorite working properly. No song title
pages. Canada.
information is available at this time
Up to six channels can be stored in XM Updating: The encryption code on this channel.
each favorite page and the number in the receiver is being updated.
No action is required. This process No CAT Info: The system is
of available favorite pages can working properly. No category
be set. should take no longer than
30 seconds. information is available at this time
Storing a Channel as a Favorite on this channel.
Loading XM: The audio system is
To store the channel to a position acquiring and processing audio and No Information: The system is
in the list, press and hold the text data. No action is needed. This working properly. No text or
corresponding 1 to 6 button until the message should disappear shortly. informational messages are
channel can be heard again. available at this time on this
Channel Off Air: This channel is channel.
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
No Subscription Please Renew: Check Antenna: If this message FM

XM subscription needs to be does not clear within a short period
FM signals only reach about 16 to
reactivated. Contact XM at of time, the receiver could have a
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
www.xmradio.com or fault. Consult with your dealer.
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., XM Not Available: If this message that automatically works to reduce
and www.xmradio.ca or does not clear within a short period interference, some static can occur,
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. of time, the receiver could have a especially around tall buildings or
No XM Signal: The system is fault. Consult with your dealer. hills, causing the sound to fade in
working properly. The vehicle may and out.
be in a location where the XM signal Radio Reception
is being blocked. When the vehicle AM
is moved into an open area, the Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio The range for most AM stations is
signal should return. greater than for FM, especially at
reception if items such as cell phone
CAT Not Found: The system is chargers, vehicle convenience night. The longer range can cause
working properly. There are no accessories, and external electronic station frequencies to interfere
channels available for the selected devices are plugged into the with each other. For better radio
category. accessory power outlet. If there is reception, most AM radio stations
interference or static, unplug the boost the power levels during the
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, day, and then reduce these levels
this message alternates with the item from the accessory power
outlet. during the night. Static can also
XM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. occur when things like storms and
This label is needed to activate the power lines interfere with radio
service. reception. When this happens, try
Unknown: If this message is reducing the treble on the radio.
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Satellite Radio Antenna Audio Players

XM Satellite Radio Service gives The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
digital radio reception from coast to located on the roof of the vehicle. CD Player
coast in the 48 contiguous United Keep the antenna clear of
States, and in Canada. Just as The CD player can play audio CDs
obstructions for clear radio and MP3 CDs.
with FM, tall buildings or hills can reception.
interfere with satellite radio signals, The CD player will not play
causing the sound to fade in and If the vehicle has a sunroof, the 8 cm (3 in) CDs.
out. In addition, traveling or standing performance of the XM system may
under heavy foliage, bridges, be affected if the sunroof is open. Care of CDs
garages, or tunnels may cause loss Sound quality can be reduced due
of the XM signal for a period of time. Multi-Band Antenna to disc quality, recording method,
The multi-band antenna is on the quality of the music recorded, and
Cellular Phone Usage how the disc has been handled.
roof of the vehicle. The antenna is
Cellular phone usage may cause used for the AM‐FM radio, OnStar, Handle discs carefully and store
interference with the vehicle's radio. the XM Satellite Radio Service them in their original cases or other
This interference may occur when System, and GPS (Global protective cases away from direct
making or receiving phone calls, Positioning System), if the vehicle sunlight and dust. If the bottom
charging the phone's battery, has these features. Keep the surface of a disc is damaged, the
or simply having the phone on. This antenna clear of obstructions for disc may not play properly or at all.
interference can cause an increased clear reception. Do not touch the bottom surface of
level of static while listening to the a disc while handling it; this could
radio. If static is received while damage the surface. Pick up discs
listening to the radio, unplug the by grasping the outer edges or the
cellular phone and turn it off. edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the bottom surface of a disc is the CD player and the loading slot Removing a CD
dirty, take a soft lint‐free cloth, free of foreign materials, liquids,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a and debris. Press Y.
mild neutral detergent solution The disc is pushed out of the
mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe Control Buttons
CD slot.
the disc from the center to the The buttons used to control the CD
outer edge. player are: If the disc is not removed after it is
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
Care of the CD Player CD/AUX: Press to use the CD few seconds.
player.
Do not add a label to a disc, as it Playing a CD or MP3 CD
could get caught in the CD player. l or g : Press to select tracks or
If a label is needed, label the to fast forward or rewind within a Press the CD/AUX button if there
top of the recorded disc with a track. is a disc in the player; it begins
marking pen. playing.
INFO: Press to display additional
Do not use disc lens cleaners information about the current track Information about the disc and
because they could contaminate the that may be available. current track is shown on the
lens of the disc optics and damage display depending on the data
TUNE: Turn to select tracks. stored.
the CD player.
MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn to
Notice: If a label is added to a Selecting a CD Track
enter the menu.
CD, more than one CD is inserted Using the control buttons:
into the slot at a time, or an SELECT: Press to select an item.
attempt is made to play scratched Y: Press to eject the disc.
. Press g or l to select the
or damaged CDs, the CD player previous or next track.
could be damaged. While using Inserting a CD . Turn the TUNE knob.
the CD player, use only CDs in With the printed side facing up,
good condition without any label, insert a disc into the CD slot until it
load one CD at a time, and keep is drawn in.
Using the CD Menu: Using the CD Menu: Tracks can be searched by:
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ . Playlists
SEL knob. SEL knob. . Artists
2. Select Tracks list. 2. Select Playlists/Folders. . Albums
3. Select the track. 3. Select the playlist or folder. . Song Titles
Playing Tracks in Random Order 4. Select the track. . Genres
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob Searching for MP3 Tracks . Folder View
and then set Shuffle Songs to On. The search feature may take some To search for tracks:
Fast Forward and Rewind time to display the information after
reading the disc due to the amount 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
Press and hold l or g to fast of information stored on the disc. SEL knob.
forward or rewind within the current FM automatically plays while the 2. Select Search.
track. disc is being read.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists,
Selecting an MP3 Track Albums, Song Titles, Genres,
Using the control buttons: or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
. Press g or l to select the
previous or next track.
. Turn the TUNE knob.
Auxiliary Devices Adjusting the Volume

The optional AUX input allows Turn the O knob to adjust the
portable devices to connect to the volume of the infotainment system
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) after the volume level has been set
auxiliary jack or USB port. on the portable audio device.
THe SD Slot allows SD cards to be USB Port
inserted and used with the audio
system. For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
Portable devices are controlled by and controlled by the infotainment
using the menu system described in system.
A. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary . iPods
Input Jack . PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs)
B. SD Card Slot . USB Drives
C. USB Port . Zunes®
3.5 mm Jack Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to and Zunes are compatible with the
the auxiliary input jack to use a infotainment system. Devices are
portable audio player. also charged while plugged into the
USB port.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
Connecting and Controlling 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Connecting and Controlling a
an iPod™ Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
Audio Books, or Composers. or Zune
Not all iPods can be controlled by
the infotainment system. 4. Select the track. Connecting a PFD or Zune
Connecting an iPod Shuffle Connect the PFD or Zune to the
Connect the iPod to the USB port. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob USB port.
and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to Searching for a Track
Searching for a Track On or Off, then press the BACK
Tracks that are found can be button to return to the main screen. Tracks can be searched for by:
searched for by: On: Plays tracks in the current . Playlists
. Playlists folder in random order. . Artists
. Artists Off: Plays tracks in the current . Albums
folder in sequential order.
. Albums . Song Titles
Repeat
. Song Titles . Podcasts
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
. Podcasts . Genres
and set Repeat to On or Off, then
. Genres press the BACK button to return to To search for tracks:
. Audio Books the main screen. 1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
. Composers On: Repeats the current track. SEL knob.
To search for tracks: Off: Starts playback from the 2. Select Search.
beginning of the current track after 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/ the last track finishes.
SEL knob. Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres.
2. Select Search.
4. Select the track.
Shuffle Functionality When a device is not supported, the

. Genres
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob message “No supported data found. . Folder View
and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to You can safely disconnect the
device” appears. *This only displays if a playlist is
On or Off. found on the device.
On: Plays current tracks in random Connecting a USB Drive
To search for tracks:
order. Connect the USB drive to the
1. Turn the MENU or MENU/
Off: Plays current tracks in USB port.
SEL knob.
sequential order. Searching for a Track 2. Select Search.
Repeat Functionality It is normal for the search feature 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob to take some time to display the Song Titles, Genres,
and set Repeat to On or Off. information after reading the device or Folder View.
due to the amount of information
Repeat On: Repeats the current stored. 4. Select the track.
track.
Files that do not have any meta Shuffle Functionality
Repeat Off: Starts playback from data stored in the ID3 tag display as
the beginning of the current track Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
Unknown. and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to
after the last track finishes.
Tracks can be searched for by: On or Off.
Connecting and Controlling a . Playlists* On: Plays current tracks in random
USB Drive order.
. Artists
The infotainment system can only Off: Plays current tracks in
play back .mp3 and .wma files from . Albums
sequential order.
a USB drive. . Song Titles
Only the first 10,000 songs are
recognized on the device.
Repeat Functionality Phone To minimize driver distraction,

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
and set Repeat to On or Off. Bluetooth (Overview)
Repeat On: Repeats the current
. Become familiar with the
For vehicles equipped with features of the cell phone.
track. Bluetooth capability, the system can Organize the phone book and
Repeat Off: Starts playback from interact with many cell phones, contact lists clearly and delete
the beginning of the current track allowing: duplicate or rarely used entries.
after the last track finishes. . Placement and receipt of calls in If possible, program speed dial
a hands-free mode. or other shortcuts.
. Sharing of the cell phone’s . Review the controls and
address book or contact list with operation of the infotainment
the vehicle. system.
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
this section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voice recognition are used to control the Infotainment System Controls
dialing capability, learn to use system. The system can be used
that feature to access the If equipped, the infotainment system
while in ON/RUN or ACC/ allows certain controls to be
address book or contact list. See ACCESSORY. The range of the
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section selected on the infotainment display.
Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m See the OnStar Owner’s manual
for more information. (30 ft). Not all phones support all under "OnStar Screen User
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone functions and not all phones work Interface" for more information.
Numbers” in this section for with the Bluetooth system. See
more information. www.gm.com/bluetooth for more For information about how to
information about compatible navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
{ WARNING phones.
on page 7‑6.
Bluetooth Controls
When using a cell phone, it can 5 \ > (PHONE/MUTE): Press to
be distracting to look too long or Use the buttons located on the enter the Phone main menu. Press
too often at the screen of the infotainment system and the to mute the audio system.
phone or the infotainment steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth system. Voice Recognition
(navigation) system. Taking
your eyes off the road too long or Steering Wheel Controls The voice recognition system uses
too often could cause a crash commands to control the system
resulting in injury or death. Focus
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to and dial phone numbers.
answer incoming calls, confirm
your attention on driving. system information, and start voice Noise: The system may not
recognition. recognize voice commands if there
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system is too much background noise.
$ / i (End Call/Mute): Press to
can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell end a call, reject a call, or cancel an When to Speak: A tone sounds to
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to operation. indicate that the system is ready for
make and receive phone calls. The a voice command. Wait for the tone
infotainment system and voice and then speak.

. Up to five cell phones can be
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a Bluetooth (Infotainment paired to the Bluetooth system.
calm and natural voice.
Controls) .
Audio System The pairing process is disabled
For information about how to when the vehicle is moving.
When using the Bluetooth system, navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation
. Pairing only needs to be
sound comes through the vehicle's
on page 7‑6. completed once, unless the
front audio system speakers and
pairing information on the cell
overrides the audio system. Use the
Pairing phone changes or the cell phone
VOL/ O knob during a call to is deleted from the system.
change the volume level. The A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
adjusted volume level remains in must be paired to the Bluetooth . Only one paired cell phone can
memory for later calls. The system system and then connected to the be connected to the Bluetooth
maintains a minimum volume level. vehicle before it can be used. See system at a time.
your cell phone manufacturer's user . If multiple paired cell phones are
Other Information guide for Bluetooth functions before within range of the system, the
The Bluetooth® word mark and pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth system connects to the first
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® phone is not connected, calls will be available paired cell phone in the
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks made using OnStar Hands‐Free order that they were first paired
by General Motors is under license. Calling, if available. Refer to the to the system. To link to a
Other trademarks and trade names OnStar Owner's Guide for more different paired phone, see
are those of their respective owners. information. “Linking to a Different Phone”
See Radio Frequency Statement on Pairing Information later in this section.
page 13‑15 for information . A Bluetooth phone with MP3 Pairing a Phone
regarding Part 15 of the Federal capability cannot be paired to 1. Press the CONFIG button.
Communications Commission (FCC) the vehicle as a phone and an
rules and Industry Canada MP3 player at the same time. 2. Select Phone Settings.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. 3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone). Listing All Paired and Connected 4. Select Device List.
A four‐digit Personal Phones 5. Select the new phone to link to
Identification Number (PIN) 1. Press the CONFIG button. and follow the on screen
appears on the display. The PIN prompts.
is used in Step 6. 2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth. If delete is selected, the
5. Start the pairing process on the highlighted phone will be
cell phone to be paired to the 4. Select Device List. deleted.
vehicle. See the cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for Deleting a Paired Phone Making a Call Using
information on this process. 1. Press the CONFIG button. Phone Book
6. Locate the device named “Your 2. Select Phone Settings. For cell phones that support the
Vehicle” in the list on the cell phone book feature, the Bluetooth
phone. Follow the instructions 3. Select Bluetooth.
system can use the contacts stored
on the cell phone to enter the 4. Select Device List. on your cell phone to make calls.
PIN provided in Step 4. After the See your cell phone phone
5. Select the phone to delete and
PIN is successfully entered, the manufacturer's user guide or
follow the on screen prompts.
system prompts you to provide a contact your wireless provider to
name for the paired cell phone. Linking to a Different Phone find out if this feature is supported
This name will be used to by your phone.
To link to a different phone, the new
indicate which phones are
phone must be in the vehicle and When a cell phone supports the
paired and connected to the
available to be connected to the phone book feature, the Phone
vehicle. The system responds
Bluetooth system before the Book and Call Lists menus are
with “<Phone name> has been
process is started. automatically available.
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete. 1. Press the CONFIG button. The Phone Book menu allows you
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to pair 2. Select Phone Settings. to access the phone book stored in
additional phones. the cell phone to make a call.
3. Select Bluetooth.
The Call Lists menu allows you to 3. Select the Incoming Calls, Declining a Call
access the phone numbers from the Outgoing Calls, or Missed Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and Calls list. to “Decline” and press the MENU or
Missed Calls menus on your cell 4. Select the name or number you MENU/SEL knob to decline the call.
phone to make a call. want to call.
To make a call using the Phone Call Waiting
Book menu: Making a Call Call waiting must be supported on
To make a call: the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
1. Press 5 \ > once or twice the wireless service carrier to work.
(depending on the radio). 1. Press 5 \ > once or twice
(depending on the radio). Accepting a Call
2. Select Phone Book.
2. Enter the character sequence. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
3. Search through the list by
See “Entering a Character to “Answer” and press the MENU or
selecting the letter group the
Sequence” in Operation on MENU/SEL knob to accept the call.
phone book entry begins with,
or press the MENU or MENU/ page 7‑6 for more information. Declining a Call
SEL button to scroll through the 3. Select Call to start dialing the Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
entire list of names/numbers in number. to “Decline” and press the MENU or
the phone book.
Accepting or Declining a Call MENU/SEL knob to decline the call.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call. When an incoming call is received, Switching Between Calls (Call
the infotainment system mutes and Waiting Calls Only)
To make a call using the Call a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Lists menu: To switch between calls:
Accepting a Call 1. Turn or press the MENU or
1. Press 5 \ > once or twice MENU/SEL knob.
(depending on the radio). Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob
to “Answer” and press the MENU or 2. Select Switch Call from
2. Select Call Lists. MENU/SEL knob to accept the call. the menu.
Conference Calling Ending a Call Bluetooth (Voice

Conference calling and three‐way Turn or press the MENU or MENU/ Recognition)
calling must be supported on the SEL knob and select Hang Up.
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the Using Voice Recognition
wireless service carrier to work. Muting a Call
To use voice recognition, press
To start a conference while in a To Mute a Call the b / g button located on the
current call: Turn or press the MENU or MENU/ steering wheel. Use the commands
1. Turn or press the MENU or SEL knob and select Mute Call. below for the various voice features.
MENU/SEL knob. For additional information, say
To Cancel Mute “Help” while you are in a voice
2. Select Enter Number. Turn or press the MENU or MENU/ recognition menu.
3. Enter the character sequence SEL knob and select Mute Call.
Pairing
then select Call. See “Entering
a Character Sequence” in Dual Tone Multi-Frequency A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
Operation on page 7‑6 for more (DTMF) Tones must be paired to the Bluetooth
information. The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can system and then connected to the
send numbers during a call. This is vehicle before it can be used. See
4. After the call has been placed,
used when calling a menu‐driven your cell phone manufacturer's user
turn or press the MENU or
phone system. guide for Bluetooth functions before
MENU/SEL knob and choose
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
Merge Calls. 1. Turn or press the MENU or phone is not connected, calls will be
5. To add more callers to the MENU/SEL knob and select made using OnStar Hands‐Free
conference call, repeat Steps 1 Enter Number. Calling, if available. Refer to the
through 4. The number of callers 2. Enter the character sequence. OnStar Owner's Guide for more
that can be added is limited by See “Entering a Character information.
your wireless service carrier. Sequence” in Operation on
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone vehicle. The system responds

with “<Phone name> has been
A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press b / g. The system
.
capability cannot be paired to successfully paired” after the

responds “Ready,” followed by pairing process is complete.
the vehicle as a phone and an a tone.
MP3 player at the same time. 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command additional phones.
. Up to five cell phones can be can be skipped.
paired to the Bluetooth system. Listing All Paired and Connected
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Phones
. The pairing process is disabled with instructions and a four‐digit
when the vehicle is moving. Personal Identification Number The system can list all cell phones
. Pairing only needs to be (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
completed once, unless the also connected to the vehicle, the
4. Start the pairing process on the system responds with “is connected”
pairing information on the cell cell phone that you want to pair.
phone changes or the cell phone after that phone name.
For help with this process, see
is deleted from the system. your cell phone manufacturer's 1. Press b / g. The system
. Only one paired cell phone can user guide. responds “Ready,” followed by
be connected to the Bluetooth 5. Locate the device named “Your a tone.
system at a time. Vehicle” in the list on the cell 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
. If multiple paired cell phones are phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the 3. Say “List.”
within range of the system, the
system connects to the first PIN provided in Step 3. After the
available paired cell phone in the PIN is successfully entered, the
order that they were first paired system prompts you to provide a
to the system. To link to a name for the paired cell phone.
different paired phone, see This name will be used to
“Linking to a Different Phone” indicate which phones are
later in this section. paired and connected to the
Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Say “Bluetooth.” Delete: This command is used to

If the phone name you want to 3. Say “Change phone.” delete individual name tags.
delete is unknown, see “Listing All . If another cell phone is Delete All Name Tags: This
Paired and Connected Phones.” found, the response will be command deletes all stored name
tags in the Hands‐Free Calling
1. Press b / g. The system “<Phone name> is now
Directory and the Destinations
responds “Ready,” followed by connected.”
Directory.
a tone. . If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone Using the “Store” Command
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
remains connected. 1. Press b / g. The system
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
for which phone to delete. Storing and Deleting Phone responds “Ready,” followed by
Numbers a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete. The system can store up to 2. Say “Store.”
30 phone numbers as name tags in 3. Say the phone number or group
Connecting to a Different Phone
the Hands‐Free Directory that is of numbers you want to store all
To connect to a different cell phone, shared between the Bluetooth and at once with no pauses, then
the Bluetooth system looks for the OnStar systems. follow the directions given by the
next available cell phone in the system to save a name tag for
The following commands are used
order in which all available cell this number.
to delete and store phone numbers.
phones were paired. Depending
on which cell phone you want to Store: This command will store Using the “Digit Store” Command
connect to, you may have to use a phone number, or a group of If an unwanted number is
this command several times. numbers as a name tag. recognized by the system, say
Digit Store: This command allows “Clear” at any time to clear the last
1. Press b / g. The system
a phone number to be stored as a number.
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone. name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Making a Call
recognized by the system, say Command
Calls can be made using the
“Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored following commands.
1. Press b / g. The system name tags in the Hands Free
Dial or Call: The dial or call
responds “Ready,” followed by Calling Directory and the
command can be used
a tone. Destinations Directory.
interchangeably to dial a phone
2. Say “Digit Store.” To delete all name tags: number or a stored name tag.
3. Say each digit, one at a time, 1. Press b / g. The system Digit Dial: This command allows
that you want to store. After responds “Ready,” followed by a phone number to be dialed by
each digit is entered, the system a tone. entering the digits one at a time.
repeats back the digit it heard 2. Say “Delete all name tags.” Re‐dial: This command is used to
followed by a tone. After the last dial the last number used on the cell
digit has been entered, say Listing Stored Numbers phone.
“Store,” and then follow the
The list command will list all stored Using the “Dial” or “Call”
directions given by the system to
numbers and name tags. Command
save a name tag for this number.
Using the “List” Command 1. Press b / g. The system
Using the “Delete” Command
1. Press b / g. The system responds “Ready,” followed by
1. Press b / g. The system a tone.
a tone. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
a tone.
2. Say “Directory.” 3. Say the entire number without
2. Say “Delete.”
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.” pausing or say the name tag.
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete. 4. Say “List.” Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called Call Waiting
The digit dial command allows a will be heard through the audio
Call waiting must be supported on
phone number to be dialed by speakers.
the cell phone and enabled by the
entering the digits one at a time. Using the “Re‐dial” Command wireless service carrier.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it 1. Press b / g. The system . Press b / g to answer an
heard followed by a tone. responds “Ready,” followed by incoming call when another call
a tone. is active. The original call is
If an unwanted number is placed on hold.
recognized by the system, say 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” The
“Clear” at any time to clear the last system dials the last number . Press b / g again to return to
number. called from the connected cell the original call.
phone.
To hear all of the numbers . To ignore the incoming call, no
recognized by the system, say Once connected, the person called action is required.
“Verify” at any time. will be heard through the audio
speakers. . Press $ / i to disconnect the
1. Press b / g. The system current call and switch to the call
responds “Ready,” followed by Receiving a Call on hold.
a tone. When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
Three‐Way Calling
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
tone is heard in the vehicle. Three‐way calling must be
3. Say each digit, one at a time, supported on the cell phone and
that you want to dial. After each . Press b / g to answer the call. enabled by the wireless service
digit is entered, the system carrier.
repeats back the digit it heard
. Press $ / i to ignore a call.
followed by a tone. After the 1. While on a call, press b / g.
last digit has been entered,
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
say “Dial.”
3. Use the dial or call command to The cell phone must be paired and Voice Pass-Thru
dial the number of the third party connected with the Bluetooth
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
to be called. system before a call can be
voice recognition commands on the
4. Once the call is connected, transferred. The connection process
cell phone. See your cell phone
can take up to two minutes after the
press b / g to link all callers ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
together. the cell phone supports this feature.
To Transfer Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell
Ending a Call Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone:
Press $ / i to end a call. During a call with the audio in the
1. Press b / g. The system
vehicle:
Muting a Call responds “Ready,” followed by
During a call, all sounds from inside
1. Press b / g. a tone.
the vehicle can be muted so that the 2. Say “Transfer Call.” 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
person on the other end of the call can be skipped.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
cannot hear them. 3. Say “Voice.” The system
System from a Cell Phone
To mute a call, press b / g , and responds “OK, accessing
During a call with the audio on the <phone name>.”
then say “Mute Call.” cell phone, press b / g. The audio
The cell phone's normal prompt
To cancel mute, press b / g , and transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
messages will go through their cycle
then say “Un‐mute Call.” does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the according to the phone's operating
Transferring a Call cell phone. See your cell phone instructions.
Audio can be transferred between manufacturer's user guide for more

the Bluetooth system and the cell information.
phone.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System Trademarks and

(DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
License Agreements
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This
name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the
use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing
menu‐driven phone system. information. For information on how
Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the
stored for use. previous sections on “Deleting a
Paired Phone” and “Deleting
Sending a Number or Name Tag Name Tags.” Manufactured under license
During a Call under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
1. Press b / g. The system 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
a tone.
pending. DTS and the Symbol are
2. Say “Dial.” registered trademarks and DTS
3. Say the number or name tag Digital Surround and the DTS logos
to send. are trademarks of DTS Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
name. Channel blocking is available

for XM Satellite Radio receivers by
notifying XM at:
. USA Customers — Visit
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100.
Manufactured under license from Fees and Taxes — Subscription . Canadian Customers — Visit
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the fee, taxes, one time activation
www.xmradio.ca or call
double-D symbol are trademarks of fee, and other fees may apply.
1-877-438-9677.
Dolby Laboratories. Subscription fee is consumer only.
All fees and programming subject to It is prohibited to copy, decompile,
change. Subscriptions subject to disassemble, reverse engineer,
Customer Agreement available at hack, manipulate, or otherwise
www.xmradio.com. XM™ service make available any technology or
only available in the 48 contiguous software incorporated in receivers
United States and Canada*. compatible with the XM™ Satellite
Radio System or that support the
*Canada — Some deterioration
XM website, the Online Service or
of service may occur in extreme
“Made for iPod and iPhone” means any of its content. Furthermore, the
northern latitudes. This is beyond
that an electronic accessory has AMBER voice compression software
the control of XM™ Satellite
been designed to connect included in this product is protected
Radio. Explicit Language
specifically to iPod and has been by intellectual property rights
Notice — Channels with frequent
certified by the developer to meet including patent rights, copyrights,
explicit language are indicated
Apple performance standards. and trade secrets of Digital Voice
with an “XL” preceding the channel
iPod is a trademark of Apple Systems, Inc.
Computer, Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
General Requirements: and related content delivery. Regarding the use of Gracenote
1. A License Agreement from XM™ For more information, visit Music Recognition Service, when
is required for any product that www.gracenote.com. this product is used, it is necessary
incorporates XM Technology CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and to agree to the following articles.
and/or for use of any of the XM music and video-related data from Gracenote® End User License
marks to be manufactured, Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to
distributed or marketed in the present Gracenote. One or more This application or device contains
XM Service Area. patents owned by Gracenote apply software from Gracenote, Inc. of
to this product and service. See Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
2. For products to be distributed, The software from Gracenote (the
marketed and/or sold in Canada, the Gracenote website for a
non-exhaustive list of applicable “Gracenote Software”) enables
a separate agreement is this application to perform disc
required with Canadian Satellite Gracenote patents. Gracenote and
CDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, the and/or file identification and obtain
Radio Inc. (operating as XM music-related information, including
Canada). Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the “Powered by Gracenote” logo name, artist, track, and title
are either registered trademarks or information (“Gracenote Data”)
trademarks of Gracenote in the from online servers or embedded
United States and/or other databases (collectively, “Gracenote
countries. Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote
If you require more information Data only by means of the intended
regarding the use of the End-User functions of this
Gracenote Service, visit: application or device. You agree
Music and video recognition www.gracenote.com/corporate. that you will use Gracenote Data,
technology and related data
For the data provided by the Gracenote Software, and
are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote® Music Recognition Gracenote Servers for your own
Gracenote is the industry standard
Service, the content is not personal non-commercial use only.
in music recognition technology
necessarily guaranteed 100%.
You agree not to assign, copy, that you provide. You agree that No warranty is made that the
transfer or transmit the Gracenote Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to rights under this Agreement against Servers are error-free or that
any third party. you directly in its own name. functioning of Gracenote Software
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR The Gracenote service uses a or Gracenote Servers will be
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE unique identifier to track queries for uninterrupted.
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR statistical purposes. Gracenote is not obligated to
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT The purpose of a randomly provide you with new enhanced or
AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED assigned numeric identifier is to additional data types or categories
HEREIN. You agree that your allow the Gracenote service to that Gracenote may provide in the
non-exclusive license to use the count queries without knowing future and is free to discontinue its
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote anything about who you are. For services at any time.
Software, and Gracenote Servers more information, see the web page Gracenote disclaims all warranties
will terminate if you violate these for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for express or implied, including, but
restrictions. If your license the Gracenote service. not limited to, implied warranties
terminates, you agree to cease any of merchantability, fitness for a
and all use of the Gracenote Data, The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed particular purpose, title, and
the Gracenote Software, and non-infringement. Gracenote does
Gracenote Servers. to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes
no representations or warranties, not warrant the results that will
Gracenote reserves all rights in express or implied, regarding the be obtained by your use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote accuracy of any Gracenote Data Gracenote software or any
Software, and the Gracenote from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote server. In no case
Servers, including all ownership will Gracenote be liable for any
rights. Gracenote reserves the right to consequential or incidental
delete data from the Gracenote damages or for any lost profits or
Under no circumstances will Servers or to change data
Gracenote become liable for any lost revenues.
categories for any cause that
payment to you for any information Gracenote deems sufficient.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Vehicles without Air Conditioning
Systems
Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, defrosting, and
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 ventilation for the vehicle can be
Automatic Climate Control controlled with these systems.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
C. Floor Air Mode
D. Vent Air Mode
E. Fan Control
F. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats (If Equipped)
G. Rear Window Defogger
H. Defog
I. Defrost
8-2 Climate Controls
Vehicles with Air Conditioning J. Air Conditioning 0 (Defrost): Clears the

K. Defrost windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase windshield and side window outlets.
or decrease the fan speed.
For best results, clear all snow
Temperature Control: Turn and ice from the windshield before
to increase or decrease the defrosting.
temperature.
Do not drive the vehicle until all
Air Delivery Mode Control: To windows are clear.
change the current mode, press one
of the following: Air Conditioning
F (Vent): Air is directed to the # (Air Conditioning, If
instrument panel outlets. Equipped): Press to turn the
A. Temperature Control * (Bi-level): Air is directed to the air conditioning on or off. If the
instrument panel outlets and the fan is turned off or the outside
B. Bi-level Air Mode temperature falls below freezing,
floor outlets.
C. Floor Air Mode the air conditioning compressor will
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the not work.
D. Vent Air Mode floor outlets.
E. Fan Control h (Recirculation, If Equipped):
W (Defog): Clears the windows of Press to turn on the recirculation.
F. Driver and Passenger Heated fog or moisture. Air is directed to the An indicator light comes on. Air
Seats (If Equipped) windshield and floor outlets. is recirculated inside the vehicle.
G. Rear Window Defogger It helps to quickly cool the air inside
the vehicle or prevent outside air
H. Recirculation and odors from entering.
I. Defog
To improve fuel efficiency and to Notice: Do not use a razor blade

cool the vehicle faster, recirculation or sharp object to clear the inside
may be automatically selected in rear window. Do not adhere
warm weather. The recirculation anything to the defogger grid
light will not come on. Press h to lines in the rear glass. These
select recirculation; press it again to actions may damage the rear
select outside air. defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Rear Window Defogger Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press
1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turn to turn the heated seats on or off.
the rear window defogger on or off. See Heated Front Seats on
The rear window defogger turns off page 3‑6.
after about 10 minutes. It can also A. Temperature Control
be turned off by turning the ignition Automatic Climate B. Rear Window Defogger
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
OFF. If turned on again it runs
Control System C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
for about five minutes before The heating, cooling, and ventilation D. Defrost
turning off. for the vehicle can be controlled
with this system. E. Fan Control
Do not drive the vehicle until all
windows are clear. F. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats
G. Power
H. Recirculation
I. MODE (Air Delivery Mode)
J. AQS (Air Quality Sensor)
K. Air Conditioning
Automatic Operation English units can be changed to To change the current mode, select
The system automatically controls metric units through the Driver one of the following:
the fan speed, air delivery, air Information Center (DIC). See Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
conditioning, and recirculation in Vehicle Personalization on instrument panel outlets.
order to heat or cool the vehicle to page 5‑33.
the desired temperature.
\ (Bi-level): Air is divided
Manual Operation between the instrument panel
When the indicator light is on, the O (Power): Press to turn the outlets and the floor outlets.
system is in full automatic operation. climate control system on or off. C (Tri‐Level): Air is divided
If the air delivery mode or fan between the windshield, instrument
setting is manually adjusted, the Fan Control: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to panel, and floor outlets.
auto indicator turns off and displays
will show the selected settings. increase or decrease the fan speed. [ (Floor): Air is directed to the
The selected fan speed is indicated floor outlets.
To place the system in automatic by a number on the display screen.
mode do the following: Press AUTO to return to automatic - (Defog): Clears the windows of
operation. fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
1. Press AUTO. windshield and floor outlets.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the MODE (Air Delivery Mode): Press
system time to stabilize. Then to change the direction of the 0 (Defrost): Clears the
airflow. The current mode appears windshield of fog or frost more
adjust the temperature as quickly. Air is directed to the
needed for best comfort. in the display screen. Automatic
operation is canceled and manual windshield.
To improve fuel efficiency and to mode is initiated. Press AUTO to # (Air Conditioning): Press to
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation return to automatic operation. turn the automatic air conditioning
may be automatically selected in on or off. If the fan is turned off or
warm weather. The recirculation the outside temperature falls below
light will not come on. Press h to freezing, the air conditioning
select recirculation; press it again to compressor will not run.
select outside air.
Press AUTO to return to automatic Press the AQS button on the Rear Window Defogger
operation and the air conditioner climate control to activate the air
runs as needed. When the indicator quality sensor. The air quality
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
light is on, the air conditioner runs sensor will not maintain recirculation
defogger on or off.
automatically to cool the air inside for an extended period to prevent
the vehicle or to dry the air needed the air inside the vehicle from The rear window defogger turns
to defog the windshield faster. becoming too dry or stuffy. To off automatically after about
adjust the sensitivity of the Air 10 minutes. If turned on again it
h (Recirculation): Press to turn
Quality Control, see “Climate runs for about five minutes before
on recirculation. An indicator light
and Air Quality” under Vehicle turning off.
comes on. Air is recirculated to
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle Personalization on page 5‑33. The rear window defogger can be
or prevent outside air and odors Auto Defog: The climate control set to automatic operation. See
from entering. system may have a sensor to “Climate and Air Quality” under
automatically detect high humidity Vehicle Personalization on
Automatic Air Recirculation:
inside the vehicle. When high page 5‑33. When Auto Rear
When the AUTO indicator light
humidity is detected, the climate Defog is selected, the rear window
is on, the air is automatically
control system may adjust to defogger turns on automatically
recirculated as needed to help
outside air supply and turn on the when the interior temperature is cold
quickly cool the inside of the
air conditioner. If the climate control and the outside temperature is
vehicle.
system does not detect possible about 40°F and below. The auto
AQS (Air Quality Sensor): For window fogging, it returns to normal rear defogger turns off automatically
vehicles with an air quality sensor, operation. To turn Auto Defog off or after about 10 minutes. At higher
the climate control system adjusts to on, see “Climate and Air Quality” speeds, the rear window defogger
limit some exhaust fumes from under Vehicle Personalization on may stay on continuously.
being pulled inside your vehicle. page 5‑33.
For vehicles with heated outside Remote Start Climate Control Air Vents
rearview mirrors, they turn on when Operation: For vehicles with the
the rear window defogger button is remote vehicle start feature, the Adjustable air vents are in the
on and help to clear fog or frost from climate control system may run center and on the side of the
the surface of the mirrors. See when the vehicle is started remotely. instrument panel.
Heated Mirrors on page 2‑17. The system will default to a heating
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or cooling mode depending on the
or other material from the inside outside temperature and then go
of the front windshield and rear back to the previous settings. See
window with a razor blade or Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑9.
anything else that is sharp. This The rear window defogger turns on
may damage the rear window if it is cold outside.
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations Sensors
clearly. The repairs would not be The solar sensor, located on top of
covered by your warranty. the instrument panel near the
Heated Seats (If Equipped): windshield, monitors the solar heat.
Press to turn the heated seats on or The climate control system uses
off. See Heated Front Seats on the sensor information to adjust Move the slats (A) to change the
page 3‑6. the temperature, fan speed, direction of the airflow.
recirculation, and air delivery
mode for best comfort.
If the sensor is covered, the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Operation Tips
. Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
. Clear away any ice, snow, the performance of the system.
or leaves from air inlets at the Check with your dealer before
base of the windshield that could adding equipment to the outside
block the flow of air into the of the vehicle.
vehicle.
Use the thumbwheels (B) near the . Keep the path under the front
air vents to open or close off the seats clear of objects to help
airflow. circulate the air inside of the
Additional air vents are located vehicle more effectively.
beneath the windshield, driver and
passenger side door windows, and
in the footwells. These are fixed and
cannot be adjusted.
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-20
9-22
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
Operating Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Cruise Control
Driving Information Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Object Detection Systems
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking over Things
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-41
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Fuel
Engine Exhaust Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Running the Vehicle While
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission California Fuel
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-28 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-44
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Manual Transmission Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-32 Filling a Portable Fuel
Starting and Operating Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15 Brakes
Ignition Positions (Key Antilock Brake
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Ignition Positions (Keyless Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9-2 Driving and Operating
Towing
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 distractions.
Driving Characteristics and Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such
Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy and can take your focus from the as programming favorite radio
Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Trailer Towing (Except Fuel judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Economy Model) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 activities divert your attention Program all trip information into
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 away from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
governments have enacted laws driving.
Conversions and Add-Ons
regarding driver distraction. Become
Add-On Electrical . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not
read, take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
careless and make mistakes.

{ WARNING Anticipate what they might do WARNING (Continued)
and be ready.
Taking your eyes off the road too Do not drink and drive or ride with
long or too often could cause a
. Allow enough following distance a driver who has been drinking.
crash resulting in injury or death. between you and the driver in Ride home in a cab; or if you are
Focus your attention on driving. front of you. with a group, designate a driver
. Focus on the task of driving. who will not drink.
Refer to the infotainment section
for more information on using that Drunk Driving Control of a Vehicle
system, including pairing and using Death and injury associated with
a cell phone. drinking and driving is a global Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
If equipped, refer to the navigation tragedy.
control a vehicle while driving.
manual for information on that
system, including pairing and using { WARNING Braking
a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is Braking action involves perception
Defensive Driving very dangerous. Your reflexes, time and reaction time. Deciding to
perceptions, attentiveness, and push the brake pedal is perception
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even time. Actually doing it is
expect the unexpected.” The first reaction time.
a small amount of alcohol. You
step in driving defensively is to wear
can have a serious — or even Average driver reaction time is
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑9. fatal — collision if you drive after about three-quarters of a second.
drinking. In that time, a vehicle moving at
. Assume that other road users 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(Continued)
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and (66 ft), which could be a lot of
other drivers) are going to be distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind If power steering assist is lost due
. Adjust speed so you can drive
include: to a system malfunction, the vehicle through the curve. Maintain a
can be steered, but may require reasonable, steady speed.
. Keep enough distance between
you and the vehicle in front increased effort. . Wait until out of the curve before
of you. If the steering wheel is turned accelerating gently into the
in either direction several times straightaway.
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
until it stops, or it is held until it is Steering in Emergencies
. Keep pace with traffic. stopped for an extended time,
If the engine ever stops while the power steering assist should return There are times when steering can
vehicle is being driven, brake shortly after a few normal steering be more effective than braking. For
normally but do not pump the movements. example, you come over a hill and
brakes. Doing so could make the find a truck stopped in the lane, or a
See specific vehicle steering child darts out from between parked
pedal harder to push down. If the messages under Vehicle Messages
engine stops, there will be some cars and stops right in front of you.
(Canada Uplevel and United States) These problems can be avoided by
power brake assist but it will be on page 5‑27 or Vehicle Messages
used when the brake is applied. braking — if you can stop in time.
(Canada Base Level) on page 5‑27.
Once the power assist is used up, If you cannot fully stop, follow these
it can take longer to stop and the See your dealer if there is a suggestions:
brake pedal will be harder to push. problem.
. Quickly apply the brakes to
Curve Tips remove as much speed as
Steering . Take curves at a reasonable possible from a collision.
Electric Power Steering speed. . Steer around the problem, to
. Reduce speed before entering a the left to right depending on
Your vehicle has electric power
steering. It does not have power curve, while the front wheels are available space.
steering fluid. Regular maintenance straight. . Straighten the wheel once you
is not required. have avoided the object.
Off-Road Recovery 2. Turn the steering wheel about Defensive drivers avoid most skids
one-eighth of a turn, until the by taking reasonable care suited
right front tire contacts the to existing conditions, and by not
pavement edge. overdriving those conditions. But
3. Then turn the steering wheel to skids are always possible.
go straight down the roadway. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Loss of Control . Ease your foot off the
Skidding accelerator pedal and quickly
steer the way you want the
There are three types of skids that vehicle to go. The vehicle may
correspond to the vehicle's three straighten out. Be ready for a
control systems: second skid if it occurs.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not . Slow down and adjust your
The vehicle's right wheels can drop rolling. driving according to weather
off the edge of a road onto the conditions. Stopping distance
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Steering or Cornering
Skid — too much speed or can be longer and vehicle
these tips: control can be affected when
steering in a curve causes tires
1. Ease off the accelerator and to slip and lose cornering force. traction is reduced by water,
then, if there is nothing in the snow, ice, gravel, or other
way, steer the vehicle so that
. Acceleration Skid — too much material on the road. Learn to
it straddles the edge of the throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues — such
pavement. wheels to spin. as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering, There is no hard and fast rule about
acceleration, or braking, WARNING (Continued) hydroplaning. The best advice is to
including reducing vehicle speed slow down when the road is wet.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any After driving through a large
sudden changes could cause puddle of water or a car/vehicle Other Rainy Weather Tips
the tires to slide. wash, lightly apply the brake Besides slowing down, other wet
Remember: Antilock brakes help pedal until the brakes work weather driving tips include:
avoid only the braking skid. normally.
. Allow extra following distance.
Flowing or rushing water creates
Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through
. Pass with caution.
flowing water could cause the . Keep windshield wiping
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle to be carried away. If this equipment in good shape.
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle . Keep the windshield washer fluid
Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not reservoir filled.
of driving conditions and avoid ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
. Have good tires with proper
driving through large puddles and tread depth. See Tires on
deep‐standing or flowing water. through flowing water.
page 10‑40.
{ WARNING Hydroplaning
. Turn off cruise control.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Highway Hypnosis
They might not work as well in can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the Always be alert and pay attention
a quick stop and could cause to your surroundings while driving.
pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road
is wet enough and you are going If you become tired or sleepy, find
lose control of the vehicle. a safe place to park the vehicle
fast enough. When the vehicle is
(Continued) hydroplaning, it has little or no and rest.
contact with the road.
Other driving tips include:

. Stay in your own lane. Do not
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
{ WARNING swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
. Keep the interior If you do not shift down, the speeds that let you stay in your
temperature cool. brakes could get so hot that they own lane.
would not work well. You would
. Keep your eyes moving — scan . Be alert on top of hills;
then have poor braking or even something could be in your lane
the road ahead and to the sides.
none going down a hill. You could (stalled car, accident).
. Check the rearview mirror and crash. Shift down to let the engine
vehicle instruments often. assist the brakes on a steep
. Pay attention to special road
downhill slope. signs (falling rocks area, winding
Hill and Mountain Roads roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
Driving on steep hills or through appropriate action.
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
{ WARNING
driving in these conditions include:
Winter Driving
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in or with the ignition off is Driving on Snow or Ice
good shape. dangerous. The brakes will have Drive carefully when there is snow
to do all the work of slowing down or ice between the tires and the
. Check all fluid levels and brakes,
and they could get so hot that road, creating less traction or grip.
tires, cooling system, and
transmission. they would not work well. You Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
would then have poor braking or (32°F) when freezing rain begins to
. Shift to a lower gear when going even none going down a hill. You fall, resulting in even less traction.
down steep or long hills. could crash. Always have the Avoid driving on wet ice or in
engine running and the vehicle in freezing rain until roads can be
gear when going downhill. treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the Turn off cruise control on slippery
condition. Accelerate gently so surfaces. WARNING (Continued)
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin Blizzard Conditions cannot be seen or smelled. It can
and makes the surface under the Being stuck in snow can be a cause unconsciousness and even
tires slick, so there is even less serious situation. Stay with the death.
traction. vehicle unless there is help nearby. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
Try not to break the fragile traction. If possible, use the Roadside . Clear away snow from around
If you accelerate too fast, the drive Assistance Program on page 13‑5.
the base of your vehicle,
wheels will spin and polish the To get help and keep everyone in
especially any that is blocking
surface under the tires even more. the vehicle safe:
the exhaust pipe.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
. Turn on the hazard warning . Check again from time to
on page 9‑34 improves vehicle flashers.
time to be sure snow does
stability during hard stops on . Tie a red cloth to an outside not collect there.
slippery roads, but apply the brakes mirror.
sooner than when on dry pavement.
. Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
Allow greater following distance on { WARNING vehicle that is away from the
any slippery road and watch for wind to bring in fresh air.
slippery spots. Icy patches can Snow can trap engine exhaust
occur on otherwise clear roads in under the vehicle. This may . Fully open the air outlets
shaded areas. The surface of a cause exhaust gases to get on or under the instrument
curve or an overpass can remain icy inside. Engine exhaust contains panel.
when the surrounding roads are carbon monoxide (CO) which . Adjust the climate control
clear. Avoid sudden steering (Continued) system to a setting that
maneuvers and braking while circulates the air inside the
on ice. vehicle and set the fan speed
(Continued)
keeps the battery charged to restart For information about using tire
WARNING (Continued) the vehicle and to signal for help chains on the vehicle, see Tire
with the headlamps. Do this as little Chains on page 10‑60.
to the highest setting. See as possible to save fuel.
“Climate Control Systems” in Rocking the Vehicle to Get
the Index. it Out
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
For more information about Turn the steering wheel left and
carbon monoxide, see Engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when right to clear the area around the
Exhaust on page 9‑26. front wheels. Turn off any traction
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
system. Shift back and forth
If stuck too severely for the traction between R (Reverse) and a forward
Run the engine for short periods system to free the vehicle, turn the
only as needed to keep warm, but gear, or with a manual transmission,
traction system off and use the between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
be careful. rocking method. R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
To save fuel, run the engine for only as little as possible. To prevent
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
{ WARNING transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
off and close the window most of If the vehicle's tires spin at high gears. Release the accelerator
the way to save heat. Repeat this speed, they can explode, and you pedal while shifting, and press
until help arrives but only when you or others could be injured. The lightly on the accelerator pedal
feel really uncomfortable from the vehicle can overheat, causing an when the transmission is in gear.
cold. Moving about to keep warm engine compartment fire or other Slowly spinning the wheels in the
also helps. damage. Spin the wheels as little forward and reverse directions
If it takes some time for help to as possible and avoid going causes a rocking motion that could
arrive, now and then when you run above 55 km/h (35 mph). free the vehicle. If that does not
the engine, push the accelerator get the vehicle out after a few tries,
pedal slightly so the engine runs it might need to be towed out.
faster than the idle speed. This
If the vehicle does need to be towed Tire and Loading Information

out, see Towing the Vehicle on { WARNING Label
page 10‑81.
Do not load the vehicle any
Vehicle Load Limits heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
It is very important to know how (GVWR), or either the
much weight the vehicle can maximum front or rear Gross
carry. This weight is called the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
vehicle capacity weight and This can cause systems to
includes the weight of all break and change the way the
occupants, cargo, and all vehicle handles. This could
nonfactory‐installed options. cause loss of control and a
Two labels on the vehicle crash. Overloading can also
show how much weight it may shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and A vehicle-specific Tire and
the Certification label. Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum Steps for Determining Correct and luggage load capacity
vehicle capacity weight (B) in Load Limit is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
kilograms and pounds. 1. Locate the statement (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
The Tire and Loading “The combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
Information label also shows occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
the tire size of the original never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
equipment tires (C) and the XXX lbs” on your vehicle's That weight may not safely
recommended cold tire inflation placard. exceed the available cargo
pressures (D). For more 2. Determine the combined and luggage load capacity
information on tires and inflation weight of the driver and calculated in Step 4.
see Tires on page 10‑40 and passengers that will be riding 6. If your vehicle will be towing
Tire Pressure on page 10‑47. in your vehicle. a trailer, the load from your
There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined trailer will be transferred to
information on the Certification your vehicle. Consult this
weight of the driver and
label. It tells you the Gross manual to determine how this
passengers from XXX kg or
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) reduces the available cargo
XXX lbs.
and the Gross Axle Weight and luggage load capacity of
Rating (GAWR) for the front and 4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.
rear axle; see “Certification the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. See Trailer Towing (Except Fuel
Label” later in this section. Economy Model) on page 9‑51
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs or Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy
and there will be five 150 lb Model) on page 9‑51 for
passengers in your vehicle, important information on towing
the amount of available cargo a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
136 kg (300 lbs). 340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight =
Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs).
(700 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and Certification Label the gross weight capacity of the
Loading Information label for vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
specific information about the Weight Rating (GVWR). The
vehicle's capacity weight and GVWR includes the weight of
seating positions. The combined the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo. Never exceed the
and cargo should never exceed GVWR for the vehicle, or the
the vehicle's capacity weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Certification
label, found on the vehicle
center pillar (B-pillar), tells you
And, if you do have a heavy If you put things inside the

load, you should spread it out. vehicle — like suitcases, WARNING (Continued)
See “Steps for Determining tools, packages, or anything . Never stack heavier
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this else — they will go as fast as things, like suitcases,
section. the vehicle goes. If you have to inside the vehicle so that
stop or turn quickly, or if there is some of them are above
{ WARNING a crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
{ WARNING . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
Vehicle Weight Rating Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
(GVWR), or either the strike and injure people in a . Secure loose items in the
maximum front or rear Gross sudden stop or turn, or in a vehicle.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). crash.
This can cause systems to . Do not leave a seat folded
. Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
break and change the way the area of the vehicle. In the
vehicle handles. This could cargo area, put them as
cause loss of control and a far forward as possible.
crash. Overloading can also Try to spread the weight
shorten the life of the vehicle. evenly.
(Continued)
Starting and Following break‐in, engine speed

and load can be gradually
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
Operating increased. hand, see your dealer.
The key must be fully extended to
New Vehicle Break-In Ignition Positions (Key start the vehicle.
Notice: The vehicle does not Access) To shift out of P (Park), turn the
need an elaborate break-in. But it ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
will perform better in the long run brake pedal.
if you follow these guidelines:
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
. Do not drive at any one LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
constant speed, fast or slow, stopped, turn the ignition switch to
for the first 805 km (500 mi). LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Do not make full-throttle Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
starts. Avoid downshifting to will remain active. See Retained
brake or slow the vehicle. Accessory Power (RAP) on
. Avoid making hard stops for page 9‑23.
the first 322 km (200 mi) or This is the only position from which
so. During this time the new the key can be removed. This locks
brake linings are not yet the steering wheel, ignition, and
broken in. Hard stops with The ignition switch has four different
automatic transmission.
new linings can mean positions.
premature wear and earlier Notice: Using a tool to force the Do not turn the engine off when the
replacement. Follow this key to turn in the ignition could vehicle is moving. This will cause a
breaking-in guideline every cause damage to the switch or loss of power assist in the brake
time you get new brake break the key. Use the correct and steering systems and disable
linings. key, make sure it is all the way in, the airbags.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,

emergency: { WARNING push in the key and then turn it to
1. Brake using a firm and steady LOCK/OFF.
Turning off the vehicle while
pressure. Do not pump the moving may cause loss of power C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
brakes repeatedly. This may assist in the brake and steering stays in this position when the
deplete power assist, requiring systems and disable the airbags. engine is running. This position can
increased brake pedal force. While driving, only shut the be used to operate the electrical
2. Shift the vehicle to Neutral. This vehicle off in an emergency. accessories, including the
can be done while the vehicle is ventilation fan and 12-volt power
moving. After shifting to Neutral, outlet, as well as to display some
If the vehicle cannot be pulled warning and indicator lights. This
continue to firmly apply the
over, and must be shut off while position can also be used for
brakes and steer the vehicle to a
driving, turn the ignition to ACC/ service and diagnostics, and to
safe location.
ACCESSORY. verify the proper operation of the
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift malfunction indicator lamp as may
The ignition switch can bind in the
to P (Park) with an automatic be required for emission inspection
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
transmission, or Neutral with a purposes. The transmission is also
turned off center. If this happens,
manual transmission. Turn the unlocked in this position on
move the steering wheel from right
ignition to LOCK/OFF. automatic transmission vehicles.
to left while turning the key to ACC/
4. Set the parking brake. See ACCESSORY. If this does not work, The battery could be drained if the
Parking Brake on page 9‑35. then the vehicle needs service. key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This or ON/RUN position with the engine
position provides power to some off. The vehicle might not start if the
of the electrical accessories. battery is allowed to drain for an
It unlocks the steering wheel and extended period of time.
ignition. To move the key from
D (START): This position starts the Key Lock Release The key lock release is always
engine. When the engine starts, functional except in the case of an
release the key. The ignition switch uncharged or low voltage (less than
will return to ON/RUN for normal 9-volt) battery. If the vehicle has an
driving. uncharged battery or a battery with
A warning tone sounds when the low voltage, try charging or jump
driver door is opened if the ignition starting the battery. See Jump
is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the Starting on page 10‑78.
key is in the ignition. If charging or jump starting the
If the ignition becomes difficult to battery does not work, locate the
turn, see Keys on page 2‑2 for more hole below the ignition lock. Insert a
information. flat bladed tool or another key from
the key chain into the opening.
When the lever can be felt, actuate
Vehicles with an automatic the lever toward the driver, and
transmission are equipped with an remove the key from the ignition.
electronic key lock release system.
The key lock release is designed to
prevent ignition key removal unless
the shift lever is in P (Park).
Ignition Positions strong radio antenna signal causing page 5‑33 for more information.
interference to the keyless access When the vehicle is shifted into
(Keyless Access) system. See Remote Keyless Entry P (Park), the ignition system will
(RKE) System Operation on switch to OFF.
page 2‑4 for more information. The vehicle may have an electric
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle steering column lock. The lock is
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or activated when the ignition is
ON/RUN and the brake pedal must switched to off and either front door
be applied. is opened. A sound may be heard
Stopping the Engine/OFF (No as the lock actuates or releases.
LED Lights): When the vehicle is The steering column lock may not
stopped, press the engine START/ release with the wheels turned off
STOP button once to turn the center. If this happens, the vehicle
engine off. may not start, and a DIC message
will be displayed. Turn the steering
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the wheel to the left or right while
The vehicle has an electronic ignition will turn off, and Retained attempting to start the vehicle. See
keyless ignition with pushbutton Accessory Power (RAP) will remain Starting the Vehicle Messages on
start. active. See Retained Accessory page 5‑32 for more information.
Pressing the button cycles it through Power (RAP) on page 9‑23 for more If this does not work, the vehicle
three modes, ACC/ACCESSORY, information. needs service.
ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the If the vehicle is not in P (Park), Do not turn the engine off when the
Engine/OFF. the ignition will return to ACC/ vehicle is moving. This will cause a
The transmitter must be in the ACCESSORY and the Driver loss of power assist in the brake
vehicle for the system to operate. Information Center (DIC) will display and steering systems and disable
If the pushbutton start is not the message SHIFT TO PARK in the airbags.
working, the vehicle may be near a the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Transmission Messages on
If the vehicle must be shut off in an ON/RUN/START (Green LED

emergency: { WARNING Light): This mode is for driving and
1. Brake using a firm and steady starting. With the ignition off, and
Turning off the vehicle while the brake pedal applied, pressing
pressure. Do not pump the moving may cause loss of power
brakes repeatedly. This may the button once will place the
assist in the brake and steering ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
deplete power assist, requiring systems and disable the airbags.
increased brake pedal force. Once engine cranking begins,
While driving, only shut the release the button. Engine cranking
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). vehicle off in an emergency. will continue until the engine
This can be done while the starts. See Starting the Engine on
vehicle is moving. After shifting page 9‑20 for more information. The
If the vehicle cannot be pulled
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the ignition will then remain in ON/RUN.
over, and must be shut off while
brakes and steer the vehicle to a
driving, switch the ignition to ACC/ Service Only Mode
safe location.
ACCESSORY.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift This power mode is available for
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LED service and diagnostics, and to
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
Light): This mode allows you to verify the proper operation of the
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
use some electrical accessories malfunction indicator lamp as may
an automatic transmission, the
when the engine is off. be required for emission inspection
shift lever must be in P (Park) to
turn the ignition switch to the With the ignition off, pressing the purposes. With the vehicle off,
LOCK/OFF position. button one time without the brake and the brake pedal not applied,
pedal applied will place the ignition pressing and holding the button for
4. Set the parking brake. See more than five seconds will place
system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
Parking Brake on page 9‑35. the vehicle in Service Only Mode.
The ignition will switch from ACC/
ACCESSORY to OFF after
five minutes to prevent battery
rundown.
The instruments and audio systems Notice: Do not try to shift to components. If the ignition key is
will operate as they do in ON/RUN, P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. turned to the START position,
but the vehicle will not be able to be If you do, you could damage the and then released when the
driven. The engine will not start in transmission. Shift to P (Park) engine begins cranking, the
Service Only Mode. Push the button only when the vehicle is stopped. engine will continue cranking
again to turn the vehicle off. for a few seconds or until the
Manual Transmission vehicle starts. If the engine does
Starting the Engine The shift lever should be in Neutral not start and the key is held
and the parking brake engaged. in START for many seconds,
Place the transmission in the Hold the clutch pedal down to the cranking stops after 15 seconds
proper gear. floor and start the engine. The to prevent cranking motor
Notice: The engine is designed vehicle will not start if the clutch damage. To prevent gear
to work with the electronics in pedal is not all the way down. damage, this system also
the vehicle. If you add electrical prevents cranking if the engine
Starting Procedure (Key Access)
parts or accessories, you could is already running. Engine
change the way the engine 1. With your foot off the accelerator cranking can be stopped by
operates. Before adding electrical pedal, turn the ignition key to turning the ignition switch
equipment, check with your START. When the engine starts, to ACC/ACCESSORY or
dealer. If you do not, the engine let go of the key. The idle speed LOCK/OFF.
might not perform properly. Any will go down as the engine Notice: Cranking the engine for
resulting damage would not be warms. Do not race the engine
long periods of time, by returning
covered by the vehicle warranty. immediately after starting it.
the key to the START position
Allow the oil to warm up and
Automatic Transmission immediately after cranking has
lubricate all moving parts.
ended, can overheat and damage
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or The vehicle has a the cranking motor, and drain the
N (Neutral). The engine will not start Computer-Controlled Cranking battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
in any other position. To restart the System. This feature assists in between each try, to let the
vehicle when it is already moving, starting the engine and protects cranking motor cool down.
use N (Neutral) only.
2. If the engine does not start after Starting Procedure (Keyless REPLACE BATTERY IN
five to 10 seconds, especially in Access) REMOTE KEY. The vehicle
very cold weather (below 0°F 1. If the vehicle has the keyless can still be driven. See
or −18°C), it could be flooded access system, the transmitter “Starting the Vehicle with a Low
with too much gasoline. Push must be in the vehicle. Put your Transmitter Battery” in Remote
the accelerator pedal all the way foot on the brake pedal and Keyless Entry (RKE) System
to the floor and hold it there as push the START/STOP button. Operation on page 2‑4 for more
you hold the key in START for a When the engine begins information.
maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at cranking, let go of the button. The vehicle has a
least 15 seconds between each Computer-Controlled Cranking
try, to allow the cranking motor The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not System. This feature assists in
to cool. When the engine starts, starting the engine and protects
let go of the key and accelerator. race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the components. If the START
If the vehicle starts briefly but button is pressed, and then
then stops again, repeat the engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and released when the engine
procedure. This clears the extra begins cranking, the engine
gasoline from the engine. Do not lubricate all moving parts.
will continue cranking for a few
race the engine immediately If the transmitter is not in seconds or until the vehicle
after starting it. Operate the the vehicle or something is starts. If the engine does not
engine and transmission gently interfering with the transmitter, start and the button is pressed
until the oil warms up and the Driver Information Center for many seconds, cranking will
lubricates all moving parts. (DIC) will display NO REMOTE be stopped after 15 seconds to
DETECTED. See Driver prevent cranking motor damage.
Information Center (DIC) on To prevent gear damage, this
page 5‑22 for more information. system also prevents cranking if
If the battery in the keyless the engine is already running.
access transmitter needs
replacing, the DIC displays
Engine cranking can be stopped When the engine starts, let go To Use The Engine Heater
by pressing the START button a of the key or button, and the
1. Turn off the engine.
second time. accelerator. If the vehicle starts
Notice: Cranking the engine for briefly but then stops again,
long periods of time, by returning do the same thing. This clears
the key to the START position the extra gasoline from the
immediately after cranking has engine. Do not race the engine
ended, can overheat and damage immediately after starting it.
the cranking motor, and drain the Operate the engine and
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds transmission gently until the oil
between each try, to let the warms up and lubricates all
cranking motor cool down. moving parts.
2. If the engine does not start after Engine Heater

five to 10 seconds, especially in
very cold weather (below −18°C The engine heater, if available, can
help in cold weather conditions at or 1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L Similar
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing below −18°C (0°F) for easier starting 2. Open the hood and unwrap the
the accelerator pedal all the way and better fuel economy during electrical cord. The electrical
to the floor and holding it there engine warm-up. Plug in the heater cord is located on the passenger
as you hold the key in START, at least four hours before starting side of the engine compartment,
or press the START button, for the vehicle. An internal thermostat behind the air cleaner.
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. in the plug end of the cord will
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
Wait at least 15 seconds prevent engine heater operation at
110-volt AC outlet.
between each try, to allow the temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
cranking motor to cool down.
Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING Power (RAP) (Automatic Transmission)
Plugging the cord into an These vehicle accessories may be
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
used for up to 10 minutes after the { WARNING
engine is turned off:
kind of extension cord could It can be dangerous to get out of
overheat and cause a fire. You
. Audio System the vehicle if the shift lever is not
could be seriously injured. Plug . Power Windows fully in P (Park) with the parking
the cord into a properly grounded . brake firmly set. The vehicle can
Sunroof
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. roll. If you have left the engine
If the cord will not reach, use a The power windows and sunroof running, the vehicle can move
heavy-duty three-prong extension will continue to work for up to suddenly. You or others could be
cord rated for at least 15 amps. 10 minutes or until any door is injured. To be sure the vehicle will
opened. The radio will work when not move, even when you are on
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ fairly level ground, use the steps
4. Before starting the engine, be ACCESSORY. Once the key is
sure to unplug and store the that follow. If you are pulling a
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
cord as it was before to keep trailer, see Driving Characteristics
the radio will continue to work for
it away from moving engine 10 minutes, or until the driver door is and Towing Tips on page 9‑48.
parts. If you do not it could be opened or the key is removed from
damaged. the ignition. Use this procedure to shift into
The length of time the heater should P (Park):
remain plugged in depends on 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
several factors. Ask a dealer in the set the parking brake.
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this. See Parking Brake on page 9‑35
2. Hold the button on the shift lever Release the button and check that Shifting out of Park
and push the lever toward the the shift lever cannot be moved out
front of the vehicle into P (Park). of P (Park). This vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transmission shift lock
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Torque Lock control system. The shift lock is
4. Remove the key. Torque lock is when the weight designed to:
Leaving the Vehicle with the of the vehicle puts too much . Prevent ignition key removal
force on the parking pawl in the unless the shift lever is in
Engine Running transmission. This happens when P (Park) with the shift lever
parking on a hill and shifting the button fully released.
{ WARNING transmission into P (Park) is not . Prevent movement of the shift
done properly and then it is difficult
It can be dangerous to leave the lever out of P (Park) unless the
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
vehicle with the engine running. ignition is in ON/RUN and the
torque lock, set the parking brake
The vehicle could move suddenly brake pedal is applied.
and then shift into P (Park). To find
if the shift lever is not fully in out how, see “Shifting Into Park” The shift lock release is always
P (Park) with the parking brake listed previously. functional except in the case of an
firmly set. And, if you leave the uncharged or low voltage (less than
If torque lock does occur, the
vehicle with the engine running, it 9‐volt) battery.
vehicle may need to be pushed
could overheat and even catch uphill by another vehicle to relieve If the vehicle has an uncharged
fire. You or others could be the parking pawl pressure, so you battery or a battery with low voltage,
injured. Do not leave the vehicle can shift out of P (Park). try charging or jump starting the
with the engine running. battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑78.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking
brake set.
To shift out of P (Park): lost power, the shift lever cannot be

1. Apply the brake pedal. moved from P (Park) unless the
shift lock manual release is
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. disengaged manually.
3. Press the shift lever button. To access the shift lock manual
4. Move the shift lever to the release:
desired position. 1. Apply the parking brake.
If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button 3. Insert a tool into the opening as
again. far as it will go and move the
shift lever out of P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the If P (Park) is selected again, the
desired position. shift lever will be locked again.
If the shift lever still cannot be Have the cause of the problem
moved from P (Park), see “Shift fixed by your dealer.
Lock Manual Release.” 4. Close the cover.
Shift Lock Manual Release 2. Open the cover to the right of
the shift lever.
The automatic transmission has an
electric park lock. The key must be
in the ON/RUN position, and the
brake pedal pressed so the shift
lever can be moved from the
P (Park) position. If the battery has
Parking Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, before getting out of { WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
R (Reverse), and firmly apply the Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
parking brake. Once the shift lever monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
has been placed into R (Reverse) seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
with the clutch pedal pressed in, can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF, and even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
release the clutch. coming into the vehicle:
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle . Drive it only with the windows
is pulling a trailer, see Driving
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑48. garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Parking over Things Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or
That Burn sounds strange or different.
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
{ WARNING . The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Things that can burn could touch . The vehicle exhaust system
hot exhaust parts under the has been modified, damaged
vehicle and ignite. Do not park or improperly repaired.
over papers, leaves, dry grass, (Continued)
or other things that can burn.
Running the Vehicle Follow the proper steps to be

While Parked
{ WARNING sure the vehicle will not move.
If the vehicle has an automatic
It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out transmission, see Shifting Into Park
engine running. But if you ever have of the vehicle if the automatic (Automatic Transmission) on
to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully page 9‑23. If the vehicle has a
in P (Park) with the parking brake manual transmission, see Parking
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the
on page 9‑26.
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you
is pulling a trailer, see Driving
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can page 9‑48.
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others
contains carbon monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
It can cause unconsciousness it is on fairly level ground, always
and even death. Never run the set the parking brake and move
engine in an enclosed area that the automatic transmission shift
has no fresh air ventilation. For lever to P (Park), or the manual
more information, see Engine transmission shift lever to Neutral.
Exhaust on page 9‑26.
Automatic WARNING (Continued)

Transmission Do not leave the vehicle when
The automatic transmission has a the engine is running unless you
shift lever located on the console have to. If you have left the
between the seats. engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on level ground, always
set the parking brake and move
English Shown, Metric Similar the shift lever to P (Park). See
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
P (Park): This position locks the Transmission) on page 9‑23.
drive wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move Make sure the shift lever is fully in
easily. P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
The selected gear is also shown in { WARNING transmission shift lock control
system. The regular brake must be
the instrument cluster.
It is dangerous to get out of the fully applied first and then the shift
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully lever button pressed before shifting
in P (Park) with the parking brake from P (Park) when the ignition key
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
(Continued) shift lever, then push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then The vehicle has an automatic the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
press the shift lever button and neutral shift feature which allows engine is not running at high
move the shift lever into another the transmission to automatically speed when shifting the vehicle.
gear. See Shifting out of Park on shift to N (Neutral) when the vehicle D (Drive): This position is for
page 9‑24. is stopped with a forward gear normal driving. It provides the best
R (Reverse): Use this gear to engaged. The reduced load on fuel economy. If more power is
back up. the engine improves vehicle fuel needed for passing, and the
economy. vehicle is:
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
{ WARNING . Going less than 56 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
transmission. The repairs would Shifting into a drive gear while the pedal about halfway down.
not be covered by the vehicle engine is running at high speed is . Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only dangerous. Unless your foot is more, push the accelerator all
after the vehicle is stopped. firmly on the brake pedal, the the way down.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to vehicle could move very rapidly. Notice: If the vehicle seems to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without You could lose control and hit accelerate slowly or not shift
damaging the transmission, see If people or objects. Do not shift gears when you go faster, and
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9. into a drive gear while the engine you continue to drive the vehicle
N (Neutral): In this position, the is running at high speed. that way, you could damage the
engine does not connect with the transmission. Have the vehicle
wheels. To restart the engine when Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) serviced right away.
the vehicle is already moving, or N (Neutral) with the engine
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use running at high speed may
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is damage the transmission. The
being towed. repairs would not be covered by
Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
All Models Except Fuel Economy
Model
Notice: Driving with the engine
at a high rpm without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), could damage the vehicle.
Always upshift when necessary
while using DSC.
DSC allows you to shift an 1. Move the shift lever from 2. Press the shift lever forward (+)
automatic transmission similar D (Drive) to the left into the (+) to upshift or rearward (−) to
to a manual transmission. or (−) manual position. downshift. An M and the current
gear will be displayed in the DIC.
While using the DSC feature, the
vehicle will have firmer, quicker
shifting. You can use this for
sport driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear
longer, or to downshift for more
power or engine braking.
The transmission will only allow Electronic Range Select 2. Press the shift lever forward (+)
you to shift into gears appropriate (ERS) Mode to upshift or rearward (−) to
for the vehicle speed and engine downshift. An M and the current
revolutions per minute (rpm). The Fuel Economy Model gear will be displayed in the DIC.
transmission will not automatically Notice: If you drive the vehicle When shifting to M (Manual Mode),
shift to the next lower gear if the at a high rpm without upshifting the transmission will shift to the
engine rpm is too high, nor to the while using Electronic Range range of the current gear. For this
next higher gear when the maximum Select (ERS), you could damage range, the highest gear available is
engine rpm is reached. the vehicle. Always upshift when displayed next to the M in the DIC.
If shifting is prevented for any necessary while using ERS. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
reason, the currently selected gear ERS allows for the selection of the on page 5‑22 for more information.
will flash multiple times, indicating range of gear positions. Use this All gears below that number are
that the transmission has not shifted mode when driving downhill or available to use. For example, when
gears. towing a trailer to limit the top 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,
While in the DSC mode, the gear and vehicle speed. The shift 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears
transmission will automatically position indicator within the Driver are shifted automatically. To shift to
downshift when the vehicle comes Information Center (DIC) will display 5 (Fifth) gear, press the shift lever
to a stop. This will allow for more a number next to the M indicating forward (+) to upshift or shift into
power during take-off. the highest available gear under D (Drive).
manual mode and the driving
When accelerating the vehicle from conditions when manual mode was
a stop in snowy and icy conditions, selected.
you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear allows the 1. Move the shift lever from
vehicle to gain more traction on D (Drive) to the left into the (+)
slippery surfaces. or (−) manual position.
M (Manual Mode) will prevent Manual Transmission Notice: Do not rest your foot on
shifting to a lower gear range if the the clutch pedal while driving or
engine speed is too high. If vehicle Shift Pattern while stopped. The pressure can
speed is not reduced within the time cause premature wear in the
allowed, the lower gear range shift clutch. The repairs would not be
will not be completed. Slow the covered by the vehicle warranty.
vehicle, then press the shift lever 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
rearward (−) to downshift to the fully to the pedal stop and shift into
desired lower gear range. 1 (First). Then slowly let up on the
While using the ERS, cruise control All Models Fuel Economy clutch pedal as you press the
can be used. Except Fuel Model accelerator pedal.
Economy Model
If you come to a complete stop and
These are the shift patterns for the it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put
six-speed manual transmissions. the shift lever in Neutral and let up
on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal
To operate the transmissions: back down. Then shift into 1 (First).
Notice: Do not rest your hand on 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
the shift lever while driving. The fully to the pedal stop as you let up
pressure could cause premature on the accelerator pedal and shift
wear in the transmission. The into 2 (Second). Then, slowly let up
repairs would not be covered by on the clutch pedal as you press the
the vehicle warranty. accelerator pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), To stop, let up on the accelerator into R (Reverse). Let up on the
and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third), pedal and press the brake pedal. clutch pedal slowly while pressing
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the Just before the vehicle stops, press the accelerator pedal.
same way you do for 2 (Second). the clutch pedal and the brake If the gear does not engage, shift
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as pedal, and shift to Neutral. the transmission to Neutral, release
you press the accelerator pedal. Neutral: Use this position when the clutch pedal and press it back
For the best fuel economy, use you start or idle the engine. The down. Repeat the gear selection.
6 (Sixth) gear whenever vehicle shift lever is in Neutral when it is
speed and driving conditions allow. centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.
{ WARNING
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
An up-shift light in the instrument
cluster indicates when to shift to the
next higher gear for the best fuel Notice: Do not skip gears
economy. while upshifting. This can
cause premature wear in the
During normal driving, upshifts transmission. The repairs would
should occur between 1,300 and not be covered by the vehicle
2,500 rpm, and downshifts should warranty.
occur between 1,500 and
1,000 rpm. R (Reverse): To back up, with the
vehicle at a complete stop, press
down the clutch pedal. Then pull up
the ring on the shift lever, and shift
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and suddenly slows or stops. Always
it becomes necessary to slam on leave enough room up ahead to
the brakes and continue braking stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake to avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
When the engine is started and the normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
checks itself. A momentary motor or
the driver steer around the obstacle
clicking noise might be heard while ABS allows the driver to steer and
while braking hard.
this test is going on, and it might brake at the same time. In many
even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
If there is a problem with ABS, this there will not be enough time to
warning light stays on. See Antilock apply the brakes if that vehicle
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑17.
Parking Brake To release the parking brake: If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
1. Hold the brake pedal down. is pulling a trailer, see Driving
2. Pull the parking brake handle up page 9‑48.
until you can press the release
button. Brake Assist
3. Hold the release button in as This vehicle has a brake assist
you move the brake handle all feature designed to assist the driver
the way down. in stopping or decreasing vehicle
Notice: Driving with the parking speed in emergency driving
brake on can overheat the brake conditions. This feature uses the
system and cause premature stability system hydraulic brake
wear or damage to brake system control module to supplement
parts. Make sure that the parking the power brake system under
To apply the parking brake, pull up brake is fully released and the conditions where the driver has
on the parking brake handle. It is brake warning light is off before quickly and forcefully applied the
not necessary to push in on the driving. brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
release button while applying the stop or slow down the vehicle. The
Driving with the parking brake
parking brake. If the ignition is in the stability system hydraulic brake
applied will cause a warning
ON/RUN position, the brake system control module increases brake
chime to sound and the RELEASE
warning light will come on. See pressure at each corner of the
PARKING BRAKE message to
Brake System Warning Light on vehicle until the ABS activates.
appear in the DIC. The message will
page 5‑16.
remain on until the parking brake is
released or the vehicle is stopped.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or Ride Control Systems

pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal Traction Control
as the driving situation dictates. System (TCS)
The brake assist feature will
The vehicle has a Traction Control
automatically disengage when TCS/StabiliTrak Light
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the d flashes to indicate that the
system operates if it senses that traction control system is active.
decreased.
one or both of the front wheels are
If there is a problem detected
spinning or beginning to lose
with TCS, SERVICE TRACTION
traction. When this happens,
CONTROL and SERVICE
the system brakes the spinning
STABILITRAK may be displayed on
wheel(s), and/or reduces engine
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
power to limit wheel spin.
See Vehicle Messages (Canada
The system may be heard or felt Uplevel and United States) on
while it is working, but this is page 5‑27 or Vehicle Messages
normal. (Canada Base Level) on page 5‑27.
TCS is on whenever the vehicle When this message is displayed
is started. To limit wheel spin, and d comes on and stays on,
especially in slippery road the vehicle is safe to drive but the
conditions, the system should system is not operational. Driving
always be left on. But, TCS can be should be adjusted accordingly.
turned off if needed.
If d comes on and stays on, reset If cruise control is being used when
the system: TCS activates, cruise control will
automatically disengage. Press the
1. Stop the vehicle. cruise control button to reengage
2. Turn the engine off and wait when road conditions allow. See
15 seconds. Cruise Control on page 9‑39.
TCS Off Light Adding non-GM accessories can
3. Start the engine.
TCS can be turned off by affect the vehicle's performance.
If d still comes on and stays on at a See Accessories and Modifications
pressing and releasing g. When
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see on page 10‑3 for more information.
your dealer for service. TCS is turned off, i comes on
A chime may also sound when the
and the system will not limit
wheel spin. Driving should be
StabiliTrak® System
light comes on steady. adjusted accordingly. Press and The vehicle has a vehicle stability
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake release g again to turn the system enhancement system called
or accelerate heavily when TCS is back on. StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
off. The vehicle's driveline could computer controlled system that
be damaged. It may be necessary to turn the assists with directional control of the
system off if the vehicle gets stuck vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
in sand, mud, or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See If the StabiliTrak activates when the
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9 for computer senses a difference
more information. See also Winter between the intended path, and the
Driving on page 9‑7 for information direction the vehicle is actually
on using TCS when driving in snowy traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
TCS/StabiliTrak Button or icy conditions. applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
g is located on the console. the vehicle in the intended direction.
StabiliTrak is on automatically (Canada Base Level) on page 5‑27.

whenever the vehicle is started. To When this message is displayed
assist with directional control of the and/or d comes on and stays on,
vehicle, the system should always the vehicle is safe to drive but the
be left on. system is not operational. Driving
should be adjusted accordingly.
StabiliTrak Off TCS Off Light
If d comes on and stays on, reset Light
the system:
1. Stop the vehicle. StabiliTrak can be turned off
if needed by pressing and
2. Turn the engine off and wait holding g until g and i come on the
TCS/StabiliTrak Light 15 seconds.
instrument panel. When StabiliTrak
When the stability control system 3. Start the engine. is turned off, the system will not
activates, d flashes on the assist with directional control of the
instrument panel. This also occurs If d still comes on and stays on at a vehicle or limit wheel spin. Driving
when traction control is activated. speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see should be adjusted accordingly.
A noise may be heard or vibration your dealer for service.
Press and release g again to turn
may be felt in the brake pedal. This
the system back on.
is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the intended direction. If cruise control is being used
when StabiliTrak activates, cruise
If there is a problem detected
control will automatically disengage.
with StabiliTrak, SERVICE
Press the cruise control button to
STABILITRAK is displayed on the reengage when road conditions
Driver Information Center (DIC). TCS/StabiliTrak Button
allow. See Cruise Control on
See Vehicle Messages (Canada g is located on the console. page 9‑39 for more information.
Uplevel and United States) on
page 5‑27 or Vehicle Messages
Cruise Control { WARNING

For vehicles with cruise control, the
vehicle can maintain a speed of Cruise control can be dangerous
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more where you cannot drive safely at
without keeping your foot on the a steady speed. So, do not use
accelerator. Cruise control does not the cruise control on winding
work at speeds below 40 km/h roads or in heavy traffic.
(25 mph). Cruise control can be dangerous
If the brakes are applied, the cruise on slippery roads. On such roads,
control shuts off. fast changes in tire traction can
The vehicle has a Traction Control cause excessive wheel slip, and
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak system you could lose control. Do not use
that begins to limit wheel spin while cruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
using cruise control and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):
See Traction Control System (TCS) Move the thumbwheel up to resume
on page 9‑36 or StabiliTrak® System a previously set speed or to
on page 9‑37. When road conditions accelerate.
allow you to safely use it again, the SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
cruise control can be turned on. thumbwheel down to set a speed or
to make the vehicle decelerate.
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control Increasing Speed While Using

. To slow down in small amounts,
Cruise Control move the thumbwheel toward
If the cruise button is on when not in SET/− briefly. Each time this is
use, it could get bumped and go into If the cruise control system is done, the vehicle goes about
cruise when not desired. Keep the already activated: 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
cruise control switch off when cruise . Move the thumbwheel up toward
is not being used. Passing Another Vehicle While
RES/+ and hold it until the
Using Cruise Control
1. Press 1. desired speed is reached, then
release it. Use the accelerator pedal to
2. Get to the speed desired. increase the vehicle speed. When
. To increase the speed in small
3. Move the thumbwheel down and you take your foot off the pedal, the
amounts, move the thumbwheel
release it. vehicle slows down to the previous
up toward RES/+ briefly and
set cruise control speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator then release it. Each time this is
pedal. done, the vehicle goes about Using Cruise Control on Hills
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Resuming a Set Speed How well the cruise control works
Reducing Speed While Using on hills depends upon the vehicle
If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control speed, load, and the steepness
desired speed and then the brakes of the hills. When going up steep
or clutch for manual transmissions If the cruise control system is
hills, you might have to step on
are applied, the cruise control is already activated:
the accelerator pedal to maintain
disengaged without erasing the set . Move the thumbwheel toward the vehicle speed. When going
speed from memory. SET/− and hold until the desired downhill, you might have to brake or
Once the vehicle reaches about lower speed is reached, then shift to a lower gear to maintain the
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move release it. vehicle speed. When the brakes
the thumbwheel up toward RES/+ are applied, the cruise control is
briefly. The vehicle returns to the disengaged.
speed selected previously and stays
there.
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection WARNING (Continued)

There are three ways to end cruise
control:
Systems URPA, always check behind the
. To disengage cruise control, vehicle and check all mirrors
Ultrasonic Parking Assist before backing.
step lightly on the brake pedal or
clutch for a manual transmission. For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
. Press * on the steering wheel. it assists the driver with parking How the System Works
. To turn off cruise control, and avoiding objects while in URPA comes on automatically
R (Reverse). URPA operates at when the shift lever is moved into
press 1 on the steering wheel.
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
Erasing Speed Memory The sensors on the rear bumper to indicate the system is working.
detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
The cruise control set speed is URPA operates only at speeds less
behind the vehicle, and at least
erased from memory if 1 is pressed than 8 km/h (5 mph).
20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
or if the ignition is turned off. An obstacle is indicated by audible
{ WARNING beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the
The URPA system does not vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, When the distance is less than
animals, or any other objects 30 cm (12 in), the beeping is a
located below the bumper or that continuous tone for five seconds.
are too close or too far from the
vehicle. To prevent injury, death,
or vehicle damage, even with
(Continued)
To be detected, objects must be at When the System Does Not

. The park assist sensors are
least 20 cm (8 in) off the ground and Seem to Work Properly covered by frost or ice. Frost or
below trunk level. Objects must also ice can form around and behind
be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear The following messages may be the sensors and may not always
bumper. The distance objects can displayed on the DIC: be seen; this can occur after
be detected may be less during SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: If washing the vehicle in cold
warmer or humid weather. this message occurs, take the weather. The message may not
vehicle to your dealer to repair the clear until the frost or ice has
Turning the System On and Off system. melted.
The URPA system can be turned PARK ASSIST Off: If the URPA
. An object was hanging out of the
on and off using the infotainment system does not activate due to a trunk during the last drive cycle.
system controls. See Vehicle temporary condition, the message Once the object is removed,
Personalization on page 5‑33 for displays on the DIC. This can occur URPA will return to normal
more information. under the following conditions: operation.
When the system is off, PARK . The driver has disabled the
. The bumper is damaged. Take
ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver system. the vehicle to your dealer to
Information Center (DIC). The repair the system.
message disappears after a short . The ultrasonic sensors are not
. Other conditions, such as
period of time. clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, vibrations from a jackhammer or
URPA defaults to the on setting ice, and slush. For cleaning the compression of air brakes on
each time the vehicle is started. instructions, see Exterior Care a very large truck, are affecting
on page 10‑84. system performance.
Fuel Gasoline Specifications

Use of the recommended fuel (U.S. and Canada Only)
is an important part of the proper At a minimum, gasoline should
maintenance of this vehicle. To help meet ASTM specification D 4814
keep the engine clean and maintain in the United States or CAN/
optimum vehicle performance, we CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
recommend the use of gasoline Some gasolines contain an
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent octane-enhancing additive called
Gasoline. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
Look for the TOP TIER label on the tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets against the use of gasolines
enhanced detergency standards containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
developed by auto companies. A list Recommended Fuel on page 9‑44 for additional
of marketers providing TOP TIER information.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
Detergent Gasoline can be found at a posted octane rating of 87 or
www.toptiergas.com. higher. If the octane rating is less California Fuel
than 87, an audible knocking noise, Requirements
commonly referred to as spark
If the vehicle is certified to meet
knock, might be heard when driving.
California Emissions Standards,
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
it is designed to operate on fuels
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
that meet California specifications.
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
See the underhood emission control To check the fuel availability, ask marketers providing TOP TIER
label. If this fuel is not available in an auto club, or contact a major oil Detergent Gasoline can be found at
states adopting California Emissions company that does business in the www.toptiergas.com.
Standards, the vehicle will operate country where you will be driving. For customers who do not use
satisfactorily on fuels meeting TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
federal specifications, but emission Fuel Additives regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel
control system performance might System Treatment PLUS, added to
be affected. The malfunction To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now the fuel tank at every engine oil
indicator lamp could turn on and the change, can help clean deposits
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system from fuel injectors and intake
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
page 5‑13. If this occurs, return to deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work PLUS is the only gasoline additive
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. recommended by General Motors.
If it is determined that the condition properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel. It is available at your dealer.
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the However, some gasolines contain Gasolines containing oxygenates,
vehicle warranty. only the minimum amount of such as ethers and ethanol, and
additive required to meet U.S. reformulated gasolines might be
Environmental Protection Agency available in your area. We
Fuels in Foreign regulations. To help keep fuel recommend that you use these
Countries injectors and intake valves clean gasolines, if they comply with the
Never use leaded gasoline or any and avoid problems due to dirty specifications described earlier.
other fuel not recommended in the injectors or valves, look for gasoline However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs that is advertised as TOP TIER other fuels containing more than
caused by use of improper fuel Detergent Gasoline. Look for the 15% ethanol must not be used in
would not be covered by the vehicle TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to vehicles that were not designed for
warranty. ensure gasoline meets enhanced those fuels.
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
Notice: This vehicle was not Filling the Tank

designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can { WARNING
corrode metal parts in the fuel Fuel vapor burns violently and a
system and also damage plastic
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
and rubber parts. That damage
To help avoid injuries to you and
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty. others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
Some gasolines that are island. Turn off the engine when
not reformulated for low refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
emissions can contain an or when refueling the vehicle. Do
octane-enhancing additive called not use cellular phones. Keep The tethered fuel cap is behind the
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese sparks, flames, and smoking fuel door on the vehicle's passenger
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant side. To open the fuel door, push the
materials away from fuel. Do not
where you buy gasoline whether the rearward center edge in and release
leave the fuel pump unattended
fuel contains MMT. We recommend and the door will open. Turn the fuel
against the use of such gasolines. when refueling the vehicle. This is
cap counterclockwise to remove. Do
Fuels containing MMT can reduce against the law in some places.
not release the cap too soon or it
spark plug life and affect emission Do not re-enter the vehicle while
will spring back. Reinstall the cap by
control system performance. The pumping fuel. Keep children away turning it clockwise until it clicks.
malfunction indicator lamp might from the fuel pump; never let
turn on. If this occurs, return to your children pump fuel.
dealer for service.
If the cap is not properly installed, Filling a Portable Fuel

the malfunction indicator lamp will { WARNING Container
come on. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 5‑13 for more If a fire starts while you are
information. refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
{ WARNING
by shutting off the pump or by Never fill a portable fuel container
{ WARNING notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle. Static
Fuel can spray out on you Leave the area immediately. electricity discharge from the
if you open the fuel cap too container can ignite the fuel
quickly. If you spill fuel and then Notice: If a new fuel cap is vapor. You can be badly burned
something ignites it, you could be needed, be sure to get the right and the vehicle damaged if this
badly burned. This spray can type of cap from your dealer. The occurs. To help avoid injury to you
happen if the tank is nearly full, wrong type of fuel cap might not and others:
and is more likely in hot weather. fit properly, might cause the . Dispense fuel only into
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait malfunction indicator lamp to approved containers.
for any hiss noise to stop. Then light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
. Do not fill a container while
unscrew the cap all the way. it is inside a vehicle, in a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑13. vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
Do not top off or overfill the tank. or on any surface other than
Wait a few seconds before removing the ground.
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted (Continued)
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑84.

. For information on equipment
WARNING (Continued) Towing to tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing For information on towing a disabled
with the inside of the fill Information vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
opening before operating the
Only use towing equipment that page 10‑81. For information on
nozzle. Contact should be towing the vehicle behind another
maintained until the filling is has been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering vehicle such as a motor home, see
complete. Recreational Vehicle Towing on
dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke while the vehicle for towing a trailer. page 10‑81.
pumping fuel.
See the following trailer towing
. Do not use a cellular phone information in this section:
while pumping fuel. . For information on driving
while towing a trailer, see
“Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. Do not tow a trailer at all during
Driving Characteristics Trailer Towing (Except Fuel
the first 1 600 km (1,000 mi) the
Economy Model) on page 9‑51 or
and Towing Tips Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy new vehicle is driven. The
Model) on page 9‑51. Trailering engine or other parts could be
{ WARNING changes handling, acceleration, damaged.
braking, durability, and fuel . During the first 800 km (500 mi)
The driver can lose control when economy. With the added weight, that a trailer is towed, do not
pulling a trailer if the correct the engine, transmission, wheel drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and
equipment is not used or the assemblies, and tires are forced do not make starts at full throttle.
vehicle is not driven properly. For to work harder and under greater This reduces wear on the
example, if the trailer is too loads. The trailer also adds wind vehicle.
heavy, the brakes may not work resistance, increasing the pulling
well — or even at all. The driver requirements. For safe trailering,
. Vehicles with automatic
correctly use the proper trailering transmissions can tow in
and passengers could be
equipment. D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)
seriously injured. The vehicle may
is recommended. See Manual
also be damaged; the resulting The following information has Mode on page 9‑30 for more
repairs would not be covered by important trailering tips and rules information. Use a lower gear if
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer for your safety and that of your the transmission shifts too often.
only if all the steps in this section passengers. Read this section For vehicles with a manual
have been followed. Ask your carefully before pulling a trailer. transmission, it is better not to
dealer for advice and information use the highest gear.
about towing a trailer with the Pulling a Trailer
. Use the cruise control when
vehicle. Here are some important points:
towing.
. There are many laws, including
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is speed limit restrictions that apply
equipped with the proper trailer to trailering. Check for legal
towing equipment. To identify the requirements with state or
trailering capacity of the vehicle, see provincial police.

. Obey speed limit restrictions. Towing with a Stability Control Backing Up
Do not drive faster than the System
maximum posted speed for Hold the bottom of the steering
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h When towing, the sound of the wheel with one hand. Then, to move
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the stability control system might be the trailer to the left, move that hand
vehicle. heard. The system is reacting to the to the left. To move the trailer to the
vehicle movement caused by the right, move your hand to the right.
Driving with a Trailer trailer, which mainly occurs during Always back up slowly and,
Towing a trailer requires experience. cornering. This is normal when if possible, have someone
Get familiar with handling and towing heavier trailers. guide you.
braking with the added trailer Following Distance Making Turns
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns
vehicle is by itself. vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the
driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with the
Check all trailer hitch parts and This can help to avoid situations vehicle. The vehicle could be
attachments, safety chains, that require heavy braking and damaged. Avoid making very
electrical connectors, lamps, tires, sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering.
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle Passing When turning with a trailer, make
and trailer moving and then apply wider turns than normal. Do this
More passing distance is needed so the trailer will not strike soft
the trailer brake controller by hand
when towing a trailer. Because the shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
to be sure the brakes are working.
rig is longer, it is necessary to go or other objects. Avoid jerky or
During the trip, check regularly to be much farther beyond the passed sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
sure that the load is secure, and the vehicle before returning to the lane. advance.
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Turn Signals When Towing a Vehicles with an automatic for a few minutes before turning the
Trailer transmission can tow in engine off. If the overheat warning
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode) comes on, see Engine Overheating
The arrows on the instrument panel is recommended. Shift the on page 10‑18.
flash whenever signaling a turn or transmission to a lower gear if the
lane change. Properly hooked up, transmission shifts too often under Parking on Hills
the trailer lamps also flash, telling heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
other drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes, or stopping.
For vehicles with a manual { WARNING
transmission, it is better not to use
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the highest gear. Parking the vehicle on a hill
the instrument panel flash for turns with the trailer attached can be
When towing at high altitude on dangerous. If something goes
even if the bulbs on the trailer are steep uphill grades, consider the
burned out. For this reason you may wrong, the rig could start to move.
following: Engine coolant will boil at
think other drivers are seeing the People can be injured, and both
a lower temperature than at normal
signal when they are not. It is altitudes. If the engine is turned off the vehicle and the trailer can be
important to check occasionally to immediately after towing at high damaged. When possible, always
be sure the trailer bulbs are still altitude on steep uphill grades, the park the rig on a flat surface.
working. vehicle may show signs similar to
Driving On Grades engine overheating. To avoid this, If parking the rig on a hill:
let the engine run while parked,
Reduce speed and shift to a preferably on level ground, with the 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
lower gear before starting down a automatic transmission in P (Park) not shift into P (Park) yet for
long or steep downgrade. If the for a few minutes before turning the vehicles with an automatic
transmission is not shifted down, the engine off. For vehicles with manual transmission, or into gear
brakes might have to be used so transmissions, let the engine run for vehicles with a manual
much that they would get hot and no while parked, preferably on level transmission. Turn the wheels
longer work well. ground, with the transmission out of into the curb if facing downhill or
gear and the parking brake applied, into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing (Fuel
under the trailer wheels. Towing Economy Model)
3. When the wheel chocks are in The vehicle needs service more
place, release the brake pedal The vehicle is neither designed nor
often when pulling a trailer. See this intended to tow a trailer.
until the chocks absorb the load. manual's Maintenance Schedule or
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in Trailer Towing (Except
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park) for vehicles with an trailer operation are automatic Fuel Economy Model)
automatic transmission or into transmission fluid, engine oil, axle Before pulling a trailer, there are
gear for vehicles with a manual lubricant, belts, cooling system, and three important considerations that
transmission. brake system. It is a good idea to have to do with weight:
inspect these before and during
5. Release the brake pedal. the trip. . The weight of the trailer.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all . The weight of the trailer tongue.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal hitch nuts and bolts are tight. . The total weight on your
while you: Engine Cooling When Trailer vehicle's tires.
1.1. Start the engine. Towing Weight of the Trailer
1.2. Shift into a gear. The cooling system may temporarily How heavy can a trailer safely be?
1.3. Release the parking brake. overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating It should never weigh more than
2. Let up on the brake pedal. on page 10‑18. 454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
It depends on how the rig is used. Weight of the Trailer Tongue

For example, speed, altitude, road
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
grades, outside temperature, and
an important weight to measure
how much the vehicle is used to pull
because it affects the total gross
a trailer are all important. It can
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
depend on any special equipment
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
on the vehicle, and the amount of
curb weight of the vehicle, any
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
cargo carried in it, and the people
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
who will be riding in the vehicle.
later in this section for more
If there are a lot of options,
information.
equipment, passengers, or cargo in
Maximum trailer weight is calculated the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
assuming only the driver is in the weight the vehicle can carry, which The trailer tongue (A) should weigh
tow vehicle and it has all the will also reduce the trailer weight the 10‐15 percent of the total loaded
required trailering equipment. vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, trailer weight (B).
The weight of additional optional the tongue load must be added to
equipment, passengers, and After loading the trailer, weigh
the GVW because the vehicle will
cargo in the tow vehicle must be the trailer and then the tongue,
be carrying that weight, too. See
subtracted from the maximum trailer separately, to see if the weights are
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10
weight. proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
Ask your dealer for trailering items around in the trailer.
information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's

. Will any holes be made in the Trailer Brakes
Tires body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there Does the trailer have its own
Be sure the vehicle's tires are are, seal the holes when the brakes? Be sure to read and follow
inflated to the upper limit for cold hitch is removed. If the holes the instructions for the trailer brakes
tires. These numbers can be found are not sealed, dirt, water, and so they are installed, adjusted, and
on the Tire and Loading Information deadly carbon monoxide (CO) maintained properly.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on from the exhaust can get into the Because the vehicle has antilock
page 9‑10. Make sure not to go vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
over the GVW limit for the vehicle, page 9‑26. brake system. If this is done, both
including the weight of the trailer brake systems will not work well,
tongue. Safety Chains
or at all.
Always attach chains between the
Towing Equipment vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
Hitches the trailer to help prevent the tongue
Use the correct hitch equipment. from contacting the road if it
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for becomes separated from the hitch.
assistance. Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
. The rear bumper on the vehicle
drag on the ground.
is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑30 and Adding
electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
you check with your dealer first. Vehicle on page 3‑30.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Bulb Replacement
General Information Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Overheated Engine Headlamps, Front Turn
California Proposition Protection Signal and Parking
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
California Perchlorate Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Accessories and Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-30
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-32
Vehicle Checks Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-25 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Doing Your Own Automatic Transmission Shift Electrical System
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Lock Control Function
Electrical System
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Engine Compartment Ignition Transmission Lock
Fuses and Circuit
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Park Brake and P (Park)
Engine Compartment Fuse
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Automatic Transmission Wiper Blade
Instrument Panel Fuse
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59 General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 For service and parts needs,
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Tire Sealant and visit your dealer. You will receive
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-42 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Storing the Tire Sealant and and supported service people.
Tire Terminology and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Genuine GM parts have one of
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 these marks:
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-77
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Jump Starting
Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Towing
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Recreational Vehicle
When It Is Time for New Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Appearance Care
Different Size Tires and Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Uniform Tire Quality Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition Accessories and Damage to vehicle components

resulting from modifications or the
65 Warning Modifications installation or use of non‐GM
Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer accessories or certified parts, including control
one, contain and/or emit chemicals making modifications to the vehicle module or software modifications, is
known to the State of California to can affect vehicle performance and not covered under the terms of the
cause cancer and birth defects or safety, including such things as vehicle warranty and may affect
other reproductive harm. Engine airbags, braking, stability, ride and remaining warranty coverage for
exhaust, many parts and systems, handling, emissions systems, affected parts.
many fluids, and some component aerodynamics, durability, and GM Accessories are designed to
wear by-products contain and/or electronic systems like antilock complement and function with other
emit these chemicals. brakes, traction control, and stability systems on the vehicle. See your
control. These accessories or dealer to accessorize the vehicle
California Perchlorate modifications could even cause using genuine GM Accessories
malfunction or damage not covered
Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty.
installed by a dealer technician.
Certain types of automotive Also, see Adding Equipment to the
applications, such as airbag Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, page 3‑30.
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service Hood

work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more To open the hood:
Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle
Service Work than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑11.
It can be dangerous to work on This vehicle has an airbag system.
your vehicle if you do not have Before attempting to do your own
the proper knowledge, service service work, see Servicing the
manual, tools, or parts. Always Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
follow owner manual procedures page 3‑30.
and consult the service manual
Keep a record with all parts receipts
for your vehicle before doing any and list the mileage and the date
service work. of any service work performed.
1. Pull up on the hood release
See Maintenance Records on
handle. It is located inside the
page 11‑15.
vehicle to the left of the steering
column.
Vehicle Care 10-5
To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then, lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from
the slot on the underside of the
hood and return the prop to its
retainer. The prop rod must click
into place when returning it to
the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and 3. Lift the hood and release the 2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)
push the secondary hood hood prop from its retainer, above the vehicle and release
release handle toward the driver located above the radiator. it so it fully latches. Check to
side of the vehicle. Securely place the hood prop make sure the hood is closed
into the slot on the underside of and repeat the process if
the hood. necessary.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
1.4L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on E. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
page 10‑13. See Jump Starting on See Jump Starting on
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See page 10‑78. page 10‑78.
“Checking Engine Oil” under F. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. J. Engine Compartment Fuse
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes Block on page 10‑34.
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan on page 10‑21 and Hydraulic K. Windshield Washer Fluid
(Out of View). See Cooling Clutch on page 10‑13. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
System on page 10‑15. G. Battery on page 10‑24 (Under Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When Cover). page 10‑20.
to Add Engine Oil” under H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑15.
10-8 Vehicle Care
1.8L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.

. Check the engine oil level
page 10‑13. See Jump Starting on regularly and maintain the
page 10‑78. proper oil level. See “Checking
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil” and “When to Add
“Checking Engine Oil” under J. Engine Compartment Fuse Engine Oil” in this section.
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. Block on page 10‑34.
. Change the engine oil at the
C. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of K. Windshield Washer Fluid appropriate time. See Engine Oil
View). See Cooling System on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer Life System on page 10‑11.
page 10‑15. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑20.
. Always dispose of engine oil
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When properly. See “What to Do with
to Add Engine Oil” under Used Oil” in this section.
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. Engine Oil
E. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. To ensure proper engine Checking Engine Oil
See Jump Starting on performance and long life, careful It is a good idea to check the engine
page 10‑78. attention must be paid to engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
oil. Following these simple, but get an accurate reading, the vehicle
F. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. important steps will help protect
See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes must be on level ground. The
your investment: engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
on page 10‑21 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 10‑13. . Always use engine oil approved loop. See Engine Compartment
to the proper specification and of Overview on page 10‑6 for the
G. Battery on page 10‑24 (Under the proper viscosity grade. See location of the engine oil dipstick.
Cover). “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” Obtaining an accurate oil level
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and in this section. reading is essential:
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 10‑15. 1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Checking the oil level too soon Notice: Do not add too much oil. Selecting the Right Engine Oil
after engine shutoff will not Oil levels above or below the
Selecting the right engine oil
provide an accurate oil level acceptable operating range
depends on both the proper oil
reading. shown on the dipstick are harmful
specification and viscosity grade.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it to the engine. If you find that
See Recommended Fluids and
with a paper towel or cloth, then you have an oil level above the
Lubricants on page 11‑12.
push it back in all the way. operating range, i.e., the engine
Remove it again, keeping the tip has so much oil that the oil level Specification
down, and check the level. gets above the cross-hatched
Use and ask for licensed engine
area that shows the proper
oils with the dexos1™ approved
When to Add Engine Oil operating range, the engine could
certification mark. Engine oils
be damaged. You should drain
meeting the requirements for the
out the excess oil or limit driving
vehicle should have the dexos1
of the vehicle and seek a service
approved certification mark. This
professional to remove the
certification mark indicates that the
excess amount of oil.
oil has been approved to the dexos1
See Engine Compartment Overview specification.
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
If the oil is below the cross-hatched engine oil fill cap.
area at the tip of the dipstick, add Add enough oil to put the level
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil somewhere in the proper operating
and then recheck the level. See range. Push the dipstick all the way
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in back in when through.
this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine Notice: Failure to use the
oil crankcase capacity, see recommended engine oil or
Capacities and Specifications on equivalent can result in engine
page 12‑2. damage not covered by the
Vehicle Care 10-11
vehicle warranty. Check with your Engine Oil Additives/Engine Used oil can be a threat to the
dealer or service provider on Oil Flushes environment. If you change your
whether the oil is approved to the own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
dexos1 specification. Do not add anything to the oil. The from the filter before disposal. Never
recommended oils with the dexos dispose of oil by putting it in the
Viscosity Grade specification and displaying the trash or pouring it on the ground,
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity dexos certification mark are all that into sewers, or into streams or
grade for the vehicle. Do not use is needed for good performance and bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
other viscosity grade oils such as engine protection. it to a place that collects used oil.
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. Engine oil system flushes are not
If in an area of extreme cold, where recommended and could cause Engine Oil Life System
the temperature falls below −20°F engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty. When to Change Engine Oil
(−29°C), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
be used. An oil of this viscosity What to Do with Used Oil This vehicle has a computer system
grade will provide easier cold that indicates when to change the
starting for the engine at extremely Used engine oil contains certain engine oil and filter. This is based
low temperatures. When selecting elements that can be unhealthy for on a combination of factors which
an oil of the appropriate viscosity your skin and could even cause include engine revolutions, engine
grade, always select an oil that cancer. Do not let used oil stay on temperature, and miles driven.
meets the dexos1 specification or your skin for very long. Clean your Based on driving conditions, the
equivalent. See “Specification” skin and nails with soap and water, mileage at which an oil change is
earlier in this section for more or a good hand cleaner. Wash or indicated can vary considerably. For
information. properly dispose of clothing or rags the oil life system to work properly,
containing used engine oil. See the the system must be reset every time
manufacturer's warnings about the the oil is changed.
use and disposal of oil products.
10-12 Vehicle Care
When the system has calculated since the last oil change. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
that oil life has been diminished, it Remember to reset the oil life DIC message or Code 82 DIC
indicates that an oil change is system whenever the oil is changed. message comes back on when the
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE vehicle is started, the engine oil life
OIL SOON DIC message or Code How to Reset the Engine Oil system has not reset. Repeat the
82 DIC message comes on. See Life System procedure.
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑29. Reset the system whenever the
Change the oil as soon as possible engine oil is changed so that the Automatic Transmission
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). system can calculate the next
It is possible that, if driving under
Fluid
engine oil change. To reset the
the best conditions, the oil life system: How to Check Automatic
system might indicate that an oil Transmission Fluid
change is not necessary for up to a 1. Using the DIC MENU button
year. The engine oil and filter must and thumbwheel, scroll until you It is not necessary to check
be changed at least once a year reach REMAINING OIL LIFE on the transmission fluid level.
and, at this time, the system must the DIC (: % for Canada). A transmission fluid leak is the
be reset. Your dealer has trained only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
2. Press the SET button to reset occurs, take the vehicle to your
service people who will perform this the oil life at 100%. When
work and reset the system. It is also dealer and have it repaired as soon
prompted, use the thumbwheel as possible.
important to check the oil regularly to highlight YES or NO. Press
over the course of an oil drain the SET/CLEAR button to The vehicle is not equipped with a
interval and keep it at the proper confirm. transmission fluid level dipstick.
level. There is a special procedure
Be careful not to reset the oil life for checking and changing the
If the system is ever reset display accidentally at any time
accidentally, the oil must be transmission fluid. Because this
other than after the oil is changed. procedure is difficult, this should be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) It cannot be reset accurately. done at the dealer. Contact the
dealer for additional information.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Change the fluid and filter at the Adding fluid will not correct a leak. side of the reservoir. The brake/
intervals listed in Maintenance A fluid loss in this system could hydraulic clutch fluid system should
Schedule on page 11‑3, and indicate a problem. Have the be closed and sealed.
be sure to use the fluid listed in system inspected and repaired. Do not remove the cap to check the
Recommended Fluids and fluid level or to top off the fluid level.
Lubricants on page 11‑12. When to Check and What
to Use Remove the cap only when
necessary to add the proper fluid
Manual Transmission until the level reaches the MIN line.
Fluid
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
How to Check Manual
Transmission Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
It is not necessary to check the engine air cleaner/filter.
manual transmission fluid level. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
A transmission fluid leak is the only reservoir cap has this symbol on it. When to Inspect the Engine Air
reason for fluid loss. If a leak The common brake/clutch fluid Cleaner/Filter
occurs, take the vehicle to your reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
dealer and have it repaired as soon fluid as indicated on the reservoir scheduled maintenance intervals
as possible. See Recommended cap. See Engine Compartment and replace it at the first oil change
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12 Overview on page 10‑6 for reservoir after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
for the proper fluid to use. location. interval. See Maintenance Schedule
Hydraulic Clutch How to Check and Add Fluid If you are driving in dusty/dirty
For vehicles with a manual Visually check the brake/clutch fluid conditions, inspect the filter at each
transmission, it is not necessary to reservoir to make sure the fluid level engine oil change.
regularly check brake/clutch fluid is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
unless there is a leak suspected.
10-14 Vehicle Care
How to Inspect the Engine Air 1.8L L4 Engine

Cleaner/Filter { WARNING
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, Operating the engine with the air
remove the filter from the vehicle cleaner/filter off can cause you
and lightly shake the filter to release or others to be burned. The air
loose dust and dirt. If the filter cleaner not only cleans the air; it
remains covered with dirt, a new helps to stop flames if the engine
filter is required. backfires. Use caution when
To inspect or replace the engine air working on the engine and do not
cleaner/filter: drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
1.4L L4 Engine
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
1. Remove the six screws that engine, which could damage it.
secure the cover on. Always have the air cleaner/filter
2. Lift off the cover. in place when you are driving.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly.
5. Install the cover by lowering it
over the filter and secure with
the six screws.
Vehicle Care 10-15
Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other than

{ WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
The cooling system allows the engine, heater core, or radiator
engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine
working temperature. under the hood can start up even coolant could require changing
when the engine is not running sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
and can cause injury. Keep or 24 months, whichever occurs
hands, clothing, and tools away first. Any repairs would not be
from any underhood electric fan. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant
other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, is filled with DEX-COOL engine
you can be burned. coolant. This coolant is designed to
1.4L L4 Engine Shown, remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
1.8L L4 Engine Similar Do not run the engine if there is a
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
leak. If you run the engine, it
A. Engine Cooling Fan (Out occurs first.
could lose all coolant. That could
of View) cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add
Pressure Cap fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑18.
10-16 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Never dispose of engine coolant
drinkable water and DEX-COOL by putting it in the trash, pouring it
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
on the ground, or into sewers,
streams, or bodies of water.
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: Have the coolant changed by an
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down authorized service center, familiar
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside with legal requirements regarding
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. used coolant disposal. This will help
the proper coolant mixture will. protect the environment and your
. Gives boiling protection up health.
The coolant warning system is set to 129°C (265°F), engine
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature. Checking Coolant
With plain water or the wrong
. Protects against rust and The vehicle must be on a level
mixture, the engine could get too
corrosion. surface when checking the coolant
hot but you would not get the
level.
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
could catch fire and you or Check to see if coolant is visible in
. Helps keep the proper engine the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
others could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable inside the coolant surge tank is
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant boiling, do not do anything else until
mixture is used, the engine could it cools down. If coolant is visible
overheat and be badly damaged. but the coolant level is not at the
The repair cost would not be indicated mark, add a 50/50 mixture
covered by the vehicle warranty. of clean, drinkable water and
Too much water in the mixture DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant
can freeze and crack the engine, surge tank, but be sure the cooling
radiator, heater core, and other system is cool before this is done.
parts. See Engine Overheating on
Vehicle Care 10-17
The coolant surge tank is located in

the engine compartment on the { WARNING { WARNING
driver side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on Steam and scalding liquids from a Adding only plain water or some
page 10‑6 for more information on hot cooling system can blow out other liquid to the cooling system
location. and burn you badly. They are can be dangerous. Plain water
under pressure, and if you turn and other liquids, can boil before
How to Add Coolant to the the coolant surge tank pressure the proper coolant mixture will.
Coolant Surge Tank cap — even a little — they can The coolant warning system is set
Notice: This vehicle has a come out at high speed. Never for the proper coolant mixture.
specific coolant fill procedure. turn the cap when the cooling With plain water or the wrong
Failure to follow this procedure system, including the coolant mixture, the engine could get too
could cause the engine to surge tank pressure cap, is hot. hot but you would not get the
overheat and be severely Wait for the cooling system and overheat warning. The engine
damaged. coolant surge tank pressure cap could catch fire and you or
If no problem is found, check to see to cool if you ever have to turn others could be burned. Use a
if coolant is visible in the coolant the pressure cap. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
surge tank. If coolant is visible but water and DEX-COOL coolant.
the coolant level is not at the
indicated level mark, add a Notice: In cold weather, water
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable can freeze and crack the engine,
water and DEX-COOL coolant at radiator, heater core and other
the coolant surge tank, but be sure parts. Use the recommended
the cooling system, including the coolant and the proper coolant
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is mixture.
cool before you do it.
10-18 Vehicle Care
surge tank pressure cap and DEX-COOL coolant mixture to

{ WARNING upper radiator hose, is no the coolant surge tank until the
longer hot. level reaches the indicated
You can be burned if you spill level mark.
coolant on hot engine parts. Turn the pressure cap slowly
Coolant contains ethylene glycol counterclockwise about 5. Replace the pressure cap.
and it will burn if the engine parts one-quarter of a turn. If you Be sure the pressure cap is
are hot enough. Do not spill hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. hand-tight.
coolant on a hot engine. This will allow any pressure Check the level in the coolant surge
still left to be vented out the tank when the cooling system has
discharge hose. cooled down. If the coolant is not at
2. Keep turning the pressure cap the proper level, repeat Steps 1
slowly and remove it. through 3 and reinstall the pressure
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with cap. If the coolant still is not at the
the proper DEX-COOL coolant proper level when the system cools
mixture to the indicated down again, see your dealer.
level mark.
Engine Overheating
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the The vehicle has several indicators
engine and let it run until the to warn of engine overheating.
upper radiator hose can be felt There is an engine coolant
getting hot. Watch out for the temperature gauge on the vehicle
1.4L L4 Engine Shown, engine cooling fan. instrument panel cluster. See
1.8L L4 Engine Similar By this time, the coolant level Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
1. Remove the coolant surge tank inside the coolant surge tank on page 5‑10.
pressure cap when the cooling may be lower. If the level is
system, including the coolant lower, add more of the proper
Vehicle Care 10-19
If the decision is made not to lift the If Steam Is Coming from the If No Steam Is Coming from
hood when this warning appears, Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment
get service help right away. See
Roadside Assistance Program on If an engine overheat warning is
page 13‑5.
{ WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
If the decision is made to lift the Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
hood, make sure the vehicle is can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the
parked on a level surface. just open the hood. Stay away vehicle:
Check to see if the engine cooling from the engine if you see or hear .
steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
fan is running. If the engine is
overheating, the fan should be off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving.
running. If it is not, do not continue the vehicle until it cools down. . Idles for long periods in traffic.
to run the engine and have the Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
. Tows a trailer.
vehicle serviced.
the hood. If the overheat warning is displayed
Notice: Engine damage from
with no sign of steam:
running the engine without If you keep driving when the
coolant is not covered by the engine is overheated, the liquids 1. Turn the air off.
warranty. in it can catch fire. You or others 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
could be badly burned. Stop the temperature and to the highest
engine if it overheats, and get out fan speed. Open the windows as
of the vehicle until the engine necessary.
is cool.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park)
or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
10-20 Vehicle Care
If the temperature overheat gauge Overheated Engine Notice: After driving in the
is no longer in the overheat zone overheated engine protection
or an overheat warning no longer
Protection operating mode, to avoid engine
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Operating Mode damage, allow the engine to cool
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly This emergency operating mode before attempting any repair.
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe allows the vehicle to be driven The engine oil will be severely
vehicle distance from the vehicle in to a safe place in an emergency degraded. Repair the cause of
front. If the warning does not come situation. If an overheated engine coolant loss, change the oil and
back on, continue to drive normally. condition exists, an overheat reset the oil life system. See
If the warning continues, pull protection mode which alternates Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
over, stop, and park the vehicle firing groups of cylinders helps
right away. prevent engine damage. In this Washer Fluid
mode, a significant loss in power
If there is no sign of steam, idle the What to Use
and engine performance will be
engine for three minutes while
noticed. The temperature gauge When windshield washer fluid
parked. If the warning is still
will indicate an overheat condition is needed, be sure to read the
displayed, turn off the engine until it
exists. Driving extended km (mi) manufacturer's instructions before
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
and/or towing a trailer in the use. If operating the vehicle in an
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
overheat protection mode should be area where the temperature may
following.
avoided. fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Adding Washer Fluid

. Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is { WARNING
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing The brake wear warning sound
occurs, which could means that soon the brakes will
damage the tank if it is not work well. That could lead to
completely full. a crash. When the brake wear
. Do not use engine coolant warning sound is heard, have the
(antifreeze) in the windshield vehicle serviced.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid washer. It can damage the
until the tank is full. See Engine windshield washer system Notice: Continuing to drive with
Compartment Overview on and paint. worn-out brake pads could result
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. in costly brake repair.
Notice
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates
This vehicle has front disc brakes can cause a brake squeal when the
. When using concentrated
and could have rear drum brakes or brakes are first applied or lightly
washer fluid, follow the
rear disc brakes. applied. This does not mean
manufacturer's instructions
something is wrong with the brakes.
for adding water. Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched Properly torqued wheel nuts are
. Do not mix water with
warning sound when the brake pads necessary to help prevent brake
ready-to-use washer fluid.
are worn and new pads are needed. pulsation. When tires are rotated,
Water can cause the solution
The sound can come and go or be inspect brake pads for wear and
to freeze and damage the
heard all the time the vehicle is evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
washer fluid tank and other
moving, except when applying the proper sequence to torque
parts of the washer system.
brake pedal firmly. specifications in Capacities and
Also, water does not clean as
Specifications on page 12‑2.
well as washer fluid.
10-22 Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid
they do not have wear indicators,
Every time the brakes are applied,
but if a rear brake rubbing noise is
with or without the vehicle moving,
heard, have the rear brake linings
the brakes adjust for wear.
inspected immediately. Rear brake
drums should be removed and Replacing Brake System Parts
inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing. The braking system on a vehicle is
Drum brakes have an inspection complex. Its many parts have to be
hole to inspect lining wear during of top quality and work well together The brake/clutch master cylinder
scheduled maintenance. When the if the vehicle is to have really good reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake
front brake pads are replaced, have braking. The vehicle was designed fluid as indicated on the reservoir
the rear brakes inspected, too. and tested with top-quality brake cap. See Engine Compartment
parts. When parts of the braking Overview on page 10‑6 for the
Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get location of the reservoir.
replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
There are only two reasons why the
Brake Pedal Travel If this is not done, the brakes might
brake fluid level in the reservoir
not work properly. For example,
See your dealer if the brake pedal might go down:
installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change . The brake fluid level goes down
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and because of normal brake lining
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes— for the worse. The wear. When new linings are
that brake service might be braking performance expected can installed, the fluid level goes
required. change in many other ways if the back up.
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Vehicle Care 10-23

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutch The fluid level should be above
hydraulic system can also cause { WARNING MIN. If it is not, have the brake/
a low fluid level. Have the brake/ clutch hydraulic system checked to
clutch hydraulic system fixed, If too much brake fluid is added, it see if there is a leak.
since a leak means that sooner can spill on the engine and burn,
or later the brakes will not if the engine is hot enough. You After work is done on the brake/
work well. or others could be burned, and clutch hydraulic system, make sure
the vehicle could be damaged. the level is above MIN but not over
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. the MAX mark.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. Add brake fluid only when
If fluid is added when the linings work is done on the brake/clutch When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a
are worn, there will be too much hydraulic system. low level, the brake warning light
fluid when new brake linings are comes on. See Brake System
installed. Add or remove fluid, as Warning Light on page 5‑16.
Checking Brake Fluid
necessary, only when work is done What to Add
on the brake/clutch hydraulic The brake/clutch fluid can be
system. checked without taking off the cap Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
by looking at the brake/clutch fluid from a sealed container. See
reservoir. Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Always clean the brake/clutch fluid

. If brake fluid is spilled on the Vehicle Storage
reservoir cap and the area around vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the damaged. Be careful not to { WARNING
reservoir. spill brake fluid on the Batteries have acid that can burn
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
you and gas that can explode.
immediately.
{ WARNING You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
With the wrong kind of fluid in the Battery page 10‑78 for tips on working
brake/clutch hydraulic system, the Refer to the replacement number on around a battery without
brakes might not work well. This the original battery label when a getting hurt.
could cause a crash. Always use new battery is needed.
the proper brake/clutch fluid.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
{ WARNING black, negative (−) cable from the
Notice battery to keep the battery from
Battery posts, terminals, and
. Using the wrong fluid can running down.
related accessories contain lead
badly damage brake/clutch and lead compounds, chemicals Extended Storage: Remove the
hydraulic system parts. For known to the State of California to black, negative (−) cable from the
example, just a few drops of battery or use a battery trickle
cause cancer and reproductive
mineral-based oil, such as charger.
harm. Wash hands after handling.
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Starter Switch Check 3. For automatic transmission Automatic Transmission

vehicles, try to start the engine
in each gear. The vehicle
Shift Lock Control
{ WARNING should start only in P (Park) or Function Check
When you are doing this N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
inspection, the vehicle could
in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
move suddenly. If the vehicle
For manual transmission When you are doing this
moves, you or others could be
vehicles, put the shift lever in inspection, the vehicle could
injured.
Neutral, push the clutch pedal move suddenly. If the vehicle
down halfway, and try to start moves, you or others could be
1. Before starting this check, be the engine. The vehicle should injured.
sure there is enough room start only when the clutch pedal
around the vehicle. is pushed down all the way to 1. Before starting this check, be
2. Firmly apply both the parking the floor. If the vehicle starts sure there is enough room
brake and the regular brake. when the clutch pedal is not around the vehicle. It should be
See Parking Brake on pushed all the way down, parked on a level surface.
page 9‑35. contact your dealer for service.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Do not use the accelerator See Parking Brake on
pedal, and be ready to turn off page 9‑35.
the engine immediately if it
starts. Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
10-26 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)
3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift
regular brake, try to move the to P (Park). Then release the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { WARNING parking brake followed by the
normal effort. If the shift lever regular brake.
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
Contact your dealer if service is
your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move. required.
You or others could be injured
Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
While parked, and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear or cracking.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to brake at once should the vehicle See Maintenance Schedule on
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move. page 11‑3 for more information.
position. Replacement blades come in
. For automatic transmission Park on a fairly steep hill, with the different types and are removed
vehicles, the ignition should turn vehicle facing downhill. Keeping in different ways. For proper
to LOCK/OFF only when the your foot on the regular brake, set windshield wiper blade length
shift lever is in P (Park). The the parking brake. and type, see Maintenance
ignition key should come out Replacement Parts on page 11‑14.
only in LOCK/OFF.
. To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine Notice: Allowing the wiper arm to
. For manual transmission running and the transmission in touch the windshield when no
vehicles, the ignition key should N (Neutral), slowly remove foot wiper blade is installed could
come out only in LOCK/OFF. pressure from the regular brake damage the windshield. Any
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is damage that occurs would not be
Contact your dealer if service is
required. held by the parking brake only.
Vehicle Care 10-27
covered by your warranty. Do not 3. With the latch open, pull the Headlamp Aiming
allow the wiper arm to touch the wiper blade down toward the
windshield. windshield far enough to release Headlamp aim has been preset at
it from the J-hooked end of the the factory and should need no
To replace the windshield wiper
wiper arm. further adjustment.
blade:
4. Remove the wiper blade. However, if the vehicle is damaged
1. Pull the wiper assembly away
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
from the windshield. Allowing the wiper blade arm to
be affected. Aim adjustment to the
touch the windshield when no
low-beam headlamps may be
wiper blade is installed could
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
damage the windshield. Any
their high-beam headlamps at you
damage that occurs would not
(for vertical aim).
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not allow the wiper If the headlamps need to be
blade to touch the windshield. re-aimed, it is recommended that
the vehicle be taken to a dealer for
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 for
service.
wiper blade replacement.
2. Lift up on the plastic latch in the

middle of the wiper blade where
the wiper arm attaches.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn High‐Beam Headlamp/

Signal and Parking Low‐Beam Headlamp and DRL
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Lamps 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑33. page 10‑4.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
A. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

2. Remove the connector
B. High‐Beam Headlamp/
retaining tab (A).
Low‐Beam Headlamp and DRL
3. Disconnect the wiring harness
connector from the bulb (C)
by pressing the connector
release (B) and pulling
straight back.
Vehicle Care 10-29
4. Remove the bulb (C) from the Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

headlamp assembly by turning
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
counterclockwise and pulling
page 10‑4.
straight back.
5. Install the new bulb in the
headlamp assembly by turning
clockwise.
6. Install the wiring harness
connector to the bulb. Be sure
the connector release (B) locks
into place.
7. Install the connector 3. Remove the bulb (A) from the
retaining tab (A). bulb socket.
4. Install the new bulb in the bulb
socket.
2. Remove the parking/turn signal 5. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp bulb socket from the headlamp assembly by turning
headlamp assembly by turning clockwise.
counterclockwise.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps
2. Remove the trunk deck trim 4. Remove the bulb from the
cover (A). socket (A).
3. Remove the bulb socket (B) by 5. Install the new bulb in the bulb
turning counterclockwise and socket.
Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamps pulling straight out. 6. Install the bulb socket by turning
1. Open the trunk. clockwise.
7. Install the trunk deck trim cover.
Vehicle Care 10-31
To replace any one of these bulbs:

Stoplamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal,
Back‐up, and Rear
Sidemarker Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
A. Back-up Lamp 3. Remove the two screws that

B. Stoplamp/Taillamp secure the taillamp assembly.
C. Turn Signal Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
2. Open the two screw covers.

10-32 Vehicle Care
8. Install the taillamp assembly and

tighten the two screws.
9. Close the two screw covers.
License Plate Lamp

To replace the license plate
lamp bulb:
4. Remove the taillamp assembly A. Sidemarker Lamp

by pulling it straight back. B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
D. Back-up Lamp
5. Remove the bulb socket from
the taillamp assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
6. Install a new bulb into the bulb 1. Remove the two screws from the
socket. license plate lamp assembly.
7. Install the bulb socket into the
taillamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Replacement Bulbs Electrical System

Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number Electrical System
Back-Up Lamp 921K Overload
Front and Rear The vehicle has fuses and circuit
194 breakers to protect against an
Sidemarker
electrical system overload.
Front Parking/Turn
7444NA When the current electrical load is
Signal Lamp
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
High‐Beam/ and closes, protecting the circuit
Low‐Bean and H13LL until the current load returns to
2. Turn and pull the license plate DRL Headlamp normal or the problem is fixed.
lamp assembly down. This greatly reduces the chance of
License Plate Lamp W5W LL
3. Turn the bulb socket circuit overload and fire caused by
Rear Turn electrical problems.
counterclockwise and pull the 7443NA
Signal Lamp
bulb straight out of the socket. Fuses and circuit breakers protect
4. Push the new bulb into the Stoplamp/Taillamp 3057K LCP power devices in the vehicle.
socket. Replace a bad fuse with a new one
For replacement bulbs not listed
5. Install the bulb socket by turning here, contact your dealer. of the identical size and rating.
clockwise into the license plate If there is a problem on the road
lamp assembly. and a fuse needs to be replaced,
6. Replace the license plate lamp the same amperage fuse can be
assembly by using the two borrowed. Choose some feature of
screws to secure. the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment

An electrical overload may cause Breakers Fuse Block
the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
some cases to remain off. Have
protected from short circuits by a
the headlamp wiring checked right
combination of fuses and circuit
away if the lamps go on and off or
breakers. This greatly reduces the
remain off.
chance of damage caused by
Windshield Wipers electrical problems.
If the wiper motor overheats due to To check a fuse, look at the
heavy snow or ice, the windshield silver-colored band inside the fuse.
wipers will stop until the motor cools If the band is broken or melted,
and will then restart. replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
Although the circuit is protected identical size and rating.
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may Fuses of the same amperage can To remove the fuse block cover,
cause wiper linkage damage. be temporarily borrowed from squeeze the clips and swing it up.
Always clear ice and heavy snow another fuse location, if a fuse goes
from the windshield before using the out. Replace the fuse as soon as Notice: Spilling liquid on any
windshield wipers. possible. electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
If the overload is caused by an To identify and check fuses, circuit keep the covers on any electrical
electrical problem and not snow or breakers, and relays, see Engine component.
ice, be sure to get it fixed. Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑34 and Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 10‑38.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Mini Fuses Usage

Canister Vent
4
Solenoid
5 Ignition
7 Not Used
8 Fuel Injection
Fuel Injection/
9
Ignition System
Engine Control
10
Module
11 Lambda Sensor
Canister Vent
13
Solenoid
Engine Compartment Fuse Block 14 Not Used
15 Rear Wiper
The vehicle may not be equipped Mini Fuses Usage
with all of the fuses, relays, and Ignition/Air Quality
Transmission 16
features shown. 1 Sensor/Aero‐Shutter
Control Module
17 Ignition/Airbag
Engine Control
2 18 Fuel Control Module
Module
3 Not Used 19 Not Used
20 Fuel Pump
10-36 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

23 Not Used 47 Lambda Sensor Rear Window
63
Sensor
29 Not Used 48 Fog Lights
64 Air Quality Sensor
Antilock Brake 49 Not Used
30
System 65 Rear Fog Lamp
50 Not Used
Body Control 66 Rear Washer
31 51 Horn
Module
Fuel System Control
52 Ignition 67
Body Control Module
32
Module Automatic Dimming
53 68 Not Used
Rearview Mirror
33 Front Seat Heating
Battery Voltage
Light Switch/Light 69
Sunroof 54 Sensor
34 Control
(If Equipped)
70 Not Used
55 Mirror Folding
Infotainment
35 71 Not Used
System/Amplifier 56 Windshield Washer
36 Not Used Steering J‐Case Usage
57
Column Lock Fuses
High Beam
37
Right Side 58 Not Used 6 Front Wipers
38 High Beam Left Side 60 Heated Mirror 12 Starter Solenoid
39 Not Used 61 Heated Mirror Rear Power
21
40 Not Used 62 Air Conditioning Windows
46 Cooling Fan 22 Not Used
Vehicle Care 10-37
J‐Case Usage Micro Usage HC Relays Usage

Fuses Relays
9 Cooling Fan K2
Front Power 1 A/C Clutch
24 13 Cooling Fan K1
Windows
2 Starter Solenoid
Electronic Mini Relays Usage
25 4 Front Wiper Speed
Vacuum Pump
5 Front Wiper On 7 Ignition 87 Main
Antilock Brake
26 15 Ignition 15
System Pump 6 Not Used
Electronic Key 10 Cooling Fan K3 16 Not Used
27
System/PEPS 17 Not Used
12 Cooling Fan K3
Rear Window 14 Not Used
28
Defogger
41 Not Used U‐Micro Usage
42 Cooling Fan K2 Relays
43 Not Used 3 Cooling Fan K7
44 Not Used 8 Fuel Pump
45 Cooling Fan K1 11 Not Used
59 Not Used
10-38 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse Fuses Usage

Block Infotainment
1 System/Hands‐free
Phone
2 Not Used
Body Control
3
Module
4 Infotainment System
Information Display/
5
Parking Assist
6 Cigarette Lighter
7 Power Outlet
The instrument panel fuse block is Body Control
8
in the driver side of the instrument Module
panel. To access the fuses:
Body Control
1. Open the fuse block cover by 9
Module
pulling out at the top.
Body Control
2. Remove the lower edge of the 10
Module
cover.
3. Remove the cover. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
To reinstall the cover, reverse the The vehicle may not be equipped
steps above. with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-39
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

11 Interior Fan 18 Not Used Body Control
24
Module
12 Not Used 19 Not Used
Steering
13 Power Seat 20 Not Used 25
Column Lock
Diagnostic 21 Instrument Cluster
14 26 Not Used
Connector
Ignition/Electronic
22
15 Airbag Key System Relays Usage
Central Locking Body Control 1 Trunk Open
16 23
System/Tailgate Module
2 Logistics Module
Air Conditioning
17 3 RAP Relay
System
10-40 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
See the warranty manual for maintain the recommended the tires.
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
warranty and where to get should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
service. For additional tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact— such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure. Winter Tires
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a Consider installing winter tires on
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly the vehicle if frequent driving on
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them. snow or ice covered roads is
cause overheating as a result expected. All season tires provide
. Replace any tires that have good overall performance on most
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a surfaces, but they may not offer
with potholes, curbs, etc. the traction or the same level of
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑10. (Continued) performance as winter tires on snow
or ice covered roads.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-41
Winter tires, in general, are Winter tires with the same speed Notice: Low‐profile tires are
designed for increased traction on rating as the original equipment tires more susceptible to damage
snow and ice covered roads. With may not be available for H, V, W, Y, from road hazards or curb
winter tires, there may be decreased and ZR speed rated tires. If winter impact than standard profile
dry road traction, increased road tires with a lower speed rating are
tires. Tire and/or wheel
noise, and shorter tread life. After chosen, never exceed the tire's
changing to winter tires, be alert for maximum speed capability. assembly damage can occur
changes in vehicle handling and when coming into contact
braking. Low-Profile Tires with road hazards like,
potholes, or sharp edged
See your dealer for details If the vehicle has P225/45R18
regarding winter tire availability and
objects, or when sliding into a
size tires, they are classified as curb. The warranty does not
proper tire selection. Also, see
low‐profile tires. These tires are cover this type of damage.
Buying New Tires on page 10‑55.
designed for very responsive Keep tires set to the correct
If using snow tires: driving on wet or dry pavement, inflation pressure and, when
. Use tires of the same brand and however, may produce more possible, avoid contact with
tread type on all four wheel road noise and tend to wear curbs, potholes, and other
positions. faster. road hazards.
. Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the Tire Identification Number
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (TIN). The TIN shows the
Useful information about a tire is section for more detail. manufacturer and plant code,
molded into its sidewall. The tire size, and date the tire was
examples show a typical (B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is
passenger vehicle tire and a molded onto both sides of the
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may
GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture.
criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in
GM's TPC specifications meet the sidewall and under the tread.
or exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire
(C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to
Transportation): The grade tires based on three
Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear,
(DOT) code indicates that traction, and temperature
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example the tire is in compliance resistance. For more information
with the U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 10‑57.
a combination of letters and Safety Standards.
numbers used to define a (G) Maximum Cold Inflation
particular tire's width, height, (D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load
aspect ratio, construction type, (TIN): The letters and numbers that can be carried and the
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to
of Transportation) code are the support that load.
Vehicle Care 10-43
compact spare tire, see information on tire pressure and

Compact Spare Tire on inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 10‑77 and If a Tire Goes page 10‑47.
Flat on page 10‑60. (F) Tire Size: A combination of
(C) Tire Identification Number letters and numbers define a
(TIN): The letters and numbers tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
following the DOT (Department construction type, and service
of Transportation) code are description. The letter T as the
the Tire Identification Number first character in the tire size
(TIN). The TIN shows the means the tire is for temporary
manufacturer and plant code, use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example tire size, and date the tire was (G) TPC Spec (Tire
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type manufactured. The TIN is Performance Criteria
of cord and number of plies in molded onto both sides of the Specification): Original
the sidewall and under the tread. tire, although only one side may equipment tires designed to
have the date of manufacture. GM's specific tire performance
(B) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary (D) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification
use tire has a tread life of Load Limit: Maximum load code molded onto the sidewall.
approximately 5 000 km that can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet
(3,000 mi) and should not be maximum pressure needed to or exceed all federal safety
driven at speeds over 105 km/h support that load. guidelines.
(65 mph). The compact spare (E) Tire Inflation: The
tire is for emergency use when a temporary use tire or compact
regular road tire has lost air and spare tire should be inflated to
gone flat. If the vehicle has a 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
10-44 Vehicle Care
Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit is certified to carry. The speed
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
The following is an example of a For example, if the tire size
typical passenger vehicle aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
tire size. item C of the illustration, it would Definitions
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide. Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
(D) Construction Code: A outward on each square inch
letter code is used to indicate of the tire. Air pressure is
the type of ply construction in expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
the tire. The letter R means or psi (pounds per square inch).
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or Accessory Weight: The
The United States version of a combined weight of optional
metric tire sizing system. The bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply accessories. Some examples
letter P as the first character in of optional accessories are
the tire size means a passenger construction.
automatic transmission, power
vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of steering, power brakes, power
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air
and Rim Association. (F) Service Description: These conditioning.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width.
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
Vehicle Care 10-45
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
cords that is located between oil, and coolant, but without Rating for the rear axle. See
the plies and the tread. Cords passengers and cargo. Vehicle Load Limits on
may be made from steel or other DOT Markings: A code molded page 9‑10.
reinforcing materials. into the sidewall of a tire Intended Outboard Sidewall :
Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in The side of an asymmetrical tire,
steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S. that must always face outward
cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation when mounted on a vehicle.
the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure.
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
alternate angles less than tire used on light duty trucks and
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer, some multipurpose passenger
the tread. vehicles.
production plant, brand, and
Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production. Load Index: An assigned
amount of air pressure in a tire, number ranging from 1 to 279
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits that corresponds to the load
or psi (pounds per square inch) carrying capacity of a tire.
before a tire has built up heat on page 9‑10.
from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure:
on page 10‑47. Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated.
Curb Weight: The weight of a The maximum air pressure is
motor vehicle with standard and page 9‑10.
molded onto the sidewall.
optional equipment including the
10-46 Vehicle Care
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is Sidewall: The portion of a tire
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same between the tread and the bead.
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall Speed Rating: An
pressure for that tire. of the tire. alphanumeric code assigned to
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A a tire indicating the maximum
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and speed at which a tire can
weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and operate.
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles. Traction: The friction between
production options weight. Recommended Inflation the tire and the road surface.
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle The amount of grip provided.
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended Tread: The portion of a tire
is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown that comes into contact with
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle on the tire placard. See Tire the road.
Load Limits on page 9‑10. Pressure on page 10‑47 and
Vehicle Load Limits on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
Occupant Distribution : bands, sometimes called wear
Designated seating positions. page 9‑10.
bars, that show across the tread
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic of a tire when only 1.6 mm
side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at When It Is Time for New Tires
outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of on page 10‑54.
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire
white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated.
Vehicle Care 10-47
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label . Premature or

Grading Standards): A tire permanently attached to a irregular wear.
information system that provides vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling.
consumers with ratings for a capacity weight and the
tire's traction, temperature, original equipment tire size
. Reduced fuel economy.
and treadwear. Ratings and recommended inflation Overinflated tires, or tires that
are determined by tire pressure. See “Tire and Loading have too much air, can
manufacturers using Information Label” under Vehicle result in:
government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9‑10. . Unusual wear.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure . Poor handling.
Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount
. Rough ride.
page 10‑57. of air pressure to operate . Needless damage from
Vehicle Capacity Weight: effectively. road hazards.
The number of designated Notice: Neither tire
seating positions multiplied by The Tire and Loading
underinflation nor Information label on the
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated overinflation is good. vehicle indicates the original
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Underinflated tires, or tires
Limits on page 9‑10. equipment tires and the correct
that do not have enough air, cold tire inflation pressures. The
Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in: recommended pressure is the
Tire: Load on an individual tire . Tire overloading and minimum air pressure needed to
due to curb weight, accessory overheating which could support the vehicle's maximum
weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout. load carrying capacity.
cargo weight.
10-48 Vehicle Care
For additional information How to Check Recheck the tire pressure with
regarding how much weight Use a good quality pocket-type the tire gauge.
the vehicle can carry, and an gauge to check tire pressure. Return the valve caps on the
example of the Tire and Loading Proper tire inflation cannot be valve stems to prevent leaks
Information label, see Vehicle determined by looking at the tire. and keep out dirt and moisture.
Load Limits on page 9‑10. How Check the tire inflation pressure
the vehicle is loaded affects when the tires are cold, meaning Tire Pressure Monitor
vehicle handling and ride the vehicle has not been driven
comfort. Never load the vehicle System
for at least three hours or no
with more weight than it was The Tire Pressure Monitor System
more than 1.6 km (1 mi). (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the technology to check tire pressure
When to Check tire valve stem. Press the tire levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
Check the tires once a month or gauge firmly onto the valve to the air pressure in your tires and
get a pressure measurement. transmit tire pressure readings to a
more. Do not forget the compact
If the cold tire inflation pressure receiver located in the vehicle.
spare tire, if the vehicle has one.
The cold compact spare should matches the recommended Each tire, including the spare
be at 420 kPa (60 psi). For pressure on the Tire and (if provided), should be checked
Loading Information label, no monthly when cold and inflated to
additional information regarding
further adjustment is necessary. the inflation pressure recommended
the compact spare tire, see by the vehicle manufacturer on the
Compact Spare Tire on If the inflation pressure is low, vehicle placard or tire inflation
page 10‑77. add air until the recommended pressure label. (If your vehicle has
pressure is reached. If the tires of a different size than the size
inflation pressure is high, press indicated on the vehicle placard or
on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve to release air.
Vehicle Care 10-49
tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger Always check the TPMS malfunction
should determine the proper tire illumination of the TPMS low tire telltale after replacing one or more
inflation pressure for those tires.) pressure telltale. tires or wheels on your vehicle to
As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been ensure that the replacement or
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction alternate tires and wheels allow the
tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the TPMS to continue to function
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly. properly.
pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Tire Pressure Monitor
more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure Operation on page 10‑50 for
under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a additional information.
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then Federal Communications
pressure telltale illuminates, you Commission (FCC) Rules and
should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon with Industry Canada
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Standards
a significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists. See Radio Frequency Statement on
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is page 13‑15 for information
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be regarding Part 15 of the Federal
also reduces fuel efficiency and able to detect or signal low tire Communications Commission (FCC)
tire tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS Rules and with Industry Canada
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
ability. of reasons, including the installation
Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or
not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
10-50 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure inflation pressure for the tires when
shown on the Tire and Loading they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Operation Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10, for an example
This vehicle may have a Tire Limits on page 9‑10. of the Tire and Loading Information
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). A message to check the pressure in label and its location. Also see Tire
The TPMS is designed to warn the a specific tire displays in the Driver Pressure on page 10‑47.
driver when a low tire pressure Information Center (DIC) display. The TPMS can warn about a
condition exists. TPMS sensors are The low tire pressure warning light low tire pressure condition but it
mounted onto each tire and wheel and the DIC warning message come does not replace normal tire
assembly, excluding the spare tire on at each ignition cycle until the maintenance. See Tire Inspection
and wheel assembly. The TPMS tires are inflated to the correct on page 10‑53, Tire Rotation on
sensors monitor the air pressure in inflation pressure. Using the DIC, page 10‑53 and Tires on
the tires and transmit the tire tire pressure levels can be viewed. page 10‑40.
pressure readings to a receiver For additional information and
located in the vehicle. Notice: Tire sealant materials are
details about the DIC operation and not all the same. A non-approved
displays see Driver Information tire sealant could damage the
Center (DIC) on page 5‑22. TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
The low tire pressure warning light damage caused by using an
may come on in cool weather when incorrect tire sealant is not
the vehicle is first started, and then covered by the vehicle
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This warranty. Always use only
could be an early indicator that the the GM-approved tire sealant
When a low tire pressure condition air pressure is getting low and must available through your dealer or
is detected, the TPMS illuminates be inflated to the proper pressure. included in the vehicle.
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster. A Tire and Loading Information label Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
If the warning light comes on, stop shows the size of the original use a GM-approved liquid tire
as soon as possible and inflate the equipment tires and the correct sealant. Using non-approved tire
Vehicle Care 10-51
sealants could damage the TPMS replaced and the sensor

. Replacement tires or wheels do
sensors. See Tire Sealant and matching process is performed not match the original equipment
Compressor Kit on page 10‑62 for successfully. See "TPMS Sensor tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
information regarding the inflator kit Matching Process" later in this other than those recommended
materials and instructions. section. could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching New Tires on page 10‑55.
Message process was not done or
not completed successfully
. Operating electronic devices or
The TPMS will not function properly after rotating the tires. The being near facilities using radio
if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC wave frequencies similar to the
are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after TPMS could cause the TPMS
system detects a malfunction, the successfully completing the sensors to malfunction.
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process. See If the TPMS is not functioning
about one minute and then stays on "TPMS Sensor Matching properly, it cannot detect or signal a
for the remainder of the ignition Process" later in this section. low tire condition. See your dealer
cycle. A DIC warning message also . for service if the TPMS malfunction
displays. The malfunction light and One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC light and DIC message come on
DIC warning message come on at and stay on.
each ignition cycle until the problem message and the malfunction
is corrected. Some of the conditions light should go off when the
that can cause these to come TPMS sensors are installed and
on are: the sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
. One of the road tires has been your dealer for service.
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction
light and DIC message should
go off after the road tire is
10-52 Vehicle Care
TPMS Sensor Matching The TPMS sensor matching 7. Start with the driver side
Process process is: front tire.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique 1. Set the parking brake. 8. Place the relearn tool against
identification code. The identification 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the tire sidewall, near the valve
code needs to be matched to a new the engine off. stem. Then press the button
tire/wheel position after rotating the to activate the TPMS sensor.
tires or replacing one or more of the 3. Use the MENU button to select A horn chirp confirms that the
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor the Vehicle Information menu sensor identification code has
matching process should also be in the Driver Information been matched to this tire and
performed after replacing a spare Center (DIC). wheel position.
tire with a road tire containing the 4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to 9. Proceed to the passenger
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light the Tire Pressure Menu item side front tire, and repeat the
and the DIC message should go screen. procedure in Step 8.
off at the next ignition cycle. The
5. Press the SET/CLR button to 10. Proceed to the passenger
sensors are matched to the tire/
begin the sensor matching side rear tire, and repeat the
wheel positions, using a TPMS
process. procedure in Step 8.
relearn tool, in the following order:
driver side front tire, passenger side A message requesting 11. Proceed to the driver side rear
front tire, passenger side rear tire, acceptance of the process tire, and repeat the procedure
and driver side rear. See your should display. in Step 8. The horn sounds
dealer for service or to purchase a 6. Press the SET/CLR button again two times to indicate the
relearn tool. to confirm the selection. sensor identification code has
There are two minutes to match been matched to the driver
The horn sounds twice to signal side rear tire, and the TPMS
the first tire/wheel position, and the receiver is in relearn mode
five minutes overall to match all sensor matching process
and the TIRE LEARNING is no longer active. The TIRE
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes ACTIVE message displays on
longer, the matching process stops the DIC screen.
and must be restarted.
Vehicle Care 10-53
LEARNING ACTIVE message . The tread or sidewall is Any time unusual wear is
on the DIC display screen cracked, cut, or snagged noticed, rotate the tires as soon
goes off. deep enough to show cord or as possible and check the wheel
12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. fabric. alignment. Also check for
13. Set all four tires to the . The tire has a bump, bulge, damaged tires or wheels. See
recommended air pressure or split. When It Is Time for New Tires
level as indicated on the Tire on page 10‑54 and Wheel
. The tire has a puncture, cut, Replacement on page 10‑59.
and Loading Information label.
or other damage that cannot
Tire Inspection be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
We recommend that the tires, damage.
including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, be inspected Tire Rotation
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month. Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
Replace the tire if: Maintenance Schedule on
. The indicators at three or page 11‑3.
more places around the tire Tires are rotated to achieve
can be seen. a uniform wear for all tires.
. There is cord or fabric The first rotation is the most Use this rotation pattern when
showing through the tire's important. rotating the tires.
rubber. Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
10-54 Vehicle Care
Adjust the front and rear tires When It Is Time for New
to the recommended inflation { WARNING Tires
pressure on the Tire and Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
Loading Information label after Factors such as maintenance,
parts to which it is fastened, can temperatures, driving speeds,
the tires have been rotated. See make wheel nuts become loose vehicle loading, and road conditions
Tire Pressure on page 10‑47 after time. The wheel could come affect the wear rate of the tires.
and Vehicle Load Limits on off and cause an accident. When
page 9‑10. changing a wheel, remove any
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor rust or dirt from places where the
System. See Tire Pressure wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Monitor Operation on
towel can be used; however, use
page 10‑50.
a scraper or wire brush later to
Check that all wheel nuts are remove all rust or dirt.
properly tightened. See“Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities Lightly coat the center of the
and Specifications on wheel hub with wheel bearing
page 12‑2. grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
Treadwear indicators are one way
or rust build-up. Do not get
to tell when it is time for new tires.
grease on the flat wheel Treadwear indicators appear when
mounting surface or on the the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
wheel nuts or bolts. or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑53 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑53 for more
information.
Vehicle Care 10-55
The rubber in tires ages over time. Parking for an extended period can GM's exclusive TPC Spec
This also applies for the spare tire, cause flat spots on the tires that system considers over a
if the vehicle has one, even if it is may result in vibrations while dozen critical specifications that
never used. Multiple conditions driving. When storing a vehicle for impact the overall performance
including temperatures, loading at least a month, remove the tires or
of the vehicle, including brake
conditions, and inflation pressure raise the vehicle to reduce the
maintenance affect how fast aging weight from the tires. system performance, ride and
takes place. Tires will typically need handling, traction control,
to be replaced due to wear before Buying New Tires and tire pressure monitoring
they may need to be replaced performance. GM's TPC Spec
due to age. Consult the tire GM has developed and matched number is molded onto the tire's
manufacturer for more information specific tires for the vehicle. sidewall near the tire size. If the
on when tires should be replaced. The original equipment tires tires have an all‐season tread
installed were designed design, the TPC Spec number
Vehicle Storage to meet General Motors will be followed by MS for mud
Tires age when stored normally Tire Performance Criteria and snow. See Tire Sidewall
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park Specification (TPC Spec) Labeling on page 10‑42 for
a vehicle that will be stored for at system rating. When
least a month in a cool, dry, clean additional information.
replacement tires are needed,
area away from direct sunlight to GM recommends replacing all
slow aging. This area should be
GM strongly recommends
buying tires with the same the tires at the same time.
free of grease, gasoline, or other Uniform tread depth on all
substances that can deteriorate TPC Spec rating.
tires will help to maintain the
rubber.
performance of the vehicle.
10-56 Vehicle Care
Braking and handling If the vehicle tires must be

performance may be adversely { WARNING replaced with a tire that does not
affected if all the tires are not Mixing tires of different sizes, have a TPC Spec number, make
replaced at the same time. See brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size,
Tire Inspection on page 10‑53 loss of control of the vehicle, load range, speed rating, and
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑53 resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the
for information on proper tire vehicle damage. Use the original tires.
rotation. correct size, brand, and type Vehicles that have a tire
of tires on all wheels. pressure monitoring system
{ WARNING could give an inaccurate
Tires could explode during low‐pressure warning if
improper service. Attempting { WARNING non‐TPC Spec rated tires are
to mount or dismount a tire installed. See Tire Pressure
could cause injury or death. Using bias-ply tires on the Monitor System on page 10‑48.
Only your dealer or authorized vehicle may cause the wheel The Tire and Loading
tire service center should rim flanges to develop cracks Information label indicates the
mount or dismount the tires. after many miles of driving. original equipment tires on the
A tire and/or wheel could fail vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
suddenly and cause a crash. on page 9‑10 for the label
Use only radial-ply tires with location and more information
the wheels on the vehicle. about the Tire and Loading
Information label.
Vehicle Care 10-57
Different Size Tires and WARNING (Continued)

(NHTSA), which grades tires
Wheels by treadwear, traction, and
developed for the vehicle, and temperature performance. This
If wheels or tires are installed that applies only to vehicles sold in
are a different size than the original have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician. the United States. The grades
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
are molded on the sidewalls of
ride and handling characteristics, most passenger car tires. The
See Buying New Tires on
stability, and resistance to rollover page 10‑55 and Accessories and Uniform Tire Quality Grading
may be affected. If the vehicle has Modifications on page 10‑3 for (UTQG) system does not apply
electronic systems such as antilock additional information. to deep tread, winter-type snow
brakes, rollover airbags, traction tires, space-saver, or temporary
control, and electronic stability Uniform Tire Quality use spare tires, tires with
control, the performance of these nominal rim diameters of
systems can also be affected. Grading
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
Quality grades can be found or to some limited-production
{ WARNING where applicable on the tire tires.
sidewall between tread shoulder
If different sized wheels are used, and maximum section width. For While the tires available on
there may not be an acceptable example: General Motors passenger cars
level of performance and safety and light trucks may vary with
if tires not recommended for Treadwear 200 Traction AA respect to these grades, they
those wheels are selected. This Temperature A must also conform to federal
increases the chance of a crash safety requirements and
The following information relates
and serious injury. Only use GM additional General Motors Tire
specific wheel and tire systems
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway Performance Criteria (TPC)
(Continued) Traffic Safety Administration standards.
10-58 Vehicle Care
All Passenger Car Tires Must Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified

Conform to Federal Safety The traction grades, from indoor laboratory test wheel.
Requirements In Addition To highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, Sustained high temperature can
These Grades. and C. Those grades represent cause the material of the tire to
the tire's ability to stop on wet degenerate and reduce tire life,
Treadwear
pavement as measured under and excessive temperature can
The treadwear grade is a lead to sudden tire failure. The
controlled conditions on
comparative rating based on grade C corresponds to a level
specified government test
the wear rate of the tire when of performance which all
surfaces of asphalt and
tested under controlled passenger car tires must meet
concrete. A tire marked C may
conditions on a specified under the Federal Motor Safety
have poor traction performance.
government test course. For Standard No. 109. Grades B and
Warning: The traction grade
example, a tire graded A represent higher levels of
assigned to this tire is based on
150 would wear one and a half performance on the laboratory
straight-ahead braking traction
(1½) times as well on the test wheel than the minimum
tests, and does not include
government course as a tire required by law. Warning: The
acceleration, cornering,
graded 100. The relative temperature grade for this tire
hydroplaning, or peak traction
performance of tires depends is established for a tire that is
characteristics.
upon the actual conditions of properly inflated and not
their use, however, and may Temperature – A, B, C overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the The temperature grades underinflation, or excessive
norm due to variations in are A (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
driving habits, service practices representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
and differences in road to the generation of heat and buildup and possible tire failure.
characteristics and climate. its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
Vehicle Care 10-59
Wheel Alignment and Tire Your dealer will know the kind of Notice: The wrong wheel
wheel that is needed. can also cause problems with
Balance bearing life, brake cooling,
Each new wheel should have
The tires and wheels were aligned the same load-carrying capacity, speedometer or odometer
and balanced at the factory to diameter, width, offset, and be calibration, headlamp aim,
provide the longest tire life and best mounted the same way as the one it bumper height, vehicle ground
overall performance. Adjustments to replaces. clearance, and tire or tire chain
wheel alignment and tire balancing clearance to the body and
will not be necessary on a regular Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel chassis.
basis. However, check the nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new See If a Tire Goes Flat on
alignment if there is unusual tire page 10‑60 for more information.
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to GM original equipment parts.
one side or the other. If the vehicle Used Replacement Wheels
vibrates when driving on a smooth { WARNING
road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your Using the wrong replacement
{ WARNING
dealer for proper diagnosis. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Replacing a wheel with a used
nuts can be dangerous. It could one is dangerous. How it has
Wheel Replacement affect the braking and handling of been used or how far it has been
the vehicle. Tires can lose air, driven may be unknown. It could
Replace any wheel that is bent,
and cause loss of control, causing fail suddenly and cause a crash.
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming a crash. Always use the correct When replacing wheels, use a
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel new GM original equipment
wheel nuts should be replaced. nuts for replacement. wheel.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
10-60 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat

{ WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
{ WARNING while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
are maintained properly. If air goes permanent damage to the tire.
Do not use tire chains. There is out of a tire, it is much more likely to Re-inflating a tire after it has
not enough clearance. Tire chains leak out slowly. But if there ever is a been driven on while severely
used on a vehicle without the blowout, here are a few tips about underinflated or flat may cause
proper amount of clearance can what to expect and what to do: a blowout and a serious crash.
cause damage to the brakes, Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
suspension, or other vehicle that has been driven on while
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the severely underinflated or flat.
toward that side. Take your foot off
tire chains could cause loss of the accelerator pedal and grip the Have your dealer or an authorized
control and a crash. Use another steering wheel firmly. Steer to tire service center repair or
type of traction device only if its maintain lane position, and then replace the flat tire as soon as
manufacturer recommends it for gently brake to a stop, well off the possible.
the vehicle's tire size combination road, if possible.
and road conditions. Follow that
A rear blowout, particularly on a
manufacturer's instructions. To
avoid vehicle damage, drive
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
{ WARNING
slowly and readjust or remove the used in a skid. Stop pressing the
traction device if it contacts the Lifting a vehicle and getting
accelerator pedal and steer to under it to do maintenance or
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. straighten the vehicle. It may be
If traction devices are used, install repairs is dangerous without the
very bumpy and noisy. Gently appropriate safety equipment and
them on the rear tires. brake to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with
if possible.
the vehicle, it is designed only for
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-61
This vehicle may come with a jack,

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING spare tire, and wheel block(s) or a
tire sealant and compressor kit.
changing a flat tire. If it is used for Changing a tire can be To use the jacking equipment to
anything else, you or others could dangerous. The vehicle can slip change a spare tire safely, follow
be badly injured or killed if the off the jack and roll over or fall the instructions below. Then see
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack causing injury or death. Find a Tire Changing on page 10‑69. To
is provided with the vehicle, only level place to change the tire. To use the tire sealant and compressor
use it for changing a flat tire. help prevent the vehicle from kit, see Tire Sealant and
moving: Compressor Kit on page 10‑62.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
and wheel damage by driving slowly 2. Put an automatic
to a level place, well off the road, transmission in P (Park) or a
if possible. Turn on the hazard manual transmission in
warning flashers. See Hazard 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire To use the wheel blocks, lift the
being changed. wheel block and lock it into place.
10-62 Vehicle Care
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), Tire Sealant and WARNING (Continued)
use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of
Compressor Kit
the wheel blocks (A). and compressor kit instructions
{ WARNING and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed exceed the recommended
area with poor ventilation is pressure.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. { WARNING
It can cause unconsciousness Storing the tire sealant and
and even death. Never run the compressor kit or other
A. Wheel Block engine in an enclosed area that equipment in the passenger
B. Flat Tire has no fresh air ventilation. For compartment of the vehicle could
more information, see Engine cause injury. In a sudden stop or
The following information explains
Exhaust on page 9‑26. collision, loose equipment could
how to repair or change a tire.
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
{ WARNING original location.
Overinflating a tire could cause If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
the tire to rupture and you or compressor kit, there may not be a
others could be injured. Be sure spare tire, tire changing equipment,
to read and follow the tire sealant and on some vehicles there may not
(Continued) be a place to store a tire.
Vehicle Care 10-63
The tire sealant and compressor The kit includes: Tire Sealant
can be used to temporarily seal
Read and follow the safe handling
punctures up to 6 mm (¼ inch) in
instructions on the label adhered to
the tread area of the tire. It can
the sealant canister.
also be used to inflate an under
inflated tire. Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
If the tire has been separated from
The sealant canister should be
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
replaced before its expiration date.
or has a large puncture, the tire is
Replacement sealant canisters are
too severely damaged for the tire
available at your local dealer. See
sealant and compressor kit to be
“Removal and Installation of the
effective. See Roadside Assistance
Sealant Canister” following.
Program on page 13‑5.
There is only enough sealant to seal
Read and follow all of the tire
A. Air Compressor one tire. After usage, the sealant
sealant and compressor kit
B. Tire Sealant Canister canister and sealant/air hose
instructions.
assembly must be replaced. See
C. Power Plug “Removal and Installation of the
D. On/Off Button Sealant Canister” following.
E. Pressure Gauge
F. Air Only Hose (Black)
G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
10-64 Vehicle Care
Using the Tire Sealant and If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 4. Remove the valve stem cap
Compressor Kit to Temporarily and wheel damage by driving slowly from the flat tire by turning it
Seal and Inflate a to a level place. Turn on the hazard counterclockwise.
Punctured Tire warning flashers. See Hazard 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G)
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
See If a Tire Goes Flat on clockwise until it is tight.
page 10‑60 for other important 6. Plug the power plug (C) into the
safety warnings. accessory power outlet in the
Do not remove any objects that vehicle. Unplug all items from
have penetrated the tire. other accessory power outlets.
1. Remove the tire sealant and See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.
compressor kit from its storage If the vehicle has an accessory
location. See Storing the Tire power outlet, do not use the
Sealant and Compressor Kit on cigarette lighter.
page 10‑68. If the vehicle only has a cigarette
Make sure the on/off button (D) lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
When using the tire sealant and is in the off (O) position. Do not pinch the power plug
compressor kit during cold 2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) cord in the door or window.
temperatures, warm the kit in a and the power plug (C). 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
heated environment for five minutes.
3. Place the kit on the ground. must be running while using the
This will help to inflate the tire
Make sure the tire valve stem is air compressor.
faster.
positioned close to the ground 8. Press the on/off button (D) to
so the hose will reach it. turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
Vehicle Care 10-65
The compressor will inject Notice: If the recommended 11. Unplug the power plug (C) from
sealant and air into the tire. pressure cannot be reached after the accessory power outlet in
The pressure gauge (E) will approximately 25 minutes, the the vehicle.
initially show a high pressure vehicle should not be driven 12. Turn the sealant/air hose (G)
while the compressor pushes the farther. The tire is too severely counterclockwise to remove it
sealant into the tire. Once the damaged and the tire sealant and from the tire valve stem.
sealant is completely dispersed compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from 13. Replace the tire valve
into the tire, the pressure will stem cap.
quickly drop and start to rise the accessory power outlet and
again as the tire inflates with unscrew the inflating hose from 14. Replace the sealant/air
air only. the tire valve. See Roadside hose (G), and the power
Assistance Program on plug (C) back in their original
9. Inflate the tire to the page 13‑5. location.
recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gauge (E). 10. Press the on/off button (D) to
The recommended inflation turn the tire sealant and
pressure can be found on the compressor kit off.
Tire and Loading Information The tire is not sealed and will
label. See Tire Pressure on continue to leak air until the
page 10‑47. vehicle is driven and the
The pressure gauge (E) may sealant is distributed in the tire.
Therefore, Steps 11 through 15. If the flat tire was able to
read higher than the actual tire inflate to the recommended
pressure while the compressor 17 must be done immediately
after Step 10. inflation pressure, remove the
is on. Turn the compressor maximum speed label from the
off to get an accurate pressure Be careful while handling the sealant canister (B) and place
reading. The compressor may tire sealant and compressor it in a highly visible location.
be turned on/off until the correct kit as it could be warm after
pressure is reached. usage.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Do not exceed the speed on If the tire pressure has not Using the Tire Sealant and
this label until the damaged tire dropped more than 68 kPa Compressor Kit without
is repaired or replaced. (10 psi) from the recommended Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
16. Return the equipment to its inflation pressure, inflate the Punctured)
original storage location in the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure. To use the air compressor to inflate
vehicle. a tire with air only and not sealant:
17. Immediately drive the vehicle 19. Wipe off any sealant from the
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the wheel, tire or vehicle.
sealant in the tire. 20. Dispose of the used sealant
18. Stop at a safe location and canister (B) and sealant/air
check the tire pressure. Refer hose (G) assembly at a local
to Steps 1 through 11 under dealer or in accordance with
“Using the Tire Sealant and local state codes and practices.
Compressor Kit without 21. Replace it with a new canister
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not available from your dealer.
Punctured).” 22. After temporarily sealing a tire
If the tire pressure has fallen using the tire sealant and
more than 68 kPa (10 psi) compressor kit, take the
below the recommended vehicle to an authorized dealer
inflation pressure, stop driving within 161 km (100 mi) of If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
the vehicle. The tire is too driving to have the tire repaired and wheel damage by driving slowly
severely damaged and the tire or replaced. to a level place. Turn on the hazard
sealant cannot seal the tire. warning flashers. See Hazard
See Roadside Assistance Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
Program on page 13‑5.
Vehicle Care 10-67
See If a Tire Goes Flat on 8. Plug the power plug (C) into the on the Tire and Loading
page 10‑60 for other important accessory power outlet in the Information label. See Tire
safety warnings. vehicle. Unplug all items from Pressure on page 10‑47.
1. Remove the tire sealant and other accessory power outlets. The pressure gauge (E) may
compressor kit from its storage See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. read higher than the actual tire
location. See Storing the Tire If the vehicle has an accessory pressure while the compressor
Sealant and Compressor Kit on power outlet, do not use the is on. Turn the compressor off
page 10‑68. cigarette lighter. to get an accurate reading. The
2. Unlock the air only hose (F) from If the vehicle only has a cigarette compressor may be turned on/
the sealant canister (B) by lighter, use the cigarette lighter. off until the correct pressure is
pulling up on the lever. reached.
Do not pinch the power plug
3. Pull the air only hose (F) from cord in the door or window. 12. Press the on/off button (D) to
the sealant canister (B). turn the tire sealant and
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle compressor kit off.
4. Remove the power plug (C) from must be running while using the
the air compressor (A). air compressor. Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
5. Place the kit on the ground. 10. Press the on/off button (D) to as it could be warm after
Make sure the tire valve stem is turn the compressor on. usage.
positioned close to the ground The compressor will inflate the 13. Unplug the power plug (C) from
so the hose will reach it. tire with air only. the accessory power outlet in
6. Remove the tire valve stem cap 11. Inflate the tire to the the vehicle.
by turning it counterclockwise. recommended inflation 14. Disconnect the air only
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto pressure using the pressure hose (F) from the tire valve
the tire valve stem and press the gauge (E). The recommended stem by lifting the lever.
lever down to secure it. inflation pressure can be found Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
10-68 Vehicle Care
15. Replace the air only hose (F) 2. Pull the air only hose (F) from To install a new sealant canister:
and the power plug (C) back in the sealant canister (B). 1. Align the sealant/air hose (G)
its original location. 3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) with the slot in the air
16. Place the equipment in the from the compressor (A). compressor.
original storage location in the 2. Push the sealant canister (B)
vehicle. down and turn it clockwise.
The tire sealant and compressor kit 3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G)
has an accessory adapter located in around the air compressor
a compartment on the bottom of its channel to stow it in its original
housing that may be used to inflate location.
air mattresses, balls, etc.
4. Push the air only hose (F) onto
Removal and Installation of the the sealant canister inlet and
Sealant Canister push the lever down.
To remove the sealant canister:
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so
the inflator filling hose is aligned The tire sealant and compressor kit
with the slot in the compressor. is located in the trunk, under the
load floor, behind an access panel.
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from
the compressor and replace with
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from a new sealant canister. See your
the sealant canister (B) by dealer for more information.
pulling up on the lever.
Vehicle Care 10-69
To remove the kit: Tire Changing

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑13.
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2‑13.
2. Lift the load floor.
3. Pull the inflator kit rearward.

Squeeze the two tabs of the
quick release buckle to remove
the tire sealant and
2. Turn the left knob compressor kit.
counterclockwise and the right To store the inflator kit, reverse the
knob clockwise, 90 degrees, at steps.
the same time. Then pull the
access panel rearward and up to
remove it.
10-70 Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
This vehicle may have aluminum
wheels with exposed wheel nuts.
Use the wheel wrench to loosen all
the wheel nuts. Do not remove
them yet.
Or, this vehicle may have steel
wheels with plastic covers.
A. Retainer Nut A. Three-Piece Wrench

B. Tool Bag Tether B. Hex Head Jack
C. Tool Bag C. Jack Handle Extension
D. Spare Tire D. Coin/Pierce Jack
3. Turn the retainer nut (A) E. Two-Piece Wrench
counterclockwise to remove it. This vehicle may have one of the
Then remove the tool bag following: A coin/pierce jack (D), a
tether (B) from the stow rod, the jack handle extension (C), and a
tool bag (C) containing the two-piece wrench (E), or a hex head
wheel wrench and wheel blocks, jack (B) and three-piece wrench (A).
and the spare tire (D). To remove the plastic covers and
wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic
4. Remove the jack, jack handle nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
extension, and two-piece counterclockwise direction.
wrench, if equipped.
Vehicle Care 10-71
If needed, finish loosening them

with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps will not come off.
If needed, use the flat end of the
wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off.
The edge of the wheel cover could
be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop
the cover or lay it face down,
as it could become scratched or
damaged. Store the wheel cover in
the trunk until the flat tire is repaired 2. Turn the wheel wrench 5. If this vehicle is the RS model,
or replaced. counterclockwise once on each locate the front or rear jack
Once you have removed the wheel wheel nut to loosen it. Do not cover on the rocker molding
cover, use the following procedure remove them yet. near the tire being changed.
to remove the flat tire and install the 3. Place the jack near the flat tire. Place your hand behind the
spare tire. edge of the cover on the rocker
4. Place the wheel blocks on both
1. Do a safety check before sides of the tire at the opposite molding. Pull down and out to
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes corner of the tire being changed. remove the cover.
Flat on page 10‑60 for more See If a Tire Goes Flat on The cover will remain attached
information. page 10‑60 for proper wheel to the molding by a tether.
block placement. 6. Place the jack under the vehicle.
10-72 Vehicle Care
7. If you have a coin/pierce jack,

attach the jack handle extension { WARNING
to the jack by sliding the hook
through the end of the jack. Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If you have a hex head jack, If the vehicle slips off the jack,
place the hex tube end of the you could be badly injured or
wrench over the hex head of killed. Never get under a vehicle
the jack. when it is supported only by
Notice: Make sure that the jack a jack.
lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. 8. Position the jack lift head at the { WARNING
jack location nearest the flat tire.
The location is indicated by a Raising the vehicle with the jack
notch in the flange. The jack improperly positioned can
must not be used in any other damage the vehicle and even
position. make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-73
{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs
is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack Hex Head Jack Shown, Coin/ Make sure the jack lift head
is provided with the vehicle, only Pierce Jack Similar notch is placed in the flange
use it for changing a flat tire. notch.
9. Raise the jack by turning the
handle clockwise until it comes Raise the vehicle far enough off
in contact with the notch in the the ground so there is enough
flange. room for the road tire to clear the
ground.
10-74 Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

an emergency, a cloth or a paper Never use oil or grease on bolts
towel can be used; however, use or nuts because the nuts might
a scraper or wire brush later to come loose. The vehicle's wheel
remove all rust or dirt. could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.

Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
10. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 15. Lower the vehicle by
11. Remove the flat tire. turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can Wheel nuts that are improperly or
make wheel nuts become loose incorrectly tightened can cause
after time. The wheel could come the wheels to become loose or
12. Remove any rust or dirt from
off and cause an accident. When come off. The wheel nuts should
the wheel bolts, mounting
changing a wheel, remove any be tightened with a torque wrench
surfaces, and spare wheel.
rust or dirt from places where the to the proper torque specification
13. Place the compact spare tire after replacing. Follow the torque
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In on the wheel-mounting surface. specification supplied by the
(Continued)
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-75
WARNING (Continued)
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened

wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To 16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly Front Jack Cover Shown, Rear
avoid expensive brake repairs, in a crisscross sequence, as Jack Cover Similar
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in shown. 19. If this vehicle is the RS model,
the proper sequence and to the
17. Lower the jack all the way and snap the jack cover back into
proper torque specification. See
remove the jack from under the place.
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut vehicle. 20. Remove the wheel blocks and
torque specification. 18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly return them to their proper
with the wheel wrench. storage location.
10-76 Vehicle Care
When reinstalling the wheel cover Storing the Flat Tire and Tools 5. Place the foam container inside
or center cap on the full-size tire, 1. Replace the wheel wrench and the flat tire. Align the hole with
tighten all five plastic caps hand wheel blocks in the tool bag. the stow rod.
snug with the aid of the wheel 6. Place the tool bag tether over
wrench and tighten them with 2. Remove the foam container from
the rear storage compartment. the stow rod and the tool bag
the wheel wrench an additional rear of the flat tire.
one‐quarter of a turn.
7. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit until tight.
on the vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on 8. Replace the load floor.
the compact spare, the cover or The load floor may not lay flat.
the spare could be damaged.
The compact spare is for temporary
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire use only. Replace the compact
and Tools spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
{ WARNING Storing the Compact Spare Tire
and Tools
Storing a jack, a tire, or other Coin/Pierce Jack Shown, Hex
equipment in the passenger Reverse the instructions for
Head Jack Similar
compartment of the vehicle could removing the spare tire and tools to
cause injury. In a sudden stop or 3. Place the flat tire in the storage store the compact spare tire.
collision, loose equipment could compartment with the valve
stem down.
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place. 4. Place the jack and jack handle
extension, if the vehicle has one,
in the foam container.
Vehicle Care 10-77
Compact Spare Tire Stop as soon as possible and Do not use the compact spare on
check that the spare tire is correctly other vehicles.
inflated after installing the spare on
{ WARNING the vehicle. The compact spare
Do not mix the compact spare tire
or wheel with other wheels or tires.
Driving with more than one is designed to perform well at They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
speeds up to 105 km/h (65 mph) for and its wheel together.
compact spare tire at a time could
distances up to 5 000 km (3,000 mi),
result in loss of braking and Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
so a trip can be completed and the
handling. This could lead to a full-size tire repaired or replaced compact spare. Using them can
crash and you or others could be when possible. However, the damage the vehicle and can
injured. Use only one compact compact spare tire will last longer damage the chains too. Do not
spare tire at a time. and be in good shape if it is use tire chains on the compact
replaced as soon as possible. spare.
If this vehicle has a compact spare Notice: When the compact spare
tire, it was fully inflated when the is installed, do not take the
vehicle was new; however, it can vehicle through an automatic
lose air after a time. Check the car wash with guide rails. The
inflation pressure regularly. It should compact spare can get caught on
be 420 kPa (60 psi). the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel, and other parts of the
vehicle.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to
The jump start negative grounding
point (D) is the engine block or an
For more information about the the vehicle that would not be engine mounting bolt. Connect
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty. to a spot as far away from the
page 10‑24. discharged battery as possible.
Trying to start the vehicle by
If the battery has run down, try to pushing or pulling it will not These locations are used instead of
use another vehicle and some work, and it could damage the a direct connection to the battery.
jumper cables to start your vehicle. vehicle. The positive jump start connection
Be sure to use the following steps to
is under a trim cover. Open the
do it safely.
cover door to expose the terminal.
{ WARNING 1. Check the other vehicle. It must

have a 12-volt battery with a
Batteries can hurt you. They can negative ground system.
be dangerous because: Notice: Only use a vehicle that
. They contain acid that can has a 12-volt system with a
burn you. negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does
. They contain gas that can not have a 12-volt system with a
explode or ignite. negative ground, both vehicles
. They contain enough can be damaged.
electricity to burn you. The jump start positive post (B) is 2. Position the two vehicles so that
If you do not follow these steps located in the engine compartment they are not touching.
exactly, some or all of these on the driver side of the vehicle.
things can hurt you.
Vehicle Care 10-79
3. Set the parking brake firmly and 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
put the shift lever in P (Park) Turn off all lights and WARNING (Continued)
with an automatic transmission, accessories in both vehicles,
or Neutral with a manual except the hazard warning Be sure the battery has enough
transmission. See Shifting Into flashers if needed. water. You do not need to add
Park (Automatic Transmission) water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
on page 9‑23 with an automatic
transmission, or Parking on
{ WARNING has filler caps, be sure the right
page 9‑26 with a manual An electric fan can start up even amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
transmission. when the engine is not running add water to take care of that
and can injure you. Keep hands, first. If you do not, explosive gas
Notice: If any accessories are left
on or plugged in during the jump clothing and tools away from any could be present.
starting procedure, they could underhood electric fan. Battery fluid contains acid that
be damaged. The repairs would can burn you. Do not get it on
not be covered by the vehicle you. If you accidentally get it in
warranty. Whenever possible,
turn off or unplug all accessories { WARNING your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
on either vehicle when jump medical help immediately.
Using a match near a battery can
starting the vehicle.
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
(Continued)
10-80 Vehicle Care
7. Connect one end of the black

{ WARNING negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) terminal of the good
Fans or other moving engine battery (C).
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving 8. Connect the other end of the
parts once the engine is running. black negative (–) cable to the
negative (–) grounding point (D).
9. Start the engine in the vehicle
with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
10. Try to start the vehicle that Jumper Cable Removal
had the dead battery. If it will
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
not start after a few tries, it
Part or Remote Negative (–)
probably needs service.
Terminal
Notice: If the jumper cables are
B. Good Battery or Remote
connected or removed in the
Positive (+) and Remote
wrong order, electrical shorting
Negative (–) Terminals
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be C. Dead Battery or Remote
5. Connect one end of the red
covered by the vehicle warranty. Positive (+) Terminal
positive (+) cable to the jump
Always connect and remove the
start positive (+) post (B).
jumper cables in the correct
6. Connect the other end of the order, making sure that the
red positive (+) cable to the cables do not touch each other or
positive (+) terminal of the good other metal.
battery (A).
Vehicle Care 10-81
To disconnect the jumper cables Towing Recreational Vehicle

from both vehicles:
Towing
1. Disconnect the black Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing refers to
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead Notice: To avoid damage, the towing the vehicle behind another
battery. disabled vehicle should be vehicle – such as behind a motor
towed with all four wheels off home. The two most common types
2. Disconnect the black the ground. Care must be taken of recreational vehicle towing are
negative (−) cable from the with vehicles that have low known as dinghy towing and dolly
vehicle with the good battery. ground clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) equipment. Always flatbed on a vehicle with all four wheels on the
cable from the vehicle with the car carrier. ground. Dolly towing is towing the
good battery. vehicle with two wheels on the
Consult your dealer or a
ground and two wheels up on a
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) professional towing service if the
device known as a dolly.
cable from the other vehicle. disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
5. Return the covers over the on page 13‑5.
positive (+) and negative (–)
terminals to their original To tow the vehicle behind another
positions. vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing (With If the vehicle must be towed, a dolly
consider before recreational vehicle Automatic Transmission) should be used. See "Dolly Towing"
towing: that follows for more information.
. The towing capacity of the Dinghy Towing (With Manual
towing vehicle. Be sure to read Transmission)
the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
. How far the vehicle will be
towed. Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
. The proper towing equipment.
See your dealer or trailering
professional for additional
advice and equipment Notice: If the vehicle is
recommendations. towed with all four wheels
. If the vehicle is ready to be on the ground, the drivetrain
towed. Just as preparing the components could be damaged.
vehicle for a long trip, make sure The repairs would not be covered To dinghy tow the vehicle from the
the vehicle is prepared to be by the vehicle warranty. Do not front with all four wheels on the
towed. tow the vehicle with all four ground:
wheels on the ground. 1. Position the vehicle to tow and
Vehicles with an automatic then secure it to the towing
transmission should not be towed vehicle.
with all four wheels on the ground. 2. Shift the transmission to Neutral.
Vehicle Care 10-83
3. Turn the ignition to ACC/ Dolly Towing

ACCESSORY.
4. To prevent the battery from
draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove fuse 22,
23, 24, and 25 from the
instrument panel fuse block. See
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
Remember to reinstall the fuses
once the destination has been
reached.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is the rear could damage it. Also,
exceeded while towing the repairs would not be covered by Tow the vehicle with the two rear
vehicle, it could be damaged. the vehicle warranty. Never have wheels on the ground and the front
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) the vehicle towed from the rear. wheels on a dolly:
while towing the vehicle.
To tow the vehicle with two wheels
on the ground and a dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Shift the automatic transmission
into P (Park) or a manual
transmission into 1 (First) gear.
3. Set the parking brake.
10-84 Vehicle Care
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a Appearance Care exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)
straight-ahead position with a can result in damage or removal
clamping device designed for of paint and decals.
towing. Exterior Care
Rinse the vehicle well, before
5. Remove the key from the Washing the Vehicle washing and after, to remove all
ignition. To preserve the vehicle's finish, cleaning agents completely. If they
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. wash it often and out of direct are allowed to dry on the surface,
sunlight. they could stain.
7. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Do not use petroleum Dry the finish with a soft, clean
based, acidic, or abrasive chamois or an all-cotton towel to
cleaning agents as they can avoid surface scratches and water
damage the vehicle's paint, spotting.
metal, or plastic parts. If damage Finish Care
occurs, it would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. Application of aftermarket clearcoat
Approved cleaning products sealant/wax materials is not
can be obtained from your recommended. If painted surfaces
dealer. Follow all manufacturer are damaged, see your dealer to
directions regarding correct have the damage assessed and
product usage, necessary safety repaired. Foreign materials such
precautions, and appropriate as calcium chloride and other salts,
disposal of any vehicle care ice melting agents, road oil and tar,
Notice: Towing the vehicle from tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals
the rear could damage it. Also, product.
from industrial chimneys, etc., can
repairs would not be covered by Notice: Avoid using high damage the vehicle's finish if they
the vehicle warranty. Never have pressure washes closer than remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle towed from the rear. 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the the vehicle as soon as possible.
vehicle. Use of power washers If necessary, use non-abrasive
Vehicle Care 10-85
cleaners that are marked safe for Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Shutter System
painted surfaces to remove foreign Parts
matter. Regularly clean bright metal parts
Occasional hand waxing or mild with water or chrome polish on
polishing should be done to remove chrome or stainless steel trim,
residue from the paint finish. See if necessary.
your dealer for approved cleaning For aluminum, never use auto
products. or chrome polish, steam, or
Notice: Machine compounding caustic soap to clean. A coating
or aggressive polishing on a of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish recommended for all bright metal
may damage it. Use only parts.
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/ Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
clearcoat paint finish on the Lenses and Emblems The vehicle may have a shutter
vehicle. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a system designed to help increase
soft cloth, and a car washing soap fuel economy. Keep the shutter
To keep the paint finish looking system clean for proper operation.
new, keep the vehicle garaged or to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
covered whenever possible. Follow instructions under "Washing
the Vehicle" later in this section.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades Heavy snow or ice can overload the Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
wipers. If the wiper motor overheats, or Chrome
Clean the outside of the windshield
the windshield wipers will stop until
with glass cleaner. Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
the motor cools and the wiper
Clean rubber blades using lint-free control is turned off. See Electrical soap and water to clean the wheels.
cloth or paper towel soaked with System Overload on page 10‑33 for After rinsing thoroughly with clean
windshield washer fluid or a mild more information. water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
detergent. Wash the windshield A wax may then be applied.
thoroughly when cleaning the Weatherstrips Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and Apply silicone grease on clean cloth with mild soap and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax weatherstrips to make them last water. Rinse with clean water. After
treatments may cause wiper longer, seal better, and not stick or rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,
streaking. squeak. See Recommended Fluids clean towel. A wax may then be
Replace the wiper blades if they and Lubricants on page 11‑12. applied.
are worn or damaged. Damage Tires Notice: Chrome wheels and other
can be caused by extreme dusty chrome trim may be damaged if
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to the vehicle is not washed after
snow and ice. clean the tires. driving on roads that have been
Clear ice and snow from the wiper Notice: Using petroleum-based sprayed with magnesium,
blades before using them. If frozen tire dressing products on the calcium, or sodium chloride.
to the windshield, carefully loosen vehicle may damage the paint These chlorides are used on
them or thaw them. Damaged wiper finish and/or tires. When applying roads for conditions such as
blades should be replaced. See a tire dressing, always wipe off ice and dust. Always wash the
Wiper Blade Replacement on any overspray from all painted chrome with soap and water after
page 10‑26 for more information. surfaces on the vehicle. exposure.
Vehicle Care 10-87
Notice: To avoid surface Body Component Lubrication Original manufacturer replacement

damage, do not use strong soaps, parts will provide the corrosion
Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, protection while maintaining the
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners vehicle warranty.
steel fuel door hinge unless the
that contain acid on aluminum or
components are plastic. Applying Finish Damage
chrome-plated wheels. Use only
silicone grease on weatherstrips
approved cleaners. Also, never Quickly repair minor chips and
with a clean cloth will make them
drive a vehicle with aluminum or scratches with touch-up materials
last longer, seal better, and not stick
chrome-plated wheels through an available from your dealer to avoid
or squeak.
automatic car wash that uses corrosion. Larger areas of finish
silicone carbide tire cleaning Underbody Maintenance damage can be corrected in your
brushes. Damage could occur dealer's body and paint shop.
and the repairs would not be Use plain water to flush dirt and
covered by the vehicle warranty. debris from the vehicle's underbody. Chemical Paint Spotting
Your dealer or an underbody car
Steering, Suspension, and washing system can do this. If not Airborne pollutants can fall upon
removed, rust and corrosion can and attack painted vehicle surfaces
Chassis Components causing blotchy, ring-shaped
develop.
Visually inspect front and rear discolorations, and small, irregular
suspension and steering system for Sheet Metal Damage dark spots etched into the paint
damaged, loose, or missing parts or surface.
If the vehicle is damaged and
signs of wear. Inspect the power
requires sheet metal repair or
steering for proper hook-up, binding,
replacement, make sure the body
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
check constant velocity joints,
material to parts repaired or
rubber boots, and axle seals for
replaced to restore corrosion
leaks.
protection.
10-88 Vehicle Care

. Never rub any surface
Interior Care to the cleaning cloth. Cleaners
aggressively or with excessive
should be removed quickly. Never
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, allow cleaners to remain on the pressure.
regularly clean the vehicle's interior. surface being cleaned for extended . Do not use laundry detergents
Immediately remove any soils. Note periods of time. or dishwashing soaps with
that newspapers or dark garments
Cleaners may contain solvents that degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
that can transfer color to home
can become concentrated in the use approximately 20 drops
furnishings can also permanently
interior. Before using cleaners, per 3.78 L (1 gal) of water.
transfer color to the vehicle's
read and adhere to all safety A concentrated soap solution
interior.
instructions on the label. While will leave a residue that creates
Use a soft bristle brush to remove cleaning the interior, maintain streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
dust from knobs and crevices on the adequate ventilation by opening the use solutions that contain strong
instrument cluster. Using a mild doors and windows. or caustic soap.
soap solution, immediately remove .
To prevent damage, do not clean Do not heavily saturate the
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
the interior using the following upholstery when cleaning.
repellant from all interior surfaces or
permanent damage may result. cleaners or techniques: . Do not use solvents or cleaners
. Never use a razor or any other containing solvents.
Your dealer may have products for
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners sharp object to remove a soil
specifically designed for the from any interior surface.
surfaces being cleaned to prevent . Never use a brush with stiff
permanent damage. To prevent bristles.
overspray, apply all cleaners directly
Vehicle Care 10-89
Interior Glass Fabric/Carpet 2. Remove excess moisture by

gently wringing until water does
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric Start by vacuuming the surface
not drip from the cleaning cloth.
dampened with water. Wipe droplets using a soft brush attachment. If a
left behind with a clean dry cloth. rotating brush attachment is being 3. Start on the outside edge of the
Commercial glass cleaners may be used during vacuuming, only use it soil and gently rub toward the
used, if necessary, after cleaning on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, center. Fold the cleaning cloth
the interior glass with plain water. gently remove as much of the to a clean area frequently to
soil as possible using one of the prevent forcing the soil in to the
Notice: To prevent scratching,
following techniques: fabric.
never use abrasive cleaners on
automotive glass. Abrasive . Gently blot liquids with a paper 4. Continue gently rubbing the
cleaners or aggressive cleaning towel. Continue blotting until no soiled area until there is no
may damage the rear window more soil can be removed. longer any color transfer from
defogger. the soil to the cleaning cloth.
. For solid soils, remove as much
as possible prior to vacuuming. 5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
To clean:
solution followed only by club
1. Saturate a clean lint-free soda or plain water.
colorfast cloth with water or club
soda. Microfiber cloth is
recommended to prevent lint
transfer to the fabric or carpet.
10-90 Vehicle Care
If the soil is not completely Notice: Soaking or saturating Do not use cleaners that increase
removed, it may be necessary leather, especially perforated gloss, especially on the instrument
to use a commercial upholstery leather, as well as other interior panel. Reflected glare can decrease
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small surfaces, may cause permanent visibility through the windshield
hidden area for colorfastness before damage. Wipe excess moisture under certain conditions.
using a commercial upholstery from these surfaces after Notice: Use of air fresheners may
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring cleaning and allow them to dry cause permanent damage to
formation occurs, clean the entire naturally. Never use heat, steam, plastics and painted surfaces.
fabric or carpet. spot lifters or spot removers. Do If an air freshener comes in
Following the cleaning process, a not use cleaners that contain contact with any plastic or
paper towel can be used to blot silicone or wax-based products. painted surface in the vehicle,
excess moisture. Cleaners containing these blot immediately and clean with a
solvents can permanently soft cloth dampened with a mild
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and change the appearance and feel soap solution. Damage caused
Other Plastic Surfaces of leather or soft trim and are not by air fresheners would not be
recommended. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use a soft microfiber cloth
dampened with water to remove
dust and loose dirt. For a more
thorough cleaning, use a soft
microfiber cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution.
Vehicle Care 10-91
Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for Removing and Replacing the
proper floor mat usage: Floor Mats
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
to unlock each retainer and remove.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need
is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
interfere with the pedals. that GM certified floor mats be
Interference with the pedals can purchased. Non-GM floor mats
cause unintended acceleration may not fit properly and may
and/or increased stopping interfere with the pedals. Always
distance which can cause a crash check that the floor mats do not
and injury. Make sure the floor interfere with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
pedals. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat
. Use only a single floor mat on
retainer openings over the carpet
the driver side.
retainers and snap into position.
. Do not place one floor mat on
Make sure the floor mat is properly
top of another.
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
10-92 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
oil changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 help protect against major repair
Notice: Damage caused by
expenses resulting from neglect or
improper maintenance can lead
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may
to costly repairs and may not be
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of
covered by the vehicle warranty.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Maintenance intervals, checks,
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application inspections, recommended fluids,
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 and lubricants are important to
Your dealer has trained keep the vehicle in good working
Additional Maintenance technicians who can perform condition.
and Care required maintenance using
The Tire Rotation and Required
Additional Maintenance genuine replacement parts.
Services are the responsibility of the
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 They have up‐to‐date tools and
vehicle owner. It is recommended
equipment for fast and accurate
Recommended Fluids, to have your dealer perform these
diagnostics. Many dealers have
Lubricants, and Parts services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
extended evening and Saturday
Recommended Fluids and Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
hours, courtesy transportation, and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 keep the vehicle in good working
online scheduling to assist with
Maintenance Replacement condition, improves fuel economy,
service needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 and reduces vehicle emissions.
Your dealer recognizes the
Maintenance Records importance of providing
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people Refer to the information in the Refer to the information in the
use vehicles, maintenance needs Maintenance Schedule Additional Maintenance Schedule Additional
vary. There may need to be Required Services ‐ Normal chart. Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
more frequent checks and The Additional Required
services. The Additional Required
Services ‐ Normal are for
Services ‐ Severe are for vehicles { WARNING
that are:
vehicles that: Performing maintenance work
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic can be dangerous and can
. Carry passengers and cargo in hot weather.
within recommended limits on cause serious injury. Perform
the Tire and Loading Information . Mainly driven in hilly or maintenance work only if the
label. See Vehicle Load Limits mountainous terrain. required information, proper tools,
on page 9‑10. . Frequently towing a trailer. and equipment are available.
If they are not, see your dealer to
. Are driven on reasonable road . Used for high speed or
surfaces within legal driving have a trained technician do the
competitive driving. work. See Doing Your Own
limits.
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Service Work on page 10‑4.
. Use the recommended fuel. service.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑43.

. Check engine coolant level. See
Maintenance indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil Engine Coolant on page 10‑15.
Schedule and filter must be changed at least . Check windshield washer fluid
once a year and the oil life system level. See Washer Fluid on
Owner Checks and Services must be reset. Your trained dealer page 10‑20.
At Each Fuel Stop technician can perform this work.
If the engine oil life system is reset
. Visually inspect windshield
. Check the engine oil level. See accidentally, service the vehicle wiper blades for wear, cracking,
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since or contamination. See Exterior
the last service. Reset the oil life Care on page 10‑84. Replace
Once a Month worn or damaged wiper blades.
system when the oil is changed.
. Check the tire inflation See Engine Oil Life System on See Wiper Blade Replacement
pressures. See Tire Pressure on page 10‑11. on page 10‑26.
page 10‑47. . Check tire inflation pressures.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See
Tire Rotation and Required See Tire Pressure on
Tire Inspection on page 10‑53. Services Every 12 000 km/ page 10‑47.
7,500 mi
. Check the windshield washer . Inspect tire wear. See Tire
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on Rotate the tires, if recommended Inspection on page 10‑53.
page 10‑20. for the vehicle, and perform the .
following services. See Tire Visually check for fluid leaks.
Engine Oil Change Rotation on page 10‑53. . Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL . Check engine oil level and oil See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
SOON DIC message or Code 82 life percentage. If needed, page 10‑13.
DIC message displays, have the change engine oil and filter, and . Inspect brake system.
engine oil and filter changed within reset oil life system. See Engine
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven Oil on page 10‑9 and Engine Oil
under the best conditions, the Life System on page 10‑11.
engine oil life system might not

. Visually inspect steering, . Check starter switch. See Starter . Check accelerator pedal for
suspension, and chassis Switch Check on page 10‑25. damage, high effort, or binding.
components for damaged, loose, . Check automatic transmission Replace if needed.
or missing parts or signs of shift lock control function. See . Visually inspect gas strut for
wear. See Exterior Care on Automatic Transmission Shift signs of wear, cracks, or other
page 10‑84. Lock Control Function Check on damage. Check the hold open
. Check restraint system page 10‑25. ability of the strut. See your
components. See Safety System . Check ignition transmission lock. dealer if service is required.
Check on page 3‑16. See Ignition Transmission Lock . Check tire sealant expiration
. Visually inspect fuel system for Check on page 10‑26. date, if equipped. See Tire
damage or leaks. . Check parking brake and Sealant and Compressor Kit on
. Visually inspect exhaust system automatic transmission park page 10‑62.
and nearby heat shields for mechanism. See Park Brake and . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
loose or damaged parts. P (Park) Mechanism Check on if equipped. See Sunroof on
. Lubricate body components. See page 10‑26. page 2‑21.
Exterior Care on page 10‑84.

Footnotes — Maintenance b) Or every four years, whichever e) Or every 10 years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first. comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Services — Normal c) Or every 10 years, whichever excessive cracking, or damage;
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines comes first. replace, if needed.
and hoses for proper hook‐up, d) Or every five years, whichever
routing, and condition. Check that comes first. See Cooling System on
the purge valve, if the vehicle has page 10‑15.
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.

Footnotes — Maintenance Special Application Additional

Schedule Additional Required
Services — Severe Services Maintenance and Care
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
and hoses for proper hook‐up, Vehicles Only: Lubricate investment and caring for it
routing, and condition. Check that chassis components every properly may help to avoid
the purge valve, if the vehicle has 5 000 km/3,000 mi. future costly repairs. To maintain
one, works properly. Replace as . vehicle performance, additional
Have underbody flushing service
needed. maintenance services may be
performed once a year.
b) Or every four years, whichever required. It is recommended
comes first. that your dealer perform these
services — their trained dealer
c) Or every 10 years, whichever technicians know your vehicle
comes first. best. Your dealer can also perform
d) Or every five years, whichever a thorough assessment with
comes first. See Cooling System on a multi‐point inspection to
page 10‑15. recommend when your vehicle
may need attention. The following
e) Or every 10 years, whichever list is intended to explain the
comes first. Inspect for fraying, services and conditions to look for
excessive cracking, or damage; that may indicate services are
replace, if needed. required.
Battery Brakes Hoses

The battery supplies power to Brakes stop the vehicle and are Hoses transport fluids and should
start the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving. be regularly inspected to ensure
additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include that there are no cracks or leaks.
. To avoid break‐down or failure chirping, grinding, or squealing With a multi‐point inspection, your
to start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping. dealer can inspect the hoses and
battery with full cranking power. advise if replacement is needed.
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment Lamps
the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle. important to see and be seen on
corrosion‐free. the road.
Fluids
Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
. Signs that the headlamps need
. Belts may need replacing if fluids protect the vehicle’s attention include dimming, failure
they squeak or show signs of systems and components. See to light, cracking, or damage.
cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and The brake lamps need to be
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM checked periodically to ensure
. Trained dealer technicians that they light when braking.
can inspect the belts and approved fluids.
. With a multi‐point inspection,
recommend replacement when . Engine oil and windshield
necessary. washer fluid levels should be your dealer can check the lamps
checked at every fuel fill. and note any concerns.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Shocks and Struts Tires

. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect and recommend the
Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated, right tires. Your dealer can also
for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining provide tire/wheel balancing
. Signs of wear may include the tires can save money, fuel, and services to ensure smooth
steering wheel vibration, bounce/ can reduce the risk of tire failure. vehicle operation at all speeds.
sway while braking, longer . Signs that the tires need to be Your dealer sells and services
stopping distance, or uneven replaced include three or more name brand tires.
tire wear. visible treadwear indicators; cord
Vehicle Care
. As part of the multi‐point or fabric showing through the
rubber; cracks or cuts in the To help keep the vehicle looking
inspection, trained dealer
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or like new, vehicle care products are
technicians can visually inspect
split in the tire. available from your dealer. For
the shocks and struts for
information on how to clean and
signs of leaking, blown seals,
protect the vehicle’s interior and
or damage, and can advise
exterior, see Interior Care on
when service is needed.
page 10‑88 and Exterior Care on
page 10‑84.
Wheel Alignment Windshield Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. clean and clear. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle . Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper if needed. replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
Engine Oil the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑15.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, in
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System
Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19259104, in Canada 19259105).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood and Door Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 13272719 AC3144C
1.8L L4 Engine 13272720 AC3145C
Engine Oil Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 93185674 PF2257G
1.8L L4 Engine 93185674 PF2257G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176
Spark Plugs
1.4L L4 Engine 55576026 41–117
1.8L L4 Engine 55580961 41–120
Wiper Blades
Driver – 60.0 cm (23.6 in) 96910777 —
Passenger – 45.0 cm (17.7 in) 96910780 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
1.4L L4 Engine 5.5 L 5.8 qt
1.8L L4 Engine 6.5 L 6.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 4.0 L 4.25 qt
1.8L L4 Engine 4.5 L 4.76 qt
Fuel Tank
Standard Fuel Tank 59.0 L 15.6 gal
With RPO NL6 Fuel Tank 48.0 L 12.6 gal
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid
Automatic— 6 Speed 4.0 L 4.2 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
1.4L L4 Engine C 0.70 mm (0.028 in)
Manual
Automatic
1.8L L4 Engine H 0.70 mm (0.028 in)
Manual
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
1.8L L4 Engine (with Air 1.8L L4 Engine (without Air

Conditioning) Conditioning)
1.4L L4 Engine
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Line Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with the new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior
. Vehicle delivery date and to filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian over courts in most jurisdictions Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do because it is informal, quick, and
not feel your concerns have been free of charge.
Offices
addressed after following the For further information concerning Chevrolet encourages customers
procedure outlined in Steps One eligibility in the Canadian Motor to call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
of its participation in a no-charge the General Motors Customer Care the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
General Motors of Canada Limited United States
1-800-263-7854 (French),
has committed to binding arbitration or write to: Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Chevrolet Customer
factory-related vehicle service The Mediation/Arbitration Program Assistance Center
claims. The program provides for c/o Customer Care Centre P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by General Motors of Canada Limited Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Mail Code: CA1-163-005 www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
before the arbiter. The program is Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
The inquiry should be accompanied Telephone Devices (TTYs))
settlement process, from the time by the Vehicle Identification
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
Number (VIN). 1-800-243-8872
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our From Puerto Rico:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada Mexico, Central America, and Online Owner Center

General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Manage your vehicle (U.S.)
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005 Virgin Islands) at chevrolet.com. Click on
1908 Colonel Sam Drive “Owners,” then “Manage My
General Motors de Mexico, S. de Chevrolet/Owners Login.”
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 R.L. de C.V.
www.gm.ca Customer Assistance Center Information and services
1-800-263-3777 (English) Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 customized for your specific
1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Granada vehicle — all in one convenient
1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F. place.
Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0800 . Digital owner manual, warranty
Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 information, and more.
1-800-268-6800 . Storage for online service and
Overseas Customer Assistance for maintenance records.
Please contact the local General Text Telephone (TTY) . Chevrolet dealer locator for
Motors Business Unit. Users service nationwide.
To assist customers who are deaf, . Exclusive privileges and offers.
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired . Recall notices for your specific
and who use Text Telephones vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
Assistance Center. Any TTY Services Earnings summaries.
user in the U.S. can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Other Helpful Links

. Retrieve your favorite articles, required for the vehicle, such as
quizzes, tips and multimedia hand controls or a wheelchair/
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com galleries organized into the scooter lift for the vehicle.
Chevrolet Merchandise — Features and Auto Care
www.chevymall.com Sections. For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ . Download the owner manual for call the GM Mobility Assistance
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do your vehicle, quickly and easily. Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
. FAQ . Find the Telephone (TTY) users, call
Chevrolet-recommended 1-800-833-9935.
. Contact Us
maintenance services for your General Motors of Canada also
Chevrolet Owner Centre vehicle. has a Mobility Program. Call
(Canada) chevroletowner.ca 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner
GM Mobility for details. TTY users call
Centre: Reimbursement Program 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help Roadside Assistance
representatives.
Program
. Use the Vehicle Tools section.
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles,
. Access third party enthusiast call 1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text
sites and social media networks. Telephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
. Locate owner resources such as For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
lease-end, financing, and This program is available to call 1-800-268-6800.
warranty information. qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible Service is available 24 hours a day,
aftermarket adaptive equipment 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance Roadside Assistance is not a part of

. Emergency Tow from a Public
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Road or Highway: Tow to the
When calling Roadside Assistance, nearest Chevrolet dealer for
Chevrolet and General Motors of
have the following information warranty service, or if the vehicle
Canada Limited reserve the right to
ready: was in a crash and cannot be
make any changes or discontinue
. Your name, home address, and the Roadside Assistance program at driven. Assistance is also given
home telephone number. any time without notification. when the vehicle is stuck in the
.
sand, mud, or snow.
Telephone number of your Chevrolet and General Motors of
location. Canada Limited reserve the right
. Flat Tire Change: Service to
to limit services or payment to an change a flat tire with the spare
. Location of the vehicle. tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the
. Model, year, color, and license claims are made too often, or the must be in good condition and
plate number of the vehicle. same type of claim is made many properly inflated. It is the owner's
times. responsibility for the repair or
. Odometer reading, Vehicle
replacement of the tire if it is not
Identification Number (VIN), and Services Provided covered by the warranty.
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Description of the problem. Delivery of enough fuel for the jump start a dead battery.
Coverage vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. Services Not Included in
Services are provided up to Roadside Assistance
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to
whichever comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by
locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws.
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
. Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver
person driving the vehicle without must present identification
. Mounting, dismounting,
permission from the owner is not before this service is given. or changing of snow tires,
covered. chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehicles . Trip Interruption Benefits
driven on a non-public road or and Assistance: Must be
Scheduling Service
highway. over 250 kilometers from Appointments
where your trip was started to When the vehicle requires warranty
Services Specific to qualify. General Motors of service, contact your dealer and
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles Canada Limited requires request an appointment. By
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement pre-authorization, original scheduling a service appointment
is approximately $5 Canadian. detailed receipts, and a copy and advising the service consultant
Diesel fuel delivery may be of the repair orders. Once of your transportation needs, your
restricted. Propane and other authorization has been received, dealer can help minimize your
fuels are not provided through the Roadside Assistance advisor inconvenience.
this service. will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle payment. into the service department
registration is required. immediately, keep driving it until
. Alternative Service: If it can be scheduled for service,
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed assistance cannot be provided
maps of North America are unless, of course, the problem is
right away, the Roadside safety related. If it is, please call
provided when requested either Assistance advisor may
with the most direct route or the your dealership, let them know this,
give permission to get local and ask for instructions.
most scenic route. There is a emergency road service.
limit of six requests per year. You will receive payment, up to If your dealer requests you to bring
Additional travel information $100, after sending the original the vehicle for service, you are
is also available. Allow three receipt to Roadside Assistance. urged to do so as early in the work
weeks for delivery. Mechanical failures may be day as possible to allow for
covered, however any cost for same-day repair.
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options original receipts and can only

be up to the maximum amount
Program Warranty service can generally be
allowed by GM for shuttle service.
completed while you wait. However,
To enhance your ownership In addition, for U.S. customers,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
experience, we and our participating should you arrange transportation
to minimize inconvenience by
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy through a friend or relative, limited
providing several transportation
Transportation, a customer support reimbursement for reasonable fuel
options. Depending on the
program for vehicles with the expenses may be available. Claim
circumstances, your dealer can
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty amounts should reflect actual
offer one of the following:
Coverage period in Canada), costs and be supported by original
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle Service receipts. See your dealer for
hybrid-specific warranties in both information regarding the allowance
Shuttle service is the preferred
the U.S. and Canada. amounts for reimbursement of fuel
means of offering Courtesy
or other transportation costs.
Several Courtesy Transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide
options are available to assist in shuttle service to get you to your Courtesy Rental Vehicle
reducing inconvenience when destination with minimal interruption
Your dealer may arrange to provide
warranty repairs are required. of your daily schedule. This includes
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
Courtesy Transportation is not a one-way or round-trip shuttle service
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area.
for an overnight warranty repair.
entitled “Warranty and Owner Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited
Assistance Information” furnished Reimbursement and must be supported by original
with each new vehicle provides receipts. This requires that you sign
detailed warranty coverage If the vehicle requires overnight
and complete a rental agreement
information. warranty repairs, and public
and meet state/provincial, local, and
transportation is used instead of
rental vehicle provider requirements.
your dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
Requirements vary and may eligibility pursuant to the terms and ensure that the vehicle's designed
include minimum age requirements, conditions described herein at its appearance, durability, and safety
insurance coverage, credit card, sole discretion. are preserved. The use of Genuine
etc. You are responsible for fuel GM parts can help maintain the GM
usage charges and may also be Collision Damage Repair New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
responsible for taxes, levies, usage Recycled original equipment parts
fees, excessive mileage, or rental If the vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have may also be used for repair. These
usage beyond the completion of the parts are typically removed from
repair. the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper vehicles that were total losses in
It may not be possible to provide a equipment and quality replacement prior crashes. In most cases, the
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. parts. Poorly performed collision parts being recycled are from
repairs diminish the vehicle resale undamaged sections of the vehicle.
Additional Program A recycled original equipment GM
value, and safety performance can
Information be compromised in subsequent part may be an acceptable choice
All program options, such as shuttle collisions. to maintain the vehicle's originally
service, may not be available at designed appearance and safety
every dealer. Please contact your Collision Parts performance; however, the history of
dealer for specific information Genuine GM Collision parts are new these parts is not known. Such parts
about availability. All Courtesy parts made with the same materials are not covered by the GM New
Transportation arrangements will be and construction methods as the Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
administered by appropriate dealer parts with which the vehicle was related failures are not covered by
personnel. originally built. Genuine GM that warranty.
General Motors reserves the Collision parts are the best choice to
right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
Aftermarket collision parts are also Insuring the Vehicle parts. Read the lease carefully, as
available. These are made by you may be charged at the end of
Protect your investment in the GM
companies other than GM and may the lease for poor quality repairs.
vehicle with comprehensive and
not have been tested for the vehicle.
collision insurance coverage. There If a Crash Occurs
As a result, these parts may fit
are significant differences in the
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ If there has been an injury, call
quality of coverage afforded by
corrosion problems, and may not emergency services for help. Do not
various insurance policy terms.
perform properly in subsequent leave the scene of a crash until all
Many insurance policies provide
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not matters have been taken care of.
reduced protection to the GM
covered by the GM New Vehicle Move the vehicle only if its position
vehicle by limiting compensation
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle puts you in danger, or you are
for damage repairs by using
failure related to such parts is not instructed to move it by a police
aftermarket collision parts. Some
covered by that warranty. officer.
insurance companies will not
Repair Facility specify aftermarket collision parts. Give only the necessary information
When purchasing insurance, we to police and other parties involved
GM also recommends that you recommend that you ensure that the in the crash.
choose a collision repair facility that vehicle will be repaired with GM
meets your needs before you ever For emergency towing see
original equipment collision parts. Roadside Assistance Program on
need collision repairs. Your dealer If such insurance coverage is
may have a collision repair center page 13‑5.
not available from your current
with GM-trained technicians and insurance carrier, consider switching Gather the following information:
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be to another insurance carrier.
able to recommend a collision
. Driver name, address, and
repair center that has GM-trained If the vehicle is leased, the leasing telephone number.
technicians and comparable company may require you to have . Driver license number.
equipment. insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
. Owner name, address, and
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or telephone number.
Genuine Manufacturer replacement

. Vehicle license plate number. Specify to the facility that any In such cases, you can have control
. Vehicle make, model, and required replacement collision parts of the repair and parts choices as
model year. be original equipment parts, either long as the cost stays within
new Genuine GM parts or recycled reasonable limits.
. Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember,
Number (VIN). recycled parts will not be covered Service Publications
. Insurance company and policy by the GM vehicle warranty.
number.
Ordering Information
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
. General description of the but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals
damage to the other vehicle. Depending on your policy limits, Service Manuals have the diagnosis
your insurance company may and repair information on the
Choose a reputable repair facility
initially value the repair using engines, transmission, axle,
that uses quality replacement parts.
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with suspension, brakes, electrical,
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
the repair professional, and insist on steering, body, etc.
section.
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
If the airbag has inflated, see What if the vehicle is leased, you may Service Bulletins
Will You See after an Airbag be obligated to have the vehicle Service Bulletins give additional
Inflates? on page 3‑23. repaired with Genuine GM parts, technical service information
even if your insurance coverage needed to knowledgeably service
Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost.
Repair Process General Motors cars and trucks.
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions
In the event that the vehicle requires company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
damage repairs, GM recommends you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
that you take an active role in its repair valuation based on that
repair. If you have a pre-determined insurance company's collision policy
repair facility of choice, take the repair limits, as you have no
vehicle there, or have it towed there. contractual limits with that company.
Owner Information Current and Past Models Reporting Safety

Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and Defects
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
information about the vehicle. The Reporting Safety Defects
Owner Manual includes the ORDER TOLL FREE: to the United States
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
Maintenance Schedule for all Government
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
models.
For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit has a defect which could cause
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. a crash or could cause injury or
Booklet.
Or write to: death, you should immediately
RETAIL SELL PRICE: inform the National Highway
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
shipping fees. Attention: Customer Service Traffic Safety Administration
47911 Halyard Drive (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Without Portfolio: Owner General Motors.
Plymouth, MI 48170
Manual only.
Prices are subject to change without If NHTSA receives similar
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
notice and without incurring complaints, it may open an
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
obligation. Allow ample time for investigation, and if it finds
delivery. that a safety defect exists in a
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. group of vehicles, it may order
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. a recall and remedy campaign.
funds. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to:
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors.
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Chevrolet Motor Division
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Washington, D.C. 20590 Chevrolet Customer
Transport Canada at
Assistance Center
You can also obtain other 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170
information about motor Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from: Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur.
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
crash or near crash-like situations, by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
This GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that recorded by the EDR under normal
information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal
performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age,
For example, the vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded.
computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such
control engine and transmission as law enforcement, could combine
performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of
conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data routinely
and deploy airbags in a crash, and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as: acquired during a crash
if so equipped, to provide antilock investigation.
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR,
data to help your dealer technician special equipment is required, and
service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened. manufacturer, other parties, such
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was as law enforcement, that have the
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal. information if they have access to
as radio presets, seat positions, and the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
temperature settings. traveling.
GM will not access this data or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by personal information or link with
share it with others except: with the pressing the Q button and any other GM system containing
consent of the vehicle owner or, speaking to an advisor. personal information.
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response Navigation System Radio Frequency
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of If the vehicle has a navigation
Statement
GM's defense of litigation through system, use of the system may This vehicle has systems that
the discovery process; or, as result in the storage of destinations, operate on a radio frequency that
required by law. Data that GM addresses, telephone numbers, and comply with Part 15 of the Federal
collects or receives may also be other trip information. Refer to the Communications Commission (FCC)
used for GM research needs or may navigation manual for information on rules and with Industry Canada
be made available to others for stored data and for deletion Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
research purposes, where a need is instructions. Operation is subject to the following
shown and the data is not tied to a two conditions:
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. Radio Frequency
1. The device may not cause
Identification (RFID)
OnStar® harmful interference.
RFID technology is used in some 2. The device must accept any
If the vehicle is equipped with an vehicles for functions such as tire
active OnStar system, that system interference received, including
pressure monitoring and ignition interference that may cause
may also record data in crash or system security, as well as in
near crash‐like situations. The undesired operation of the
connection with conveniences device.
OnStar Terms and Conditions such as key fobs for remote door
provides information on data locking/unlocking and starting, and Changes or modifications to any
collection and use and is available in-vehicle transmitters for garage of these systems by other than an
in the OnStar glove box kit, at door openers. RFID technology in authorized service facility could void
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or GM vehicles does not use or record authorization to use this equipment.
2 NOTES
INDEX i-1
A Airbags Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Adding Equipment to the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Accessories and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Audio System
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Add-On Electrical
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Automatic
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Alarm Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Antenna Automatic Transmission
How Does an Airbag
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Shift Lock Control
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Auxiliary
What Makes an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Appearance Care
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 B
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
When Should an Airbag
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Assistance Program, Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-20
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
i-2 INDEX
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26 C Check

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-25, 7-28 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Brake Ignition
California
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-26
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Child Restraints
Perchlorate Materials
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Infants and Young
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Lower Anchors and
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-39
Capacities and
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-49
Carbon Monoxide
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Cleaning
Cargo
Headlamps, Front Turn Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Signal, and Parking Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Cautions, Danger, and
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-32 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-30 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
INDEX i-3
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Door

Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9 Text Telephone (TTY) Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Customer Information Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Service Publications Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Compressor Kit, Tire Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11 Driver Information
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Customer Satisfaction Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Driving
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Characteristics and
Coolant D Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Daytime Running Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Courtesy Transportation Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont'd) Fluid

Overheated Protection Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-12
Electrical Equipment,
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Electrical System
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Fog Lamps
Engine Compartment
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Fuses and Circuit
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-27 Front Fog Lamp
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Instrument Panel Fuse
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Front Seats
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Engine
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Check and Service Engine
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Filling a Portable Fuel
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 F Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Filter, Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Coolant Temperature
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-43
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Cooling System Messages . . .5-29
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Requirements, California . . . . .9-43
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
INDEX i-5
Fuses General Information Heater

Engine Compartment Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Heating and Air
Fuses and Circuit Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Instrument Panel Fuse GM Mobility Reimbursement Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
G H Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Gasoline Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4 How to Wear Safety Belts
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Gauges Headlamps Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine Coolant Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 I
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-15, 9-18
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Daytime Running Ignition Transmission Lock
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Infants and Young Children,
Warning Lights and High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-21 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
i-6 INDEX
Instrument Panel Lamps (cont'd) Lights (cont'd)

Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
J Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10
LATCH System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Replacing Parts after a Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16
K Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46 StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-30 LATCH, Lower Anchors and Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Keyless Entry Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Traction Control System
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-4 Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Lighting Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
L Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-18
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-42 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Locks
Lamps Lights Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3 Antilock Brake System Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20
Headlamps, Front Turn Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Signal, and Parking Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20 for Children (LATCH
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
INDEX i-7
M Messages (cont'd) N
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Maintenance Navigation
Object Detection System . . . . .5-31
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Vehicle Data Recording
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Maintenance Schedule and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Recommended Fluids New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 O
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Object Detection System
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Mirrors
Messages Off-Road
Automatic Dimming
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Battery Voltage and Oil
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-29 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-32
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Monitor System, Tire
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 OnStar®
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
i-8 INDEX
Operation, Infotainment Perchlorate Materials R

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Radio Frequency
Ordering Personalization
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Outlets Phone
Radios
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-25, 7-28
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Overheated Engine Power
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Protection Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Overview, Infotainment Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-4 Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
P Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Recommended
Park Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Power Steering Warning
Recommended Fluids and
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Pregnancy, Using Safety
Records
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Privacy
Recreational Vehicle
Brake and P (Park) Radio Frequency
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Reduced Engine Power
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-26 Program
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Passenger Airbag Status Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8
Reimbursement Program,
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Proposition 65 Warning,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-25 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
INDEX i-9
Remote Keyless Entry Roof Seats

(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-4 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Replacement Parts Running the Vehicle While Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-31 S Securing Child
Replacing LATCH System Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-49
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Security
Replacing Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17 How to Wear Safety Belts Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Reporting Safety Defects Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Service
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17 Accessories and
Restraints Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-16 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Safety Defects Reporting Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Retained Accessory Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15
Ride Control Systems U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Maintenance, General
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Roads Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Publications Ordering
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
i-10 INDEX
Service (cont'd) Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 T

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Taillamps
Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Starting the Vehicle
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Shift Lock Control Function Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-15
Check, Automatic Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-18
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Shifting Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tires
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Sidemarker Storage Areas
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Signals, Turn and Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Spare Tire Storing the Tire Sealant
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-50
Specifications and Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
StabiliTrak Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 System
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-48
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
INDEX i-11
Tires (cont'd) Traction U

Sealant and Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-36
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-41
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Control System (TCS)/
Uniform Tire Quality
Sealant and Compressor StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Trailer
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Terminology and Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Transmission
Uniform Tire Quality Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 V
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Vehicle
Wheel Alignment and Tire Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59 Transportation Program, Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
When It Is Time for New Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Identification
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Towing Turn and Lane-Change Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-48 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Turn Signal Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-33
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-81 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51 Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
i-12 INDEX
Vehicle Care Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Storing the Tire Sealant Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-68 Windshield
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Winter
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
W Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26
Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-38

Manual Del Usuario Chevrolet Cruze 2012 Owners PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Manual Del Usuario Chevrolet Cruze 2012 Owners PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)

2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control }: Power

In Brief Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

A. Exterior Lamp Controls on I. Infotainment on page 7‑1. T. Ignition Switch or Keyless

Z. Climate Control Systems on Initial Drive

AA. Passenger Airbag Status For more detailed information, refer

Power Door Locks Seat Adjustment

Press o { to activate the safety

Seat Height Adjuster Seat Cushion Tilt Feature Reclining Seatbacks

Six-Way Manual Seat Shown,

To return the seatback to an upright Power Driver Seat

Interior Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Reading Lamps Instrument Panel Illumination Exterior Lighting

5 : Turns on the headlamps, Windshield Wiper/Washer

Climate Controls G. Rear Window Defogger G. Rear Window Defogger

Storing a Favorite Station 3. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL Satellite Radio

Cruise Control *: Press to disengage cruise Driver Information

Roadside Assistance Online Owner Center Advisors to provide a wide range

OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks { WARNING

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

If the vehicle has an ignition and it Remote Keyless Entry

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic Keyless Access Operation To customize which doors unlock

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

5. Press the ignition. When the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or Remote Vehicle Start

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Door Locks Automatic Door Locks

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Doors Remote Trunk Release

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Emergency Trunk Release Vehicle Security

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Disarming the System Immobilizer Operation

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors Interior Mirrors

The vehicle may have heated Automatic Dimming

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Vehicles with OnStar have three Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

Power Windows Express Window Operation

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21

Overload Feature Roof To open or close the sunroof, press

2-22 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Periodically open the sunroof and Safety Function

Seats and Restraints 3-1